BS-230 - New Service Manual - V2.0 - EN

BS-230 Chemistry Analyzer
Service Manual
IVD Global Technical Support Dept
Preface
© 2017 Shenzhen Mindray Bio-Medical Electronics Co., Ltd. All rights Reserved.
For this Service Manual, the issue date is 2017-09.
This manual contains the instructions necessary to operate the product safely and in accordance with its function
and intended use. Please read this manual thoroughly before using the product. Observance of this manual is
a prerequisite for proper performance and correct operation, and it ensures patient and operator safety. All
graphics including screens and printouts in this manual are for illustration purpose only and must not be used
for any other purposes. The screens and printouts on the actual product should prevail.
This manual is used for models: BS-230.
Manual introduction
Intellectual Property Statement
SHENZHEN MINDRAY BIO-MEDICAL ELECTRONICS CO., LTD. (hereinafter called Mindray) owns the
intellectual property rights to this Mindray product and this manual. This manual may refer to information
protected by copyright or patents and does not convey any license under the patent rights or copyright of
Mindray, or of others.
，，，，，，，，RealTF，
TrackWB，TrueTCR，Q-pick，AutoOLC，iVision，DBF，DRF，RDA，DRA，DFS、SyncNavi、GQ-Ana、One-
touchIP、Holo-IS、Opt-VRA、SuperVE-Cine、NFP-DSC、iTouch、iStation、BeneView、SmarTemp are the
trademarks, registered or otherwise, of Mindray in China and other countries. All other trademarks that appear
in this manual are used only for informational or editorial purposes. They are the property of their respective
owners.
Statement
All information contained in this manual is believed to be correct. Mindray shall not be liable for errors contained
herein or for incidental or consequential damages in connection with the furnishing, performance, or use of this
manual.
Mindray is responsible for the effects on safety, reliability and performance of this product, only if:
 All installation operations, expansions, changes, modifications and repairs of this product are
conducted by Mindray authorized personnel.
 All repairs involving replacement parts and associated accessories and consumables are original
(original) or approved by Mindray.
 The electrical installation of the relevant room complies with the applicable national and local
requirements.
 The product is used in accordance with the instructions for use.
Warning
It is important for the hospital or organization that employs this equipment to carry out a reasonable
service/maintenance plan. Neglect of this may result in machine breakdown or personal injury.
Note
This equipment must be operated by skilled/trained clinical professionals.
Warranty
THIS WARRANTY IS EXCLUSIVE AND IS IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESSED OR
IMPLIED, INCLUDING WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR
PURPOSE.
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 i
Exemptions
Mindray's obligation or liability under this warranty does not include any transportation or other charges or
liability for direct, indirect or consequential damages or delay resulting from the improper use or application of
the product or the use of parts or accessories not approved by Mindray or repairs by people other than Mindray
authorized personnel.
This warranty shall not extend to:
 Malfunction or damage caused by improper use or man-made failure.
 Malfunction or damage caused by unstable or out-of-range power input.
 Malfunction or damage caused by force majeure such as fire and earthquake.
 Malfunction or damage caused by improper operation or repair by unqualified or unauthorized service
people.
 Malfunction of the instrument or part whose serial number is not legible enough.
 Others not caused by instrument or part itself.
Customer service department
Manufacturer: Shenzhen Mindray Bio-Medical Electronics Co., Ltd.
Address: Mindray BuLLDing, Keji 12th Road South, High-tech
industrial park, Nanshan, Shenzhen 518057,P.R.China
Website: www.mindray.com
E-mail Address: service@mindray.com
Tel: +86 755 81888998
Fax: +86 755 26582680
EC - Representative
EC-Representative: Shanghai International Holding Corp. GmbH(Europe)
Address: Eiffestraβe 80, 20537 Hamburg, Germany
Tel: 0049-40-2513175
Fax: 0049-40-255726
Product introduction
The instrument is a computer-controlled fully-automated chemistry analyzer, intended for quantitative
determination of clinical chemistries in serum, plasma, urine, cerebrospinal fluid (CSF), and other human body
fluids. It can fulfill auto dispensing, reaction, colorimetric measurement, process monitoring, and result
calculation. It is one of the necessary tools for laboratory automation.
Safety information
This chapter provides you with safety symbols used in this manual and their meanings, summarizes the safety
hazards and operating precautions that should be considered seriously when the instrument is being operated,
and lists the labels and silkscreens that have been applied to the instrument and their indications.
Safety symbols
Safety symbols are used in this manual in order to remind you of the instructions necessary to operate the
product safely and in accordance with its function and intended use. A safety symbol and text constitutes a
warning as shown in the table below:
Symbol Meaning
Caution
Biological risks
Summary of hazards
This section lists hazards of the instrument itself. The hazards of specific operation are included in the warning
information of each operation task.
Observe the following safety precautions when using the product. Ignoring any of them may lead to personal
injury or equipment damage.
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 ii
WARNING
If the product is used in a manner not specified by our company, the protection provided by the product may be
impaired.
Electric shock hazards
WARNING
When the MAIN POWER is turned on, users other than the servicing personnel authorized by our company
must not open the rear cover or side cover.
Spillage of reagent or sample on the product may cause equipment failure and even electric shock. Do not place
sample and reagent on the product. In case of spillage, Switch off the power immediately, remove the spillage
and contact our Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
Moving Parts Hazards
WARNING
Do not touch such moving parts as sample/reagent carousel, reaction carousel, probe, mixer, and cuvette wash
station, when the system is in operation.
Exercise caution while using the ISE module Prevent your hair, legs or other parts of your body from being hurt
by the driving parts.
Do not put your fingers or hands into any open part when the system is in operation.
Photometer lamp hazards
WARNING
Eye injury could occur from light emission from the photometer lamp. Do not stare into the lamp when the system
is in operation.
If you want to replace the photometer lamp, first switch off the MAIN POWER and then wait at least 5 minutes
for the lamp to cool down before touching it. Do not touch the lamp before it cools down, or you may get burned.
Sample, calibrator and control hazards
BIOHAZARD
Inappropriately handling samples, controls and calibrators may lead to biohazardous infection. Do not touch
samples, controls, calibrators, mixtures, or waste with your bare hands. Wear gloves and lab coat and, if
necessary, goggles.
In case your skin contacts the sample, control or calibrator, follow the standard laboratory safety procedure and
consult a doctor.
The serum samples remaining in the electrodes may contain a great number of viruses. Wear gloves to prevent
infection while operating around the electrodes.
Reagent and wash solution hazards
WARNING
Reagents, diluted wash solution and concentrated wash solution are corrosive to human skins. Exercise caution
when using reagents and concentrated wash solution. In case your skin or clothes contact them, wash them off
with soap and clean water. If reagents or wash solution spills into your eyes, rinse them with much water and
consult an oculist.
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 III

Waste hazards
BIOHAZARD
Some substances contained in reagent, control, calibrator, concentrated wash solution, and waste are subject
to regulations of contamination and disposal. Dispose of the waste in accordance with your local or national rule
for biohazard waste disposal and consult the manufacturer or distributor of the reagents for details.
Wear gloves and lab coat and, if necessary, goggles.
System disposal hazards
WARNING
Materials of the analyzer are subject to contamination regulations. Dispose of the waste analyzer in accordance
with your local or national rule for waste disposal.
Fire and explosion hazards
WARNING
Ethanol is flammable substance. Please exercise caution while using ethanol around the instrument in order to
prevent fire and explosion.
Removal of analyzer from use for repair or disposal
WARNING
When the analyzer is not in use, for example, in repair, transportation or disposal process, please clean and
sterilize the parts that may cause biohazards(probe, mixer, etc.) and remind the person who handles the device
of the related hazards.
Cleaning and Decontamination
CAUTION
Appropriate decontamination is carried out if hazardous material is spilled onto or into the equipment.
No decontamination or cleaning agents are used which could cause a HAZARD as a result of a reaction with
parts of the equipment or with material contained in it. Strong acid or alkaline solutions are forbidden to clean
the equipment.
If there is any doubt about the compatibility of the decontamination or cleaning agents with parts of the
equipment or with material contained in it, please contact our customer service department or the local
distributor.
Summary of precautions
This section lists precautions to be understood during instrument operation. The precautions of specific
operation are included in the warning information of each operation task.
To use the product safely and efficiently, pay attention to the following operating precautions.
Intended use
WARNING
The instrument is an automated chemistry analyzer for in vitro diagnostic use in clinical laboratories and
designed for in vitro quantitative determination of clinical chemistries in serum, plasma, urine and cerebrospinal
fluid samples.
Please consult us before you use the instrument for other purposes.
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 IV
When drawing a clinical conclusion, please also refer to patients' clinical symptoms and other test results.
Installation Precautions
NOTE
The safety of any system incorporating the equipment is the responsibility of the assembler of the system.
Environment precautions
CAUTION
Please install and operate the system in an environment specified by this manual. Installing and operating the
system in other environment may lead to unreliable results and even equipment damage.
To relocate the system, please contact our Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
Electromagnetic noise precautions
CAUTION
Electromagnetic noise may interfere with operations of the system. Do not install devices generating excessive
electromagnetic noise around the system. Do not use such devices as radio transmitters in the room housing
the system. Do not use other CRT displays around the system.
Do not use other medical instruments around the system that may generate electromagnetic noise to interfere
with their operations.
Do not use this device in close proximity to sources of strong electromagnetic radiation (e.g. mobile phones or
radio transmitters), as these may interfere with the proper operation.
The electromagnetic environment should be evaluated prior to operation of the device.
This device has been designed and tested to CISPR 11 Class A, and in a domestic environment may cause
radio interference, in which case, you may need to take measures to mitigate the interference.
NOTE
It is the manufacturer's responsibility to provide equipment electromagnetic compatibility information to the
customer or user.
It is the user's responsibility to ensure that a compatible electromagnetic environment for the equipment can be
maintained in order that it will perform as intended.
Operating precautions
CAUTION
Take the clinical symptoms or other test results of the patient into considerations when making diagnosis based
on the measuring results produced by the system.
Operate the system strictly as instructed by this manual. Inappropriate use of the system may lead to unreliable
test results or even equipment damage or personal injury.
When using the system for the first time, run calibrations and QC tests to make sure the system is in proper
state.
Be sure to run QC tests every time when you use the system, otherwise the result may be unreliable.
Start the operating software again when the analyzing unit is powered off.
Do not uncover the reagent carousel when the system is in operation. Keep the reagent carousel cover closed.
The RS-232 port on the analyzing unit is used for connection with the operation unit only. Do not use it for other
connections. Use the cables provided by our company or your local distributor for the connection.
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 V
The operation unit is a personal computer with the operating software installed. Installing other software or
hardware on the computer may interfere with the system operation. Do not run other software when the system
is working.
Computer virus may destroy the operating software or test data. Do not use the computer for other purposes or
connect it to the Internet. If the computer is infected by virus, please install anti-virus software to check for and
clear virus.
Do not touch the display, mouse or keyboard with wet hands or hands with chemicals.
Do not place the MAIN POWER to ON again within 10 seconds after placing it to OFF; otherwise the system
may enter the protection status. If it does so, place the MAIN POWER to OFF and place it to ON again.
Chemistry parameter configuration precautions
CAUTION
To define such parameters as sample volume, reagent volume and wavelength, follow the instructions in this
manual and the instructions of reagents.
ISE module precautions
CAUTION
To prevent ISE electrodes from being damaged due to water scarcity, if the system, when equipped with an ISE
module will be powered off for a long time, perform the electrode storage maintenance.
Sample precautions
CAUTION
Use samples that are completely free of insoluble substances like fibrin or suspended matter; otherwise the
probe may be clogged.
Medicines, anticoagulants or preservative in the samples may lead to unreliable results.
Hemolysis, icterus or lipemia in the samples may lead to unreliable test results; running a serum index test
therefore, is recommended.
Store the samples properly. Improper storage may change the compositions of samples and lead to unreliable
results.
Sample volatilization may lead to unreliable results. Do not leave the sample open for a long period.
Prepare sufficient sample volume before analysis.
Load samples to correct positions on the sample carousel before the analysis begins; otherwise reliable results
may not be obtained.
Reagent, calibrator and control precautions
CAUTION
Use proper reagents, calibrators and controls on the system.
Select appropriate reagents according to the performance characteristics of the system. Consult the reagent
suppliers, our company or our authorized distributor for details, if you are not sure about your reagent choice.
Store and use the reagents, calibrators and controls strictly as instructed by the suppliers; otherwise, reliable
results or best performance of the system may not be obtained. Improper storage of reagents, calibrators and
controls may lead to unreliable results and bad performance of the system even in validity period.
Perform calibration after changing the reagents, otherwise reliable results may not be obtained.
Contamination caused by carryover among reagents may lead to unreliable test results. Consult the reagent
suppliers for details.
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 VI
ISE calibration precautions
BIOHAZARD
The calibrators contain preservatives. In case your skin contacts calibrators, wash them off with soap and water.
In case the calibrators spill into your eyes, rinse them with water and consult an oculist. If you swallow them by
mistake, see a doctor.
CAUTION
Use the calibrators specified by our company. Use of other reagents or calibrators may result in unreliable
results, or damage the Hydropneumatic system, or even shorten the electrodes life span.
Prior to using the calibrators, check if they are within the expiration date.
Place them correctly; otherwise, it may cause unreliable results, or leak, or module damage.
ISE wash solution biohazards
BIOHAZARD
The ISE wash solution is sodium hypochlorite. Use the ISE wash solution carefully to prevent it from contacting
your skins or eyes. If your skins or eyes contact the ISE wash solution, rinse them off with fresh water and
consult a doctor.
Data archiving precautions
NOTE
The system automatically stores the data to the built-in hard disk. Data loss, however, is still possible due to
mis-deletion or physical damage of the hard disk. You are recommended to regularly archive the data to such
medium as CDs.
To avoid the data loss caused by unexpected power failure, UPS (uninterrupted power supply) is recommended.
External equipment precautions
WARNING
For operating instructions and precautions of the computer and printer, please refer to their operation manuals.
External equipment connected to the analogue and digital interfaces must be authorized and complied with
relevant safety and EMC standards (e.g., IEC 60950 Safety of Information Technology Equipment Standard
and CISPR 22 EMC of Information Technology Equipment Standard (CLASS B)). Any person, who connects
additional equipment to the signal input or output ports and configures an IVD system, is responsible for
ensuring that the system works normally and complies with the safety and EMC requirements. If you have any
questions, consult the technical services department of your local representative.
Maintenance and Servicing Precautions
CAUTION
Maintain the system strictly as instructed by this manual. Inappropriate maintenance may lead to unreliable
results, equipment damage or personal injury.
To wipe off dust from the system surface, use a soft, clean and wet (not too wet) cloth soaked with soap water
rather than organic solvents such as ethanol. After cleaning, wipe the surface dry with dry cloth.
Switch off all the powers and disconnect the power plug before cleaning. Take necessary measures to prevent
water ingression, otherwise equipment damage or personal injury may be caused.
Replacement of such major parts as photometer lamp, probe, mixer and syringe assembly must be followed by
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 VII

a calibration.
Replacement of the photometer lamp should be done when the system power has been switched off for at least
5 minutes.
If the system fails and needs servicing, contact our Customer Service Department or the local distributor. The
system may need to be stopped or transported during servicing, which will probably cause biohazards, electric
shock hazards and moving part hazards. Exercise caution when prepare the system for servicing.
Wear gloves and lab coat and, if necessary, goggles.
NOTE
Check the safe state of the equipment after repair. Make sure the equipment is safe and then offer it to the
customer.
Tube and liquid container precautions
WARNING
When the tube or the part that contain liquid become aged or damaged, please stop its use immediately and
contact our customer service department or your local distributor to check and replace it.
Labels and silkscreen

The following labels and silkscreen are used on the product for system identification and operating instruction.
For the label marked with , please consult the related documentations in order to find out the nature of the
potential HAZARDS and any actions which have to be taken to avoid them.
Check the labels regularly for cleanliness and integrity. If any of the labels becomes vague or peels off, contact
our Customer Service Department or your local distributor for replacement.
Labels and silkscreen list
Symbol Meaning
Serial Number
Date of Manufacture
Manufacturer
CE marking
Authorized Representative in the European

Community
The following definition of the WEEE label applies

to EU member states only: The use of this
symbol indicates that this product should not be
treated as household waste. By ensuring that
this product is disposed of correctly, you will help
prevent bringing potential negative
consequences to the environment and human
health. For more detailed information with
regard to returning and recycling this product,
please consult the distributor from whom you
purchased the product.
In Vitro diagnostic medical device
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 VIII

Symbol Meaning
Biological risks
Caution
Caution: hot surface
“ON” (Power)
“OFF” (Power)
“ON” for a part of equipment
“OFF” for a part of equipment
Serial interface
Protective conductor terminal
Fuse(for models powered by 220V-230V~ or

220V/230V~ supply voltage)
Fuse(for models powered by 110V/115V~ supply
voltage)
Instrument Labels and Silkscreen

The positions on the sample /reagent carousel
This symbol indicates the positions on the sample/reagent carousel. Middle ring: 1~40. Inner ring: 41~80
Interfaces for fluid connection

This symbol located on the fluid connection interfaces indicates the connection of fluid tubing.
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 IX
ISE tube installation location

This symbol indicates the specific tubes of ISE module.
Humidity range
This symbol indicates the humidity requirement under normal working condition.
Atmospheric pressure
This symbol indicates the atmospheric pressure requirement under normal working condition.
Temperature limit
This symbol indicates the temperature requirement under normal working condition.
Warning labels
Biohazard warning
This label indicating the risk of biohazardous infection is located in the following positions:
 Probe
 Waste outlet
 Waste tank
Moving parts warning

This symbol and text indicating the hazardous moving parts is located in the following positions:
 Probe
 Mixer
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 X
 Wash station
Photometer lamp warning

This symbol and text located on the lamp housing reminds you of not touching the lamp before it gets cool.
Probe collision warning

This symbol and text located near the sample/reagent carousel and reaction carousel reminds you of not
opening the cover to prevent from damaging the probe.
ISE module
This symbol and text located on the left side panel of the analyzer. Please turn off the main power before opening
the small door.
Liquid level floater

This symbol and text is located near the liquid level floater of the DI water tank and the wash solution tank,
Please do not take out the liquid level floater during test.
Cuvette replacement window

This symbol and text is located on the cuvette replacement window.
Risk of injury when replacing the lamp

This label is located close to the door of the lamp. Do not touch the moving parts when replacing the lamp.
Chemical hazard
This label is applied on the diluted wash solution tank. Please take protective measures to prevent chemical
hazard.
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 XI
Cabinet
This label is applied at the middle of the cabinet back. If you want to relocate your analyzer, contact our
Customer Service Department or your local distributor. When relocating it, do not carry it with the cabinet. Only
when the cabinet is supported by the anchors, can the analyzer be placed on the cabinet.
User Permissions
 Engineer username: serviceuser
 Password: #BS8A#SEU
Note: After logging into the analyzer using the engineer on a client, remember to switch back to the
account of engineer.
Revision history
Chapter History Version
1.Added revision history
Preface V1.0
2. Added description about user permission
Chapter 1 1. Rearranged V1.0
1.Rearranged
Chapter 2 V1.0
2. Changed FRU
1. Rearranged
2. Changed FRU
Chapter 3 V1.0
3. Changed wrong description
4. Added ISE
1. Rearranged
2. Changed FRU
Chapter 4 V1.0
3. Changed PCB picture
4. Added 4.5.4
1. Rearranged
2. Added 6.2
3. Added 6.3
Chapter 6 V1.0
4. Added 6.6.2
5. Added 6.7
6. Added6.8
1. Rearranged
Chapter 7 2. Changed picture. V1.0
3. Added7.9
1. Rearranged
Chapter 8 2. Added 8.1 V1.0
3. Added 8.6-8.8
1. Rearranged
Chapter 10 2. Added 10.1~10.3 V1.0
3. Changed 10.4
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 XII

Chapter 11 1. Added chapter V1.0

Added :
1. Installation Acceptance Report
2. Moving Parts Position Confirmation Guide (No Alignment
Tooling)
Appendices V1.0
3. Tool list
4. Error Information Feedback Form
5. Series Recovery Checklist
6. Maintenance log sheet
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 XIII

Table of Contents
Preface ............................................................................................................................................................ i
Manual introduction................................................................................................................................... i
Intellectual Property Statement .......................................................................................................... i
Statement .......................................................................................................................................... i
Warranty ............................................................................................................................................ i
Exemptions ....................................................................................................................................... ii
Customer service department ........................................................................................................... ii
EC - Representative.......................................................................................................................... ii
Product introduction ......................................................................................................................... II
Safety information ............................................................................................................................ II
Summary of hazards ........................................................................................................................ II
Summary of precautions ................................................................................................................. IV
Labels and silkscreen ................................................................................................................... VIII
Instrument Labels and Silkscreen.................................................................................................... IX
User Permissions .................................................................................................................................. XII
Revision history .................................................................................................................................... XII
Table of Contents ........................................................................................................................................ XIV
1 System Description.............................................................................................................................. 1-1
1.1 Overview ................................................................................................................... 1-1
1.2 Components of Analyzing Unit ................................................................................... 1-1
1.3 Functions of Analyzing Unit ........................................................................................ 1-2
2 System Performance and Workflow ..................................................................................................... 2-1
2.1 Major Specifications ................................................................................................... 2-1
2.1.1 General Specifications ......................................................................................................... 2-1
2.2 Sample Specifications ................................................................................................ 2-1
2.2.1 Reagent Specifications ......................................................................................................... 2-2
2.2.2 Specifications of Reaction System ........................................................................................ 2-3
2.2.3 Specifications of Operation Unit............................................................................................ 2-4
2.2.4 Typical Test Procedure ......................................................................................................... 2-4
2.2.5 Startup Procedure ................................................................................................................ 2-4
2.2.6 Shutdown Procedure ............................................................................................................ 2-5
2.2.7 Workflow Descriptions .......................................................................................................... 2-5
2.2.8 Measuring Points ................................................................................................................. 2-6
3 Moudules and Units ............................................................................................................................. 3-1
3.1 Shell Assembly .......................................................................................................... 3-1
3.1.1 Module Functions ................................................................................................................. 3-1
3.1.2 Component Locations and FRU Details ................................................................................ 3-1
3.1.3 Removing and Reinstalling Shielding Cover ......................................................................... 3-2
3.1.4 Removing and Reinstalling Left and Right Panels ................................................................. 3-2
3.1.5 Removing and Reinstalling Front Panel ................................................................................ 3-2
3.1.6 Removing and Reinstalling Panels ....................................................................................... 3-3
3.1.7 Replacing Air Spring ............................................................................................................. 3-3
3.1.8 Remove the dust from the fans ............................................................................................. 3-4
3.2 Frame Assembly ........................................................................................................ 3-4
3.2.1 Module Functions ................................................................................................................. 3-4
3.2.2 Component Locations and FRU Details ................................................................................ 3-5
3.2.3 Replacing Front and Rear Dust Screens............................................................................... 3-5
3.3 Reaction Carousel Assembly...................................................................................... 3-6
3.3.1 Main functions ...................................................................................................................... 3-6
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 XIV

3.3.2 Locations and FRU details ................................................................................................... 3-6

3.3.3 Replacing the cables of the reaction carousel cover ............................................................. 3-7
3.3.4 Replacing the cable of the heat insulation chamber .............................................................. 3-8
3.3.5 Replacing Home Position Sensor and Coder Sensor .......................................................... 3-10
3.3.6 Replacing motor assembly and synchronous belt ............................................................... 3-12
3.3.7 Replacing Reaction Cuvette ............................................................................................... 3-13
3.4 Sample/Reagent carousel cover assembly ............................................................... 3-13
3.4.1 Module Functions ............................................................................................................... 3-13
3.4.2 Locations and FRU details ................................................................................................. 3-13
3.4.3 Replacing Sample/Reagent Carousel Body Assembly ........................................................ 3-15
3.4.4 Replacing Reagent Temperature Sensor ............................................................................ 3-16
3.4.5 Replacing cooler(Peltier) and sealing ring........................................................................... 3-18
3.4.6 Replacing Home Position Sensor and Coder Sensor .......................................................... 3-19
3.4.7 Replacing Sample/Reagent Carousel Motor Assembly ....................................................... 3-20
3.4.8 Replacing the synchronous belt .......................................................................................... 3-21
3.4.9 Replacing cooling fan of reagent refrigeration ..................................................................... 3-23
3.4.10 Replacing Bar Code Reader ............................................................................................. 3-24
3.4.11 Replacing Reagent Anti-fogging Heating Assembly ........................................................... 3-25
3.5 Probe assembly ....................................................................................................... 3-26
3.5.2 Locations and FRU details ................................................................................................. 3-27
3.5.3 Replacing the optical coupler of horizontal and vertical movement ...................................... 3-28
3.5.4 Replacing probe assembly，Anti-collision spring and powder screws ................................. 3-29
3.5.5 Replacing Reagent Preheating Assembly ........................................................................... 3-30
3.5.6 Replacing Liquid Level Detection Board (LLD Board).......................................................... 3-31
3.5.7 Replacing horizontal rotational synchronous belt ................................................................ 3-32
3.5.8 Replacement of Horizontal Motor Assembly........................................................................ 3-33
3.5.9 Replacement of Vertical Motor Assembly ............................................................................ 3-34
3.5.10 Replacing Probe Drive Assembly ...................................................................................... 3-35
3.6 Mixer Assembly........................................................................................................ 3-37
3.6.2 Component Locations and FRU Details .............................................................................. 3-37
3.6.3 Replacing the optical coupler of horizontal and vertical movement ...................................... 3-38
3.6.4 Replacing horizontal rotational synchronous belt ................................................................ 3-39
3.6.5 Replacement of Horizontal Motor Assembly........................................................................ 3-40
3.6.6 Replacing DC motor, mixer and powder screws .................................................................. 3-41
3.6.7 Replacement of Vertical Motor Assembly ............................................................................ 3-42
3.6.8 Replacement of Mixer Drive Assembly................................................................................ 3-43
3.7 Photometer Unit ....................................................................................................... 3-45
3.7.1 Functions and Parameters ................................................................................................. 3-45
3.7.2 Composition and Structure of Optical Assembly.................................................................. 3-45
3.7.3 Replacing Lamp ................................................................................................................. 3-46
3.7.4 Disassembling/Assembling Optical Assembly ..................................................................... 3-47
3.7.5 Replacing Filter .................................................................................................................. 3-49
3.7.6 Replacing Preamplifier Board ............................................................................................. 3-50
3.7.7 Replacing lamp fan ............................................................................................................ 3-50
3.7.8 Replacing Reaction Cuvette ............................................................................................... 3-51
3.7.9 Replacing AD collection board ............................................................................................ 3-52
3.8 ISE Unit (Optional) ................................................................................................... 3-53
3.8.2 Structure and FRU List ....................................................................................................... 3-57
3.8.3 Unclogging Waste Tubes .................................................................................................... 3-58
3.8.4 Replacing Pump Tube ........................................................................................................ 3-59
3.8.5 Replacing Calibrator Tube .................................................................................................. 3-59
3.8.6 Replacing ISE electrode ..................................................................................................... 3-60
3.8.7 Removing reagent pack(ISE).............................................................................................. 3-61
3.8.8 Storing electrodes(ISE) ...................................................................................................... 3-61
3.8.9 Inventory Calculation of Reagent Pack ............................................................................... 3-62
4 Hardware Circuits ................................................................................................................................ 4-1
4.1 Overview ................................................................................................................... 4-1
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 XV
4.2 Harzards .................................................................................................................... 4-1

4.3 Summary of PCBAs ................................................................................................... 4-1
4.4 Functions of PCBA..................................................................................................... 4-2
4.4.1 Control Structure .................................................................................................................. 4-2
4.4.2 Main Board .......................................................................................................................... 4-3
4.4.3 Power driver board ............................................................................................................... 4-7
4.4.4 AD collection board ............................................................................................................. 4-11
4.4.5 Pre-amplification Board ...................................................................................................... 4-13
4.4.6 Liquid Level Detection Board（LLD Board） ...................................................................... 4-14
4.4.7 Reagent Refrigeration Board .............................................................................................. 4-16
4.5 Power Supply System .............................................................................................. 4-21
4.5.1 Power Supply System of Whole Unit .................................................................................. 4-21
4.5.2 Performance Indices .......................................................................................................... 4-21
4.5.3 Power supply board............................................................................................................ 4-22
4.5.4 Replacing Power switch ..................................................................................................... 4-26
4.6 Wiring Diagram of Analyzer ...................................................................................... 4-29
5 Fluidic system ..................................................................................................................................... 5-1
5.1 Overview ................................................................................................................... 5-1
5.2 Fluidic Diagram .......................................................................................................... 5-1
5.3 Principles of Hydropneumatic System ........................................................................ 5-1
5.3.1 Probe wash module.............................................................................................................. 5-1
5.3.2 Water Supply/Drainage Module ............................................................................................ 5-2
5.3.3 Interfaces for fluid connection ............................................................................................... 5-3
5.4 Introduction of Fluidic Actions ..................................................................................... 5-4
5.4.1 Fluidic Initialization ............................................................................................................... 5-4
5.5 Removing and Reinstalling Hydropneumatic Components .......................................... 5-4
5.5.1 Overview.............................................................................................................................. 5-4
5.5.2 Probe and mixer wash module ............................................................................................. 5-5
5.5.3 External Modules ............................................................................................................... 5-10
6 Software .............................................................................................................................................. 6-1
6.1 Software Installation................................................................................................... 6-1
6.1.1 Introduction of Installation Package ...................................................................................... 6-1
6.1.2 Analyzer Software Version Information ................................................................................. 6-1
6.1.3 Folder Structure ................................................................................................................... 6-2
6.1.4 Log Files .............................................................................................................................. 6-3
6.2 Computer Settings ..................................................................................................... 6-4
6.2.1 Computer Requirements (for International Customers) ......................................................... 6-4
6.2.2 Hard disk defragment ........................................................................................................... 6-5
6.2.3 Application Software ............................................................................................................. 6-5
6.2.4 Remove Screen Saver and System Standby ........................................................................ 6-5
6.2.5 Disable Automatic Synchronization with Internet Time Server ............................................... 6-6
6.2.6 Turn off Automatic Updates .................................................................................................. 6-7
6.2.7 Resolution Setting ................................................................................................................ 6-7
6.2.8 Confirmation of Administrator Permission and UAC .............................................................. 6-8
6.2.9 SQL Version Check ............................................................................................................ 6-10
6.2.10 Check the installation. ...................................................................................................... 6-10
6.2.11 Firewall Whitelist Setting .................................................................................................... 6-11
6.3 Installation of Operating Software.............................................................................. 6-11
6.3.1 Preparation before Installation ............................................................................................. 6-11
6.3.2 Software Installation ............................................................................................................ 6-11
6.3.3 Confirm the configuration file .............................................................................................. 6-14
6.4 Software Upgrading ................................................................................................. 6-15
6.4.1 Preparation before Upgrading ............................................................................................ 6-15
6.4.2 Upgrading of Operating Software ....................................................................................... 6-17
6.4.3 Upgrading Control System ................................................................................................. 6-18
6.4.4 Confirmation after Upgrading.............................................................................................. 6-20
6.5 Software startup process and autostart settings ....................................................... 6-20
6.5.1 Normal Startup Procedure .................................................................................................. 6-20
6.5.2 Software antostart settings ................................................................................................. 6-20
6.6 Software and SQL Database Uninstallation .............................................................. 6-22
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 XVI

6.6.1 Remove the software ......................................................................................................... 6-22

6.6.2 SQL Database Uninstalling................................................................................................. 6-22
6.7 Data backup and recovery ....................................................................................... 6-23
6.7.1 Data backup....................................................................................................................... 6-23
6.7.2 Database Recovery............................................................................................................ 6-23
6.7.3 Unit parameter Backup....................................................................................................... 6-23
6.7.4 Parameter Configuration .................................................................................................... 6-24
6.8 Demo Software Setup .............................................................................................. 6-25
7 Alignment ............................................................................................................................................ 7-1
7.1 Basic Operation ......................................................................................................... 7-1
7.1.1 Utility - Maintenance ............................................................................................................. 7-1
7.1.2 Alignment fixtures ................................................................................................................. 7-1
7.1.3 Mechanical Reset................................................................................................................. 7-3
7.2 Alignment Procedure.................................................................................................. 7-4
7.3 Photometric Unit ........................................................................................................ 7-5
7.3.1 Signal Collecting Position Adjustment ................................................................................... 7-5
7.3.2 Photoelectric Gain Adjustment .............................................................................................. 7-6
7.4 Sample/Reagent carousel unit ................................................................................... 7-8
7.4.1 Reaction Carousel Circumferential Position Adjustment ........................................................ 7-8
7.4.2 Sample/Reagent Carousel Outer Ring Circumferential Position ........................................... 7-11
7.4.3 Sample/Reagent Carousel Middle Ring Circumferential Position......................................... 7-13
7.4.4 Sample/Reagent Carousel Inner Ring Circumferential Position ........................................... 7-13
7.5 Probe unit ................................................................................................................ 7-14
7.5.1 Probe to Horizontal Position on Reaction Carousel ............................................................. 7-14
7.5.2 Probe to Horizontal Positions on Wash Well ....................................................................... 7-16
7.5.3 Probe to Sample/Reagent Carousel Outer Ring.................................................................. 7-16
7.5.4 Probe to Sample/Reagent Carousel Middle Ring ................................................................ 7-17
7.5.5 Probe to Sample/Reagent Carousel Inner Ring .................................................................. 7-17
7.5.6 Probe to Vertical Limit Position on Reaction Carousel ......................................................... 7-17
7.5.7 Probe to Vertical Limit Position in Reagent Bottle................................................................ 7-18
7.5.8 Probe to Horizontal Postion on ISE Part (Optional) ............................................................. 7-18
7.5.9 Probe to Vertical Postion on ISE Part (Optional) ................................................................. 7-19
7.6 Mixer Unit ................................................................................................................ 7-20
7.6.1 Mixer to Horizontal Position on Reaction Carousel .............................................................. 7-21
7.6.2 Mixer to Horizontal Wash Position ...................................................................................... 7-22
7.6.3 Mixer to Vertical Position on Reaction Carousel .................................................................. 7-23
7.7 Bar Code Unit (Optional) .......................................................................................... 7-24
7.7.1 Bar Code Sticking Requirements ........................................................................................ 7-24
7.7.2 Bar code Unit ..................................................................................................................... 7-25
7.7.3 Bar Code reader model Adjustment .................................................................................... 7-26
7.7.4 Bar Code Reader Position Adjustment ................................................................................ 7-27
7.7.5 Bar Code Stability Test ....................................................................................................... 7-28
7.8 Hydro Unit................................................................................................................ 7-29
7.8.1 Preparations before Alignment ........................................................................................... 7-30
7.8.2 Checking Floater and Valve Status ..................................................................................... 7-31
7.8.3 Probe syringe Return Volume Alignment............................................................................. 7-32
7.8.4 Fluidic Prime ...................................................................................................................... 7-32
7.9 Pyrology Unit ........................................................................................................... 7-33
7.9.1 Configuration of Sensor Parameters ................................................................................... 7-33
7.9.2 Observe Temperature Curve .............................................................................................. 7-34
7.10 ISE Unit ................................................................................................................... 7-35
7.10.1 Module Intialization........................................................................................................... 7-35
7.10.2 ISE Error Codes ............................................................................................................... 7-36
8 Installation ........................................................................................................................................... 8-1
8.1 Installation Procedure ................................................................................................ 8-1
8.1.1 Installation Procedure........................................................................................................... 8-1
8.1.2 Installation Time Consumption.............................................................................................. 8-1
8.2 Check before Installation ............................................................................................ 8-2
8.2.1 Installation Environment ....................................................................................................... 8-2
8.2.2 Configuration Check ............................................................................................................. 8-2
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 XVII

8.3 Installation Requirements ........................................................................................... 8-2

8.3.1 Space and Accessibility Requirements for Installation ........................................................... 8-2
8.3.2 Power Supply and Noise ...................................................................................................... 8-3
8.3.3 Water Supply and Drainage.................................................................................................. 8-3
8.3.4 Computer Requirements ...................................................................................................... 8-4
8.4 Installing the Analyzer ................................................................................................ 8-4
8.4.1 Unpacking ............................................................................................................................ 8-4
8.4.2 Removing Packaging ........................................................................................................... 8-6
8.4.3 Installing Accessories ........................................................................................................... 8-6
8.4.4 Connect the pipeline........................................................................................................... 8-10
8.4.5 Connecting the Overall System .......................................................................................... 8-12
8.4.6 Setting the PC .................................................................................................................... 8-13
8.4.7 Software Installation ........................................................................................................... 8-13
8.4.8 Starting up the System ....................................................................................................... 8-13
8.4.9 Aligning the Analyzer .......................................................................................................... 8-14
8.4.10 Aligning the ISE (Optional)................................................................................................ 8-15
8.4.11 Prime the fluidic system .................................................................................................... 8-15
8.4.12 Initial Maintenance Record ............................................................................................... 8-15
8.4.13 Startup Initialization .......................................................................................................... 8-15
8.4.14 Importing and Configuring Chemistry Parameters of Mindray Reagents ............................ 8-16
8.4.15 Running Water Test .......................................................................................................... 8-18
8.5 Verifying Basic Performance .................................................................................... 8-22
8.5.1 Checking System Status .................................................................................................... 8-22
8.5.2 Testing Movement Positioning Performance ....................................................................... 8-22
8.5.3 Testing Optical Performance............................................................................................... 8-23
8.5.4 Testing Bar Code Performance ........................................................................................... 8-23
8.5.5 Testing Clinical Performance .............................................................................................. 8-23
8.6 LIS Connection ........................................................................................................ 8-24
8.7 Backing Up Data ...................................................................................................... 8-24
8.8 Handling Exceptions in Installation ........................................................................... 8-24
8.9 List of accessories and functions .............................................................................. 8-24
9 Preventive maintenance ...................................................................................................................... 9-1
9.1 Overview ................................................................................................................... 9-1
9.1.1 Preventive maintenance ....................................................................................................... 9-1
9.1.2 Biochemistry maintenance commands.................................................................................. 9-1
9.1.3 ISE maintenance commands ................................................................................................ 9-2
9.2 Maintenance Tools ..................................................................................................... 9-4
9.3 Maintenance Procedure ............................................................................................. 9-5
9.3.1 Procedure ............................................................................................................................ 9-5
9.3.2 Steps ................................................................................................................................... 9-5
9.4 Post-maintenance Check ......................................................................................... 9-10
10 Troubleshooting ......................................................................................................................... 10-1
10.1 Overview ................................................................................................................. 10-1
10.1.1 Classification of logs......................................................................................................... 10-1
10.1.2 Viewing and handling logs ................................................................................................ 10-2
10.1.3 Error Troubleshooting ....................................................................................................... 10-3
10.2 Common Troubleshooting ........................................................................................ 10-4
10.2.1 Database initializing failed ................................................................................................ 10-4
10.2.2 Database backup failed .................................................................................................... 10-5
10.2.3 Database Version Is Higher Than the Current Software Version ........................................ 10-5
10.2.4 Unmatched Operating Software VersionA22039 ............................................................... 10-7
10.2.5 Troubleshooting after replacing the new cuvettes.............................................................. 10-7
10.2.6 Bar Code Scanning Faults ................................................................................................ 10-9
10.2.7 Light Intensity Is Too Weak C07003 ................................................................................ 10-10
10.2.8 Lamp Is Not Turned On C07005 ..................................................................................... 10-10
10.2.9 Light Intensity Is Too Strong C07006 ............................................................................... 10-11
10.2.10 Analyzer cannot be connected ....................................................................................... 10-11
10.2.11 Sample Probe Fails to Detect the Level of the Wash Well A01028 ................................. 10-13
10.2.12 Sample Probe Fails to Detect the Level on the Reaction Carousel when Dispensing A01033
................................................................................................................................................. 10-14
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 XVIII

10.2.13 The Probe is spinning or leaking ................................................................................... 10-15

10.2.14 Dark current is too high C07007 ................................................................................... 10-16
10.2.15 Clinical Result Problems ............................................................................................... 10-17
10.3 Data alarms ........................................................................................................... 10-20
10.4 Error messages and corrective actions ................................................................... 10-29
11 Parts List ............................................................................................................................................ 11-1
12 LIS Connection Setting and Troubleshooting .............................................................................. 12-1
12.1 Overview of LIS ....................................................................................................... 12-1
12.2 LIS Networking ........................................................................................................ 12-1
12.2.1 Querying State of RS232 Serial Port Card and Network Card ........................................... 12-1
12.2.2 Checking Network Status ................................................................................................. 12-2
12.3 LIS Parameter Setup................................................................................................ 12-4
12.3.1 Introduction to Protocols ................................................................................................... 12-4
12.3.2 Parameter Setup on a Workstation Computer ................................................................... 12-5
12.3.3 Basic Concept of Unidirectional/Bidirectional LIS Communication ..................................... 12-5
12.3.4 Channel ID Setup ............................................................................................................. 12-6
12.4 Operation Guidance of Test Tool .............................................................................. 12-8
12.4.1 Operation Procedure of Test Tool...................................................................................... 12-8
12.5 Common Problems and Corrective Measures ......................................................... 12-11
12.5.1 LIS cannot be connected ................................................................................................. 12-11
12.5.2 LIS communication interrupted suddenly ........................................................................ 12-12
12.5.3 Issues with firewall ......................................................................................................... 12-13
12.5.4 Invalid LIS response ....................................................................................................... 12-13
12.5.5 ISE response time out .................................................................................................... 12-14
12.5.6 LIS communication result slowly transmitted ................................................................... 12-15
12.5.7 Part of item results missed during LIS communication .................................................... 12-15
12.6 Bidirectional LIS communication interaction log ...................................................... 12-15
13 Instrument Relocation and Emptying .......................................................................................... 13-1
13.1 Overview ................................................................................................................. 13-1
13.1.1 Short-Term Suspension .................................................................................................... 13-1
13.1.2 Long-Term Suspension..................................................................................................... 13-1
13.1.3 Analyzer Relocation.......................................................................................................... 13-1
13.2 Emptying Fluidic Tubes ............................................................................................ 13-2
13.2.1 Empty ISE Tube (optional) ................................................................................................ 13-2
13.2.2 Empty exterior Tube ......................................................................................................... 13-4
13.2.3 Empty Interior Tube .......................................................................................................... 13-6
13.2.4 Emptying Waste Tubes ..................................................................................................... 13-7
13.2.5 Use Count of Emptying Pump and Syringe ....................................................................... 13-7
13.2.6 Confirmation after emptying.............................................................................................. 13-8
13.3 Clearing Data........................................................................................................... 13-8
13.4 Packing.................................................................................................................... 13-9
13.4.1 Removing the Tubes ........................................................................................................ 13-9
13.4.2 Removing the Accessories ............................................................................................... 13-9
13.4.3 Securing the Assemblies by Tape and Foam ..................................................................... 13-9
13.4.4 Securing and Packing the Main Unit ................................................................................. 13-9
13.4.5 Packing the Accessories ................................................................................................. 13-10
13.4.6 Packing the Main Unit and Display of the PC .................................................................. 13-10
14 Optional Modules ....................................................................................................................... 14-1
14.1 Overview ................................................................................................................. 14-1
14.2 ISE Module .............................................................................................................. 14-1
14.2.1 Overview of ISE Module ................................................................................................... 14-1
14.2.2 Installing the ISE Module .................................................................................................. 14-1
14.2.3 Alignment of the ISE module ............................................................................................ 14-7
14.2.4 Precautions for ISE .......................................................................................................... 14-9
14.3 Bar Code Scanning Module ................................................................................... 14-10
14.3.1 Overview of Bar Code Scanning Module......................................................................... 14-10
14.3.2 Installing the Barcode Scanner ....................................................................................... 14-10
Appendices............................................................................................................................................. 14-14
A.1 BS-230 Installation Acceptance Report ...................................................................................... 14-14
A.2 BS-230 Moving Parts Position Confirmation Guide (No Alignment Tooling) ................................. 14-14
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 XIX

A.3 Tool list ...................................................................................................................................... 14-14

A.4 BS-230_Error Information Feedback Form_V1.0_EN ................................................................. 14-14
A.5 BS-230 Series Recovery Checklist ............................................................................................. 14-14
A.6 Maintenance log sheet ............................................................................................................... 14-14
A.7 Fluidic Diagram .......................................................................................................................... 14-15
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 XX
1 System Description
1.1 Overview
The BS-230 is a fully automated and computer-controlled chemistry analyzer designed for the in vitro
determination of clinical chemistries in serum, plasma, urine, and cerebrospinal fluid (CSF) samples. This
product consists of Analyzing Unit and Operation Unit.
Figure 1-1 Chemistry analyzer

The throughput of the analyzer is at most 200 tests/hour.
Throughput of the ISE module:
300 tests/hour for serum and plasma (Na+, K+ and Cl-)
198 tests/hour for urine (Na+, K+, Cl-)
Maximum throughput of biochemistry and ISE: 400 tests/hour.
1.2 Components of Analyzing Unit
The Chemistry Analyzer consists of the analyzing unit (analyzer), operation unit (computer), and output unit
(printer).
 The analyzing unit performs all operations of sample analysis, which include dispensing sample and
reagent, mixing, reaction and measurement , ISE analysis, etc.
 The operation unit is a computer installed with the operating software, which controls operation of the
analyzer and processes the test data.
 The printer is used to print test results.
 The operation unit and the analyzing unit are independent structurally and communicate with each other
through the serial port. The operation unit sends data and instructions to the analyzing unit and acquires
the data and status information from the analyzing unit.
Analyzing
unit
PC(Operating software)
Main unit
Printer
Figure 1-2 System structure
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 1-1

The instrument is composed of the following components: one reaction carousel, one sample/reagent carousel,
one probe, one mixer, one photometric detection system, one ISE module (optional). The optical measurement
system performs photometric measurement to the reaction cuvettes that hold "sample+reagent" mixture.
Figure 1-3 Layout of the analyzer’s operation panel
(1) Probe (2) Sample/reagent carousel

(3)Mixer (4) Reaction carousel
1.3 Functions of Analyzing Unit

The working procedure of the system is described as follows.
1) The system resets to initialize all mechanical units and wash the exterior and interior of the probe and mixer.
2) The reagent carousel rotates to the R1 position, from which the probe aspirates reagent.
3) The reaction cuvettes are carried to the reagent dispense position. Then rotate the probe with R1 added to
the reaction carousel and dispense R1 into the reaction cuvette;
4) R1 is incubated in the cuvette.
5) The sample carousel rotates to the specified aspirating position, and the probe lowers down to aspirate
specified amount of sample.
6) The reaction cuvette with R1 added is carried to the sample dispense position, to which the probe rotates
to dispense sample after aspirating from the sample/reagent carousel.
7) The reaction cuvettes with sample added are carried to the sample mixing position for stirring.
8) For double-reagent tests, the reagent carousel rotates to the R2 position after a fixed period, and the probe
lowers down to aspirate R2.
9) The reaction cuvette is carried to the R2 dispense position. Then rotate the probe with R2 added to the
reaction carousel and dispense R2 into the reaction cuvette;
10) With R2 added, the reaction cuvette rotates to the mixing position for stirring.
11) During each period, the reaction cuvette experiences photometric measurement (absorbance data
collecting) when passing by the photometric unit.
Table 1-1 Functions of system units
Unit Name Functions
Probe unit Performs aspiration and dispensing for all biochemistries and ISE tests.
Performs aspiration and dispensing of reagents for all biochemistry
tests.
Sample/Reagent The outer ring can hold 40 sample containers.
carousel unit The middle ring supports 40ml and 20ml reagent bottles and can hold
40 sample containers with adapter.
The inner ring supports 20ml reagent bottles.
The sample/reagent carousel provides a refrigerating environment
which is constant within 2°C-12°C for 24 hours a day.
The outer and middle rings support barcode scanning.

Reaction Carousel 40 positions are available for plastic cuvettes.

Unit
Mixer Unit Mixes the reaction liquid.
Photometric unit Reversed optics with gratings, supporting 8 wavelength: 340nm,
405nm, 450nm, 510nm, 546nm, 578nm, 630nm, 670nm
ISE Unit (Optional) Provides the function of ISE measurement

2 System Performance and Workflow

2.1 Major Specifications
2.1.1 General Specifications
Table 2-1 General Specifications
System Random selection, multi-channel, multi-chemistry, capable to pause test and
adding new tests
System structure Analyzing unit + computer + printer
Sample type Serum, urine, plasma, CSF (cerebrospinal fluid) etc.
Maximum number of 39 double-reagent tests/78 single-reagent tests
tests run simultaneously
Throughput At most 200 tests/hour (single/double-reagent), and at most 400 tests/hour
(with ISE module)
Reaction type Endpoint, Kinetic and Fixed-time; supporting single-/double-reagent tests,
and single-/double-wavelength tests
Reaction time The longest reaction time is 20 minutes for single-reagent test, and 10
minutes for double-reagent test
Reaction temperature 37±0.3℃
Test type Clinical chemistries, immunoturbidimetry, Therapeutic Drug Monitoring (TDM)
Predilution Dilution is conducted in reaction cuvette at the ratio of 3~125
Operation mode Chemistries are defined one by one via the operating software; panels and
calculation tests are supported
Calibration math model Single-point linear, two-point linear, multi-point linear, Logit-Log 4P, Logit-Log
5P , Spline, Exponential, Polynomial, and Parabola.
QC Westgard multi rules, cumulative sum check, and twin-plot
Data processing Capable of storing and outputting various types of data and charts, and
calculating among different chemistries.
Dimensions Analyzing unit: 690mm (length) *580mm (depth) *595mm (height)
Weight Analyzing unit: 47 kg
STAT sample Emergent samples can be analyzed at any time with highest priority
Networking Capable to connect with a LIS (Laboratory Information Management System)
2.2 Sample Specifications

Sample loading
Samples are loaded via sample carousel.
Sample cuvette type
Table 2-2 Sample tube volume and dead volume
Sample Container Specification Dead Volume
Sample tube Φ14×25mm,0.5ml ( Beckman, ISE test 120μl
not supported)
Sample tube Φ14×25mm,2ml ( Beckman, ISE test not 150μl
supported)
Sample tube Φ12×37mm,2ml ( Hitachi, ISE test not 120μl
supported)

Sample Container Specification Dead Volume

Primary tube/Plastic Φ12×68.5 mm 8mm more over the
tube unacceptable sample
level height
Primary tube or plastic Φ12×99 mm 8mm more over the
level height
Primary tube or plastic Φ12.7×75 mm 8mm more over the
level height
Primary tube or plastic Φ12.7×100 mm 8mm more over the
level height
Primary tube or plastic Φ13 X 75 mm 8mm more over the
level height
level height
level height
Sample carousel
One carousel is shared for holding sample and reagent and the outer and middle ring supports bar code
scanning.
Sample positions on sample carousel
The outer ring can hold 40 samples and the middle ring can hold 40 sample with sample position adapter. In
total, up to 80 samples can be placed on the outer and inner ring.
STAT sample
Emergent samples can be analyzed at any time with highest priority.
Sample volume
2μl ~ 45μl, with an increment of 0.1μl
ISE: 70μl for serum and 140μl for urine
Sample probe
One probe is shared for adding sample and reagent with liquid level sense, featuring level detection (vertical
collision detection) and level tracking.
Sample probe cleaning
The exterior and interior of the sample probe is washed with carryover rate no more than 0.05%.
Sample input mode (bar code)
Table 2-3 Sample bar code
Name Value
Symbology Codabar, ITF, code128, code39, UPC/EAN, Code93
Minimum bar code Outer ring 0.19mm~0.5mm
density Middle ring 0.25mm~0.5mm
Data bits 3-27
Format and content Defined by user
Maximum width 55mm
Minimum height 10mm
Maximum ±5°
inclination angle
Print quality No less than Class C according to the ANSI MH10.8M
Print Quality Specification.
Width and 2.5-3.0:1
narrowness
2.2.1 Reagent Specifications
Reagent loading
Reagents are loaded through reagent carousel.

Reagent refrigeration
Reagent refrigeration temperature: 2~12℃.
Reagent addition approach
Reagent is aspirated and dispensed precisely by syringe, which is capable of detecting fluid level and checking
reagent volume.
Supported reagent types
R1, R2.
Reagent volume
R1:100μl～250μl,with an increment of 0.5μl and R2:10μl～250μl,with an increment of 0.5μl.
Reagent Carousel
One carousel is shared for holding sample and reagent. The reagents can be placed on the middle ring and
inner ring. All positions on the middle ring support scanning by a built-in reagent bar code reader.
Number and volume of reagent bottle
The reagent positions support Mindray reagent bottles, which include: middle ring 40ml and middle ring 20ml;
inner ring 20 ml.
Reagent carousel positions
Middle ring supports 40 40ml or 20ml reagent bottles and inner ring supports 40 20ml reagent bottles. When
middle ring is used to hold 40ml reagent bottles, 20ml reagent bottles cannot be placed on the inner ring.
Reagent bar code
Table 2-4 Reagent bar code
Name Value
Symbology Codabar, ITF, code128, code39, UPC/EAN,
Code93
Minimum bar code density 0.25mm~0.5mm
Data bits 13-30
Format and content Defined by user
Maximum width 55mm
Minimum height 10mm
Maximum inclination angle ±5°
Print quality Class A (ANSI MH10.8M)
Width and narrowness 2.5:1
Reagent probe
One probe is shared for adding sample and reagent with liquid level sense, featuring level detection (vertical
collision detection) and level tracking.
Reagent probe cleaning
Both interior and exterior of the probe are washed.
Prevention of reagent cross contamination
Users are allowed to perform carryover settings, e.g. washing interior and exterior of probe and inserting special
wash between tests.
2.2.2 Specifications of Reaction System
Table 2-5 Specifications of Reaction System
Optical pathlength of reaction 5mm
cuvette
Material of reaction cuvette 5mm*5mm*29.5mm. Plastic cuvette: Cuvette segments with 5
cuvettes each segment.
Number of reaction cuvettes 40
Mixing method Mixing after sample and R2 are added.
Reaction liquid volume 100μl～360μl；
Optical measurement method Forward splitting filter system, detecting each wavelength
through a photodiode
Wavelength 8 wavelengths: 340nm, 405nm, 450nm, 510nm, 546nm,
578nm, 630nm, 670nm

Light source 12v/20W tungsten-halogen lamp

Wavelength accuracy ±2nm
Photometric measurement Measuring through a photodiode
method
Number of wavelengths Supporting one or two wavelengths
simultaneously measured for each
test
Absorbance range 0-4.0A, optical path: 10mm
Resolution of photometer 0.0001OD
2.2.3 Specifications of Operation Unit

Table 2-6 Specifications of Operation Unit
Display Monitor Screen resolution of 1280×1024
Operating system Supporting Window 8 (64 bit)/Window 10 (64 bit)
Communication interface RS232, compatible with TCP/IP
Printer Supporting three types of printer: inkjet printer, laser (black and white) printer
and stylus printer.
Data input Keyboard, mouse and barcode reader, LIS: HL7, ASTM1394 (TCP/IP or serial
interface)
Data output Display monitor, printer, LIS system
Data storage Hard disk and USB interface
2.2.4 Typical Test Procedure Mixer performs mixing

Add R2 to probe
Complete absorbency measurement
Double Reagent
Startup initialization procedure
Manually replace cuvettes

Wait for steadiness Chemistries
Manually replace cuvettes
of lamp and
Shutdown procedure
Mixer performs mixing
Add sample to probe
balance of reaction
Available
Add R1 to probe
carousel
chemistries are
temperature
finished
Single Reagent
Chemistries
Next test
Figure 2-1 Test flowchart
2.2.5 Startup Procedure

1) The analyzer is powered on.
2) The operating software is run and starts checking the running environment.
3) The software checks the status of the middle-/low- layer units.
4) The software checks the parameters and status of the analyzer, and inquires the key
parameters and status of all the units.
5) The system communicates with the bar code reader, if it is configured.
6) Fluidic Initialization is performed: a) the pumps and valves are powered off for resetting;

b) the floaters of the water tank, diluted wash solution tank, and high-concentration
waste tank are checked.
7) The system resets all mechanical units.
8) The reaction carousel temperature control is turned on.
9) The lamp is turned off and the dark current and maximum luminance value of the
reaction carousel lamp are inquired. The lamp is turned on (it takes 5 minutes for the
lamp to become steady. When 5 minutes are not reached and the system finishes its
home procedure, the system enters incubation status.
10) The whole unit is reset.
11) The preheating of reagent is turned on.
12) The reagent carousel is scanned (when the built-in reagent bar code reader is
configured.)
13) The ISE module is initialized, if configured.
14) The lamp background test is performed after the lamp is turned on for 2 minutes.
15) If the conditions of entering Standby status are met, the system enters into Standby
status.
2.2.6 Shutdown Procedure
1) When the system is in Standby status, it can be shut down.
2) The power of lamp, reaction carousel temperature control and the preheating of reagent
are turned off.
3) Pumps and valves are powered off for resetting.
4) 10 cycles of ISE MANT are performed to discharge the ISE waste into the ISE reagent
pack, if ISE module is configured.
5) The database is shut down. If the operation fails, the system gives a warning, and
continues the shutdown after confirmation.
6) The system exits.
2.2.7 Workflow Descriptions
Sequential actions of the probe in each period (adding sample for biochemistry test)
Wash> raise to “home” position vertically ->rotate to sample carousel->lower into the sample tube-> aspirate
sample -> raise to “home” position vertically -> rotate to reaction carousel -> lower into the reaction carousel ->
dispense sample -> raise to the vertical home position -> rotate to wash well -> lower into the wash well->
wash -> go to next period
Sequential actions of the probe in period (dispensing R1 and R2)

Wash > raise to “home” position vertically ->rotate to reagent carousel->lower into the reagent bottle-> aspirate
reagent -> raise to “home” position vertically -> rotate to reaction carousel -> lower into the reaction carousel ->
dispense reagent -> raise to the vertical home position -> rotate to wash well -> lower into the wash well ->
wash -> go to next period.
Sequential actions of the probe in each period (dispensing ISE sample)

Wash > raise to “home” position vertically ->rotate to sample carousel->lower into the sample tube-> aspirate
sample -> raise to “home” position vertically -> Rotate to above the ISE sample injection port -> lower into the
ISE sample injection port -> dispense sample -> raise to the vertical home position -> rotate to wash well ->
lower into the wash well -> wash -> go to next period
Sequential actions of mixer in each period

Sequential actions: Lower to wash well ->wash-> raise to the wash well(vertical home position) -> rotate to
reaction carousel->lower to reaction carousel->mixing->raise to above the reaction carousel->go to next period.

Sequential actions of reaction carousel

18 seconds per period. Depending on the need of the dispense action of the sample probe, stop 3 times after
rotating 3 times, or stop 2 times after rotating 2 times.
2.2.8 Measuring Points

Set the
R1 R1 incubates for S MixS incubation time R2 MixR2 Maximum reaction time of double Reaction end
180 seconds of R2 arbitrarily reagent is over 10 min
T1 T11
Maximum reaction time of single reagent is over 20 min
Figure 2-2 Measuring points for BS-230 single-/double-reagent test

3 Moudules and Units

3.1 Shell Assembly
3.1.1 Module Functions
The shells assembly indicates the apparent structures of the whole analyzer and is designed for protecting the
internal assemblies. It provides interfaces for each module, and is also a representation of industrial design.
3.1.2 Component Locations and FRU Details
The shells assembly consists of the shielding cover, top panel, desk panel, left and right panels, front panel,
doors, middle panel and rear panel.
Shielding cover
hinge assembly
Syringe cover
Shielding cover assembly assembly
Middle baffle (BA24) Air spring holder
Air spring Reaction carousel panel

assembly (BA24)
ISE port plug for panel Lamp panel
Screw plug for
Sample/reagent panel panel
Front cover
Sample/reagent carousel assembly (BA24)
cover assembly
Left panel assembly
Top cover
Rear panel
Right panel assembly
Figure 3-1 Shells assembly

Table 3-1 List of materials

No Part No. Part Name Remarks

1 115-036569-00 Shielding cover assembly
2 042-016862-00 Middle baffle
3 M6T-010005--- Air spring
4 BA40-20-72908 ISE port plug for panel
5 043-006892-00 Sample/reagent panel
6 115-036339-00 Sample/reagent carousel cover
assembly
7 115-036338-00 Left panel assembly
8 115-036334-00 Front cover assembly
9 BA40-20-72907 Screw plug for panel (Mould MR72907)
10 043-006894-00 Lamp panel
11 115-036335-00 Reaction carousel panel assembly
12 042-018183-00 Air spring holder
13 BA10-30-78156 Syringe skylight cover assembly
14 BA10-20-77801 Top cover
15 115-036570-00 Right panel assembly
16 042-016863-00 Rear panel
3.1.3 Removing and Reinstalling Shielding Cover
When to do
Replace the shielding cover when it is damaged.
Tools
Name Part No. Quantity
Cross screwdriver / 1
Flathead screwdriver(small) / 1
How to do
1) Switch off the main power of the analyzer to ensure all moving assemblies are not in working status.
2) Open the shielding cover, and use a flathead screwdriver to insert into the gap of circlip and the bulb
on the air spring to push outwards the circlip to the degree that it will not be dropped.
3) Hold the shielding cover and pull out the air spring from the bulb and restore the air spring to its original
position.
4) Use a cross screwdriver to remove the four M4*12 powder screws on the hinge of the shielding cover,
and then remove the shielding cover assembly.
5) To restore the shielding cover assembly, follow the steps mentioned above in the reversed order.
Alignment and confirmation
After restoring the shielding cover assembly, check the gap with the panels, and if the gap is uneven or the
shielding cover interferes with the panels, adjust the hinges.
3.1.4 Removing and Reinstalling Left and Right Panels
When to do
When the left and right panels need to be removed to repair the internal assemblies
Tools
How to do
1) Unscrew the three screws at the rear of the left (right) panel.
2) Push the left or right panel backward until the panel falls out of the two positioning pins at the front of
the panel. Remove the left or right panel.
3) Install back the left and right panel according to the reversed order above.
When installing back the left and right panel, make sure the hook on the panel inserted into the square holes
on the frame in order to maintain the gap between the left (right) panel and the frame.
3.1.5 Removing and Reinstalling Front Panel
When to do
This operation is performed when an inner component of the instrument needs repair and the front panel need
to be removed.
Tools


How to do
1) Remove the left and right panel first.
2) Loosen the 2 screws (without removing) in the front of the sample/reagent panel, and then remove the
lamp panel.
3) Loosen (without removing) a retaining screw of the front panel and the front beam of the frame to the
maximum extent
4) Remove the retaining screws located on both sides of the front panels and used for fastening to the
frame.
5) Pull out the panel assembly towards the front of the instrument.
6) To restore the front panel assembly, follow the steps mentioned above in the reversed order.
When restoring, if the gap between the front panel and the sample/reagent panel and the lamp panel is not
proper, you can remove the lamp panel, and adjust the gap by adjusting the retaining screw that fastens the
front panel and the frame beam.
3.1.6 Removing and Reinstalling Panels
When to do
This operation is performed when an inner component of the instrument needs repair and the front panel need
to be removed.
Tools
How to do
Removing and Reinstalling BS-230 Reaction Carousel Panel
1) Remove the panel screws on the wash station panel, the reaction carousel panel, the lamp panel first,
unscrew the retaining screws on the 2 parts, and remove the lamp panel.
2) Remove the probe arm cover and the mixer arm cover.
3) Remove the reaction carousel panel assembly. Note that the panel needs to tilt at a specific angle so
that it can be taken out. Handle carefully to protect the sampe probe and the mixer.
4) To restore the reaction carousel panel assembly, follow the steps mentioned above in the reversed
order.
Removing/Reinstalling Sample/Reagent disk panel
1) Remove the panel screws on the reaction carousel panel and the lamp panel, and unscrew the
retaining screw.
2) Remove the sample/reagent carousel cover assembly from the sample/reagent carousel panel.
3) Remove the sample/reagent panel.
4) To restore the reaction carousel panel assembly, follow the steps mentioned above in the reversed
order.
To restore the reaction carousel panel, adjust the gap evenly before tightening the screw.
3.1.7 Replacing Air Spring
When to do
Replace the air spring if it loses elasticity or fails.
Tools
Flathead screwdriver(small) / 1
How to do
1) Open the shielding cover, and use a flathead screwdriver to insert into the gap of circlip and the bulb
on the air spring to push outwards the cir clip to the degree that it will not be dropped.
2) Hold the air spring and pull it out. If the bulb of the air spring is not damaged, keep using it.
3) Install the new air spring (Only air spring cylinder needs to be replaced.)
The cylinder of the air spring should be at the side of the shielding cover.Open and close the shielding cover
several times to make the air spring cylinder lubricated.

3.1.8 Remove the dust from the fans

When to do
When much dust is accumulated on the fans, or it has been 1 year since the last maintenance
Maintenance Tools
Suction cleaner/ hair brush / 1
Maintenance Procedure
1) Place the analyzing unit power to the OFF position.
2) If the reagent refrigeration fan and PCB fan need cleaning, remove the left panel.
3) If the cooling fans for the whole unit and the power supply need cleaning, remove the rear panel.
4) If the lamp fan needs cleaning, remove the right panel.
5) Manually rotate the fan and remove the dust on it.
6) Install the removed panels.
7) Switch on the analyzing unit power.
Check if the fans work normally.
3.2 Frame Assembly
The frame assembly is a basic unit for installing and supporting the components of the analyzer.
Sample probe movement assembly Mixer movement assembly
Shielding cover
Sample/reagent carousel
cover
Sample/reagent panel
Reaction carousel
Reagent bar code assembly
panel
Rear panel
Lamp panel
Frame assembly
Reaction carousel assembly
Left panel assembly assembly
Reagent refrigeration board
Front cover assembly
and the bracket
Figure 3-2 Locations of components on the instrument

BA24 rear dust

screen
BA24 front dust screen Dust screen
Dust screen retaining screw
retaining screw
Figure 3-3 Frame assembly

No. Part No. Part Name Remarks

1 048-006111-00 BA24 front dust screen
2 048-006112-00 BA24 rear dust screen
3.2.3 Replacing Front and Rear Dust Screens
When to do
The front and rear dust screens need to be replaced when they need cleaning or are damaged.
Tools
Name Code Quantity
Exploded view for installation
See the figure of Frame assembly

How to do
1) Switch off the power supply of the whole unit.
2) Remove the right panel assembly.
3) Use a cross head screwdriver to loosen the dust screen retaining screw M3×10 and cross recessed
pan head screw.
4) Remove the dust screens.
5) Replace or clean the dust screens.
6) Restore the assembly in the reversed order.
Make sure that the dust screen completely covers the air inlet.
3.3 Reaction Carousel Assembly
3.3.1 Main functions
Reaction carousel assembly is situated at the right front side of the analyzer, including the body of the reaction
carousel, reaction carousel drive assembly, reaction carousel chamber, reaction carousel sensor, and the
reaction carousel motor assembly. It is used to complete various actions, such as carrying and rotating the
reaction cuvette to the specified position, adding sample/reagent to the cuvette and mixing, together with the
probe, the mixer. It, as well as, provides a constant temperature for the reaction cuvette for analysis.
Temprature Sensor Wire of Reaction Disk is Honeywell's high-precision temperature sensor.It is a positive
temperature coefficient, the resistance increases with increasing temperature.
temperature Resistance
0°C 1058 Ω
37°C 1140 Ω
100°C 1375 Ω
3.3.2 Locations and FRU details
The reaction carousel assembly is located in the right front side of the instrument.
Upper cover assembly
Optical
assembly
Reaction carousel
motor assembly Sensor
Reaction carousel heat
assembly
chamber assembly
Figure 3-4 Reaction carousel assembly

Temperature protection switch wire

Heater cable above (for reaction carousel)
reaction carousel
Cuvettes
Cover
Reaction Carousel
Body Assembly
M2.5×8 cross countersunk

head screw
M3× cross pan head
combination screw
Temperature control fan cable M5×20 hexagon screw
M3×14 cross recessed pan
head screw
Reaction carousel
temperature sensor
Stand bar of fan cable
Reaction chamber
Heater cable under

Thermal Guard 60C 2Lead15.6mm
reaction carousel
M3×6 cross recessed pan head screw
Heater baffle plate

M4×8 cross pan head screw
Reaction carousel Reaction carousel support

motor assembly
Reaction Carousel Sensor Assembly
Figure 3-5 Reaction carousel explosion diagram

No Part No. Part Name Remark
1 009-006306-00 Reaction carousel temperature sensor
cable
2 115-006048-00 Motor assembly
3 BA10-20-78144 Temperature control fan cable
4 BA10-21-78143 Heater cable under reaction carousel

5 BA10-21-78142 Heater cable above reaction carousel
6 Temperature protection switch wire
BA10-21-78147
(for reaction carousel)
7 009-002204-00 Correlative photocoupler (S)
8 M6C-020007--- Synchronous cog belt, TBN180XL037
3.3.3 Replacing the cables of the reaction carousel cover
When to do
When the temperature of the reaction chamber is abnormal due to the connection problem of the heater cable
or temperature protection switch cable.
Tools
Name Code Quantity

M4×8 cross
countersunk head
screw
Reaction carousel anchor plate
Temperature protection switch

wire (for reaction carousel)
Heater cable above

reaction carousel
Cover
Figure 3-6 Replacing reaction carousel cover cables

How to do
1) Switch off the power of the analyzer.
2) Open the shielding cover.Remote the probe to the reagent aspirating port position, remote the mixer
to the wash well position, unscrew the M4×8 cross recessed pan head padded screw, remove the
reaction carousel panel, lamp panel, unscrew the 3 M4×8 cross recessed pan head screws for
fastening the right panel assembly, and remove the right panel assembly.
3) Use a cross head screwdriver to unscrew the 4 M4×12 cross recessed combination screws that fasten
the upper cover assembly, unplug the heater connection cable on the reaction carousel and the
temperature protection switch cable of the reaction carousel, and remove the upper cover assembly.
4) Unscrew the 4 M4×8 cross pan head combination screws that fasten the anchor plate of the reaction
carousel, and remove the anchor plate of the reaction carousel.
5) Remove the faulty heater cable on the reaction carousel or the faulty temperature protection switch
cable of the reaction carousel.
6) To replace the heater cable on the reaction carousel, apply thermal paste evenly on the heater cable
of the reaction carousel, and apply a small amount of hot melt adhesive at the outlet of the heater
cable on the reaction carousel to fasten the lead-out cable.
7) To replace the temperature protection switch cable of the reaction carousel, apply thermal paste evenly
in the installation slot on the panel, and apply a small amount of hot melt adhesive at the outlet of the
temperature protection switch cable of the reaction carousel to fasten the lead-out cable.
8) Restore the components in the reversed order.
After replacing the cable of reaction carousel upper heater or the cable of temperature protection switch, perform
the heat insulation performance test.For reaction carousel temperature test, see 7.9.2 .
3.3.4 Replacing the cable of the heat insulation chamber
When to do
When the temperature of the heat insulation chamber is abnormal due to the cable of lower heater, Thermal
Guard 60C 2Lead15.6mm, the cable of temperature sensor or the cable of the fan of heat insulation chamber
is damaged or disconnected.
Tools
Hexagon wrench / 1

Reaction carousel cover

M2.5*8 cross countersunk
head screw
M3*14 cross pan head
screw
Reaction carousel
Reaction carousel temperature temperature sensor cable
control 60 fan cable
M3*6 cross pan head Bracket of temperature
combination screws sensor
M5*20 hexagon socket cap
Fan bracket head screws with spring and
flat washer
Reaction chamber
Thermal Guard 60C

2Lead15.6mm
Silicone
heating film M3*6 hexagon socket cap head
screw
Press plate of
lower heater M4*8 cross pan head
combination screws
Supporting rod
Figure 3-7 Replacing the cable of the heat insulation chamber of reaction carousel
How to do
2) Open the shielding cover. Remote the probe to the reagent aspirating port position, remote the mixer
reaction carousel panel, lamp panel, unscrew the 3 M4×8 cross recessed pan head screws for
fastening the right panel assembly, and remove the right panel assembly.
temperature protection switch cable of the reaction carousel, and remove the upper cover assembly
and place it properly
4) Disassemble the reaction carousel assembly: Loose the anchor plate of the reaction cuvette, remove
the reaction cuvette segment, and place them properly. Loosen the 3 M3×12 hexagon screws that
fasten the reaction carousel assembly, and remove the reaction carousel assembly, as shown in the
following diagram:

Reaction cuvette Reaction cuvette

segment anchor plate Fan and Reaction carousel
bracket temperature sensor cable
M3×12 hexagon screw Reaction Carousel Body Assembly
Figure 3-8 Removing Reagent carousel body assembly

5) To replace the temperature sensor cable of the reaction carousel, use a cross head screwdriver to
loosen the M3×8 cross countersunk head screw, unplug the temperature sensor cable of the reaction
carousel, remove the temperature sensor cable of the reaction carousel directly, and replace it with a
new temperature sensor cable of the reaction carousel and plug it properly.
6) To replace the heat chamber fan cable, unplug the heat chamber fan cable, use a cross head
screwdriver to unscrew 2 M3×6 cross recessed pan head combination screws, remove the stand bar
of the fan together with the fan, and install a new fan onto the stand bar and plug it properly. (Note:
When installing the fan, please make sure that the label faces the stand bar, and the cable of the fan
is led out from the lower right side)
7) To change the heater cable under the reaction carousel or the Thermal Guard 60C 2Lead15.6mm,
remove 1 M4×12 screw and two M4×16 hexagon screws that fasten the optical assembly, unplug the
cable that connects the motor and the sensor, loosen the 3 M5X20 hexagon screws that fasten the
reaction chamber, unplug the related cables, and remove the reaction chamber.
8) To replace the Thermal Guard 60C 2Lead15.6mm, put the reaction chamber upside down, and loosen
the 2 M3×6 cross recessed pan head screws directly to perform replacement.
9) To replace the heater cable under the reaction carousel, loosen 10 M4×8 cross recessed pan head
combination screws that fasten the baffle plate of the heater, remove the baffle plate of the heater, and
replace the heater cable under the reaction carousel. Apply thermal paste evenly on the heater cable
under the heater of the reaction carousel, and apply a small amount of hot melt adhesive at the outlet
of the heater cable under the reaction carousel to fasten the lead-out cable.
10) Restore the assembly in reserved order. Try to align the heat chamber with the rotor of the reaction
carousel when installing the heat chamber.
After replacing silicone heating film, Thermal Guard 60C 2Lead15.6mm and the reaction carousel temperature
sensor cable, reconfigure the related sensor parameters on the software and perform the heat insulation
performance test. For sensor parameter configuration, see7.9.1 Configuration of Sensor Parameters; for
reaction carousel temperature test and reaction carousel temperature curve, see7.9.2 Observe Temperature
Curve.
If replacing the Optical measure assembly, refer to 7.3.1 Signal Collecting Position Adjustment to adjust
photoelectric signal collecting position; Refer to 7.3.2 Photoelectric Gain Adjustment to adjust photoelectric gain.
3.3.5 Replacing Home Position Sensor and Coder Sensor
When to do
When the Home Position Sensor and Coder Sensor failed
Tools
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 3-10

Hexagon wrench / 1
Cross pan head Coded disk
screw with Home sensor
sensor
washerM3*6
Mounting
plate
The sensor
installed on the
Sensor left of the
Hexagon socket cap Cross pan head
bracket bracket.
head screws M3*8 screw M3*6
Figure 3-9 Replacing Home Position Sensor and Coder Sensor
Note:
Install the sensors according to the identifications on the cable connectors and the instrument connectors:
"RCD--PHO-C" for coder sensor and "RCD--PHO-O" for home position sensor.
Do not tighten the sensor screws with excessive torque force, in order to avoid damaging the sensors.
Make sure to install the home position sensor in the correct position.
How to do
Replacing coder sensor assembly
1) Switch off the main power of the whole unit.
2) Unscrew 3 M4×8 cross recessed pan head screws that fasten the right panel assembly, remove the
right panel assembly, and then unscrew 2 M4×8 cross recessed pan head combination screws that
fasten the AD bracket assembly, and put the AD bracket assembly aside (without removing the cable
of the AD box).
3) Unplug the connector of the reaction carousel coder sensor.
4) Unscrew the two M3*6 cross pan head combination screws on the sensor’s mounting plate and
remove the coder sensor cable with the sensor.
5) Loosen the two cross pan head screws on the coder sensor, and remove the coder sensor from the
mounting plate.
6) Fix the new coder sensor on the mounting plate using two M3×6 cross pan head screws.
7) Use two M3*6 cross pan head combination screws to fix the sensor mounting plate to the bracket of
the sensor. Adjust the height of the mounting plate of the sensor to keep the coder in the middle of the
coder sensor, and then tighten the retaining screws of the mounting plate.
8) Connect the connector of the reaction carousel coder sensor.
9) After aligning the sensor assembly, restore the components in the reversed order.
Replacing home position sensor assembly
2) Unscrew 3 M4×8 cross recessed pan head screws that fasten the right panel assembly, remove the
right panel assembly, and then unscrew 2 M4×8 cross recessed pan head combination screws that
fasten the AD bracket assembly, and put the AD bracket assembly aside (without removing the cable
of the AD box).
3) Unplug the connectors of the reaction carousel home position sensor and coder sensor.
4) Loosen the three M3*8 hexagon socket cap head screws with spring and flat washers on the sensor
assembly, and then remove the sensor assembly. Pay attention not to drop the screws into the
instrument.
5) Unscrew the two M3*6 cross pan head screws on the cables of carousel home position sensor to
remove it from the bracket of the sensor.
6) Fix the new cables of carousel home position sensor onto the sensor bracket using two M3*6 cross
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 3-11

pan head screws.

7) Fix the sensor assembly of the reaction carousel onto the big bottom plate with three M3*8 hexagon
socket cap head screws with spring and flat washers. Manually rotate the reaction carousel and
check that the zero position stopper of the coded disk does not interfere with the zero position sensor.
8) Connect the home position sensor and the coded disk sensor.
9) After aligning the sensor assembly, restore the components in the reversed order.
1) Refer to 7.3.1 Signal Collecting Position Adjustment to adjust photoelectric signal collecting position.
2) Refer to 7.4 Sample/Reagent carousel unit to adjust reaction carousel circumferential position,
sample/reagent carousel circumferential position,
3) Refer to 7.5.1 Probe to Horizontal Position on Reaction Carousel and 7.6.1 Mixer to Horizontal Position
on Reaction Carousel to adjust the probe and mixer to horizontal position on reaction carouse.
3.3.6 Replacing motor assembly and synchronous belt
When to do
Replace the reaction carousel motor or synchronous belt when they are damaged.
Tools
Hexagon wrench / 1
M4×10 hexagon socket head
cap screw + spring washer
Motor
Motor shock pad
M5×12 hexagon
socket head cap screw
+ spring/flat washer
Figure 3-10 Reaction carousel motor assembly
WARNING
During removing and installation, avoid dropping screws and washers into the analyzer.
How to do
Replacing the motor
2) Unscrew 3 M4×8 cross recessed pan head screws that fasten the left panel assembly and those that
fasten the right panel assembly, remove the left and right panel assemblies, unscrew M4×8 cross
countersun head screws that fasten the front housing, and remove it.
3) Disconnect the motor cable, unscrew the 4 M5×12 hexagon socket head screws with spring washer
on the reaction carousel motor assembly, remove the motor assembly and avoid dropping screws into
the analyzer.
4) Fix a new motor assembly to the large bottom plate using 4 M5×12 hexagon socket head cap screws
with spring washer. Tighten the belt and screws and connect the cable of the motor.
5) Restore the components in the reversed order.
Replacing the synchronous belt
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 3-12


2) Open the shielding cover. Remote the probe to the reagent aspirating port position, remote the mixer
reaction carousel panel, lamp panel,unscrew the 3 M4×8 cross recessed pan head screws for
fastening the left panel assembly and those for fastening the right panel assembly, and remove the
left and right panel assemblies. Unscrew the M4×8 cross countersunk head screw that fastens the
front housing and remove it
temperature protection switch cable of the reaction carousel, and remove the upper cover assembly
and place it properly
4) Remove the reaction cuvettes, and place them properly. Loosen the 3 M3×12 hexagon screws that
fasten the reaction carousel assembly, and remove the reaction carousel assembly.
5) Remove 1 M4×12 screw and two M4×16 hexagon screws that fasten the optical assembly, unplug the
cable that connects the motor and the sensor, loosen the 3 M5X20 hexagon screws that fasten the
reaction chamber, unplug the related cables, and remove the reaction chamber.
6) Disconnect the motor cable, unscrew the 4 M5×12 hexagon socket head screws with spring washer
on the reaction carousel motor assembly, remove the motor assembly and avoid dropping screws into
the analyzer.
7) Install a new synchronous belt.
8) Fix a reaction carousel motor assembly to the large bottom plate using 4 M5×12 hexagon socket head
cap screws with spring washer. Tighten the belt and screws and connect the cable of the motor.
9) Restore the assembly in reserved order. Try to align the heat chamber with the rotor of the reaction
carousel when installing the heat chamber.
The belt tension needs to be adjusted to ensure that the tension is the same as before the replacement.
3.3.7 Replacing Reaction Cuvette
Refer to 3.7.8 Replacing Reaction Cuvette.
3.4 Sample/Reagent carousel cover assembly
Sample/Reagent carousel assembly is located at the left front of the analyzer, including the carousel body,
refrigeration assembly, drive assembly, motor assembly, coded disk optical coupler and the reagent bar code
reader (Optional). It is used to complete various actions, such as carrying and rotating the reagent bottle or
sample tube to the specified position with sampling assembly. It provides a refrigerating environment, and the
reagents stored in such environment can be kept stable with little volatilization. For details, please refer to the
following contents.
 Load sample/reagent. Place some reagent bottles with reagent and sample tubes with sample on the
carousel. Let the probe aspirate sample and reagent and dispense them into the cuvettes.
 Refrigerating reagent: Provide 24-hour refrigeration and constant temperature environment (2-12°C)
to keep the reagent stable with little volatilization.
 Sequential feeding: The drive assembly drives the carousel to carry certain reagent and sample in the
given order to the aspirate position for aspiration.
 Input reagent and sample data automatically: Bar code reader (optional).
Reagent Temperature Sensor: It is a Negative temperature coefficient, the resistance decreases with
increasing temperature.
temperature Resistance
2°C About 11KΩ
25°C About 5KΩ
Sample/Reagent carousel assembly is located at the left front of the analyzer
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 3-13

Shielding cover
cover
Reaction carousel
Reagent bar code assembly
panel
Rear panel
Lamp panel
Frame assembly
and the bracket
Figure 3-11 Locations of sample/reagent carousel on the instrument
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 3-14

11
10
9 2
3
4
5
6
8
7
Figure 3-12 Sample/Reagent carousel assembly
1 115-036341-00 Sample/reagent carousel body assembly
2 024-000110-00 Sensor temperature 5Kohm B3470K with
threads
3 082-000855-00 O-shaped 48.7X2.65 silicon rubber black
A70
4 082-000856-00 O-shaped 65X2 silicon rubber black A70
5 BA40-21-61655 Semi-conductive Peltier cable
7 115-036317-00 Sample/reagent carousel motor assembly
8 M6C-020007--- Synchronous cog belt, TBN180XL037
9 BA10-20-78146 Cables of reagent refrigeration and radiating
fan
10 115-036320-00 Reagent carousel anti-fogging heater
assembly
11 023-000738-00 Built-in bar code reader MS-3 High density
laser D-Sub
12 BA20-20-75214 Cuvette holder base 1
13 115-036342-00 Handle assembly
14 BA30-20-15100 Rubber pad 1
15 BA30-20-15210 Transparent shield rubber pad
16 041-022590-00 Sample tube adapter
3.4.3 Replacing Sample/Reagent Carousel Body Assembly
When to do
When the sample/reagent carousel body is damaged.
Tools
Name Code Quantity
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 3-15

Medical rubber gloves / 1 pair

Sample/reagent
carousel
body assembly
Figure 3-13 Sample/Reagent carousel body assembly

How to do
2) Open the shielding cover, rotate the probe to the reaction carousel side, and remove the
sample/reagent carousel cover assembly.
3) Lift the handlebar to remove the sample/reagent carousel body assembly.
4) Align the locating holes on the new sample carousel body with the stop bolt, and pinch the handlebar
flat.
5) Restore the sample/reagent carousel cover, and close the shielding cover.
N/A
3.4.4 Replacing Reagent Temperature Sensor
When to do
When the temperature sensor fails.
Tools
Flathead screwdriver / 1
Hexagon wrench / 1
Glue gun / 1
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 3-16

Sample/reagent
carousel body assembly
M3×10 cross countersunk

head screw
Refrigeration sleeve
M4×10 hexagon socket cap head screw
Rubber pad 1
Abrasion-resistant pad
Reagent refrigeration chamber
Rubber cushion
Temperature sensor
Figure 3-14 Reagent temperature sensor assembly

How to do
2) Open the shielding cover, remove the sample/reagent carosuel cover, and remove the left panel
assembly, front cover assembly, lamp panel, reaction carosuel panel and sample/reagent panel.
Protect the probe from colliding during the deatching.
4) Remove the reagent refrigeration board and bracket, disconnect the drain tube of the reagent
refrigeration compartment from the reagent refrigeration compartment, remove the temperature
sensor connector, and remove the reagent bar code assembly if the bar code is configured.
5) Use a cross head screwdriver to remove 6 M3×10 cross countersunk head screws that fasten the
refrigeration sleeve, and remove the refrigeration sleeve and the rubber pad 1.
6) Use the hexagon wrench to remove the 8 M4×10 hexagon socket head cap screws that fasten the
reagent refrigeration compartment, remove the abrasion-resistant pad, and remove the reagent
refrigeration compartment.
7) Clear the sealing glue in the installation position of the temperature sensor, and remove the
temperature sensor and the rubber pad.
8) Sheathe the rubber pad into a new temperature sensor, load them into the reagent refrigeration
compartment, and seal the installation hole with the sealing glue.
9) Apply thermal paste on the installation surface of the reagent refrigeration compartment and the
refrigeration aluminum block, apply the sealing glue on the abrasion-resistant pad, and use 8 M4×10
hexagon socket head cap screws to install the reagent refrigeration compartment onto the refrigeration
aluminum block. Try to align the reagent refrigeration compartment with the rotor.
10) Sheathe the rubber pad 1 into the refrigeration sleeve, apply the sealing glue to the fitting surface of
the reagent refrigeration compartment, and use 6 M3×6 cross countersunk head screws to fix the
refrigeration sleeve.
11) Install the disassembled parts in reversed order of steps 2~4.
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 3-17

Note
When filling the installation hole of the temperature sensor with the sealing glue, completely fill the cable hole
with glue. Wipe off overflowing glue when filling the abrasion-resistant pad.
1) Re-align Probe to outer ring, middle ring and inner ring positions,see 7.5.1 ~7.5.5 .
2) Re-align barcode scanning position,see 7.7.4 Bar Code Reader Position Adjustment.
3.4.5 Replacing cooler(Peltier) and sealing ring
When to do
When the cooler(Peltier) failed
Tools
Hexagon wrench / 1
Glue gun / 1
Sample/reagent
M3×10 cross carousel body
countersunk head screw assembly
M4×10 hexagon socket

Refrigeration sleeve cap head screw
Rubber pad 1
Abrasion-resistant
pad
Reagent
refrigeration
chamber
Refrigeration aluminum block

M4×8 cross countersunk M4×8 cross countersunk
head screw head screw
O-shaped 48.7×2.65 sealing ring
Refrigeration aluminum block
M5×20 hexagon socket head cap
O-shaped 48.7×2.65 sealing ring
screws and spring/flat washer
Refrigeration fixing base Refrigeration fixing base
O-shaped 65×2 sealing ring O-shaped 65×2 sealing ring
Peltier Peltier
Figure 3-15 Removing cooler and sealing ring

How to do
assembly, front cover assembly, lamp panel, reaction carosuel panel, and sample/reagent panel.
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 3-18


4) Remove the reagent refrigeration board and bracket, disconnect the drain tube of the reagent
refrigeration compartment from the reagent refrigeration compartment, detach the temperature sensor
connector, and detach the reagent bar code assembly if the bar code is configured.
5) Use a cross screwdriver to remove 6 M3×10 cross countersunk head screws that fasten the
6) Use the hexagon wrench to remove the 8 M4×10 hexagon socket head cap screws that fasten the
reagent refrigeration compartment, remove the abrasion-resistant pad, and remove the reagent
refrigeration compartment.
7) Remove the 2 M5×20 hexagon socket head cap screws, the elastomer and the flat washer that are
used to fasten the refrigeration base on the Peltier to be replaced, and remove the refrigeration base
that carry a refrigeration aluminum block, so that the Peltier and the O-shaped 65×2 sealing ring can
be replaced.
8) To replace the O-shaped 48.7×2.65 sealing ring, remove the 4 M4×8 cross countersunk head screws
that fasten the refrigeration aluminum block, and replace the O-shaped 48.7×2.65 sealing ring.
9) Apply thermal pate on both sides of the substitute Peltier, install the Peltier according to the direction
before disassembling, and plug the cable. Install the substitute sealing ring.
10) Use 4 M4×8 cross countersunk head screws to fix the refrigeration aluminum block onto the
refrigeration base, and then use 2 M5×20 hexagon socket head cap screws, the elastomer and the
flat washer to fix the refrigeration base onto the Peltier. The direction needs to be consistent with the
direction before disassembling.
11) Apply thermal paste on the installation surface of the reagent refrigeration compartment and the
refrigeration aluminum block, apply the sealing glue on the abrasion-resistant pad, and use 8 M4×10
hexagon socket head cap screws to install the reagent refrigeration compartment onto the refrigeration
aluminum block. Try to align the reagent refrigeration compartment with the rotor.
Note
When filling the installation hole of the temperature sensor with the sealing glue, completely fill the cable hole
with glue. Wipe off overflowing glue when filling the abrasion-resistant pad.
1) Re-align Probe to outer ring, middle ring and inner ring positions,see 7.5.1 ~7.5.5 ..
2) Re-align barcode scanning position,see 7.7.4 Bar Code Reader Position Adjustment.
3.4.6 Replacing Home Position Sensor and Coder Sensor
When to do
When the Home position sensor and coded disk sensor of the reagent carousel failed.
Tools
Name Code Quantity
Hexagon wrench / 1
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 3-19

M3*6 cross pan head screw M3*6cross pan

with washer head screw
Sensor mounting plate Coded disk
M3*6 Hexagon socket cap
optical coupler
screw with washer
M3*6cross pan
head screw
M3*6 hexagon
socket cap head
screw with spring
and flat washers
Bracket of the
Home position sensor
optical coupler
Figure 3-16 Removing Correlative optical coupler wire (S)

How to do
2) Remove the left panel assembly and the front panel assembly.
3) Remove the reagent refrigeration board and bracket, and unplug home position photocoupler of the
reagent carousel and the coder photocoupler.
4) Unscrew the 3 M3×6 hexagon socket head cap screws and the spring/flat washer that are used to
fasten the coder photocoupler assembly, and remove the coder photocoupler assembly.
5) Loosen the 2 M3×6 cross pan head combination screws on the photocoupler mounting plate, and then
remove the photocoupler mounting plate together with the coder photocoupler.
6) Loosen the 2 M3×6 cross pan head screws that fasten the coder photocoupler, and remove the coder
photocoupler from the sensor mounting plate.
7) Use 2 M3×6 cross pan head screws to fix the new coder photocoupler onto the sensor mounting plate.
8) Use 2 M3×6 cross recessed pan head combination screws to fix the sensor with the coder
photocoupler onto the photocoupler bracket, without tightening them.
9) Unscrew the 2 M3×6 cross recessed pan head screws of the photocoupler in the home position of the
reagent carousel, and remove the photocoupler from photocoupler bracket.
10) Use 2 M3×6 cross recessed pan head screws to fix a new photocoupler cable in the home position of
the reagent carousel onto the photocoupler bracket
11) Use 3 M3×6 hexagon socket head cap screws to fix the coder photocoupler assembly onto a large
bottom plate, push the photocoupler bracket to a stop position of the two hexagon screws, fit the
bracket closely, and tighten the retaining screws. Adjust the sensor mounting plate to make the coder
lie in the middle of the coder photocupler, and then tighten the screws on the mounting plate.
12) Plug the connectors of the photocoupler in the home position of the reagent carousel and the coder
photocoupler.
13) After aligning the position of the coder photocoupler assembly, restore the assembly in the reversed
order.
Note
 To replace only the coder photocoupler, omit steps 9 and 10.
 To replace only the photocoupler in the home position of the reagent coupler, omit steps 5 to 8.
After the sample/reagent carousel home sensor and coded disk sensor, refer to 7.4.2 ～ 7.4.4 to align
sample/reagent carousel circumferential position.
Refer to 7.5.3 ~7.5.5 to align probe to horizontal position on the sample/reagent carouse.
Refer to 7.7.4 Bar Code Reader Position Adjustment.
3.4.7 Replacing Sample/Reagent Carousel Motor Assembly
When to do
When motor failed.
Tools
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 3-20

Hexagon wrench / 1
M3*20 hexagon socket cap head / 1
screws with spring and flat washers
Synchronous belt
M3×20 hexagon socket cap
M4×10 hexagon socket head screw hole
head cap screws and
Sample/reagent carousel motor assembly
spring/flat washer
Figure 3-17 Removing Sample/Reagent Carousel Motor Assembly

How to do
3) Unplug the motor cable, use a hand to check the tension of the synchronous belt and keep a record.
4) Use the hexagon wrench to remove the 4 M4×10 hexagon socket head cap screws and spring/flat
washer that are used to fasten the sample/reagent carousel motor assembly, and remove the
assembly from the synchronous belt.
5) Replace the assembly with a new sample/reagent carousel motor assembly, sheathe the pulley of the
assembly into the synchronous belt, and then tighten the M4×10 hexagon socket head cap screws
and spring/flat washer. Pay attention to the motor direction.
6) Pass 1 M3×20 hexagon socket head cap screw with a washer (either spring or flat washer, depending
on requirements) through a tension hole, fasten the screw into the motor mounting plate, strain the
belt to the original status, and tighten the motor assembly screw. Remove the M3×20 hexagon socket
screw, and plug the motor cable.
7) Assemble and reset the front panel assembly and the left panel assembly.
Note
Note: Do not mistaken the direction of the motor.
1) Align the position before fixing the air vent.
2) Re-align Probe to outer ring, middle ring and inner ring positions,see 7.5.3 ～7.5.5 .
3) Re-align barcode scanning position,see7.7.4 Bar Code Reader Position Adjustment.
3.4.8 Replacing the synchronous belt
When to do
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 3-21

When it is damaged.
Tools
Hexagon wrench / 1
Glue gun / 1
M3*20 hexagon socket cap head / 1
screws with spring and flat washers
Sample/reage
nt carousel
body
assembly
M3×10 cross
Refrigeration
countersunk
sleeve
Rubber pad 1 head screw
Rotor
Gap
Reagent
refrigeration
chamber
Synchronou
s belt
M3×20 hexagon
screw hole
motor assembly Synchronous
belt replacing
M4×10 hexagon socket space
cap head screw
Figure 3-18 Removing synchronous belt

How to do
4) Remove the reagent refrigeration board and the bracket.
5) Use a cross screwdriver to remove 6 M3×10 cross countersunk head screws that fasten the
6) Draw an aligned mark line on the motor mounting plate and the large bottom plate (in the tension
direction of the motor assembly to facilitate use after the synchronous belt is replaced), loosen the 4
M4×10 hexagon socket head cap screws that fasten the motor assembly of the sample/reagent
carousel until the motor assembly can move, without taking out the screws.
7) Remove the synchronous belt. If the belt is broken or can be cut off, remove the belt. If the belt is not
broken and needs to keep the current status, remove the belt from the gap between the reagent
refrigeration compartment and the rotor.
8) Sheathe a new synchronous belt into the rotor, and feed the belt slowly into the gap between the
reagent refrigeration compartment and the rotor. At the belt replacing operation space and at the motor
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 3-22

end, sheathe the belt into the motor pulley and rotor pulley.
9) Pass 1 M3×20 hexagon socket head cap screw with a washer (either spring or flat washer, depending
on requirements) through a tension hole, fasten the screw into the motor mounting plate, strain the
belt until it is aligned with the mark line drawn before the motor mounting plate is loosened, and tighten
the motor assembly screw. Remove the M3×20 hexagon screw.
NOTE
 Pass the synchronous belt through the gap between the reagent refrigeration compartment and the rotor
slowly, and avoid applying a large force.
3.4.9 Replacing cooling fan of reagent refrigeration
When to do
When cooling fan failed.
Tools
Hexagon wrench / 1
M4×45 cross recessed

pan head screw and
flat washer
φ92 fan screen cover
Reagent refrigeration/radiating fan
Figure 3-19 Replacing cooling fan of the reagent refrigeration assembly

How to do
3) Remove the connector of the fan that needs to be replaced.
4) Remove the 4 M4×45 cross recessed pan head screws and the flat washer of the fan that needs to
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 3-23

be replaced, and remove the fan screen and the fan.

5) Install a new fan. The installation direction of the fan needs to be consistent with the original direction,
and tidy the cable and the connector.
6) Install the front panel assembly and the left panel assembly.
After powering on the instrument, check that the cooling fan is blowing wind outwards,
3.4.10 Replacing Bar Code Reader
When to do
When the bar code reader failed.
Tools
Hexagon wrench / 1
M3×10 hexagon socket head cap screws
and spring washer and big flat washer Small bracket for bar code reader
Bar code reader
Figure 3-20 Removing bar code reader

How to do
3) Remove the connector of the bar code reader.
4) Remove the 2 M3×10 hexagon socket head cap screws, the spring washer, and the big flat washer,
and remove the bar code reader.
5) Install a new bar code reader into a small bracket mounting position of the bar code reader. Pre-tighten
the screw, and plug the cable of the bar code reader.
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 3-24

6)Power on the bar code reader, re-align the bar code scan position, and use an adjustment tool of the
bar code scan light of the BA24-J03 BA24 to perform alignment according to steps described on the
software. After the light of the bar code reader is adjusted, tighten the retaining screw.
7) Assemble and reset the panel removed in step 2.
Re-align barcode scanning position,see7.7.4 Bar Code Reader Position Adjustment.
3.4.11 Replacing Reagent Anti-fogging Heating Assembly
When to do
Replace the anti-fogging heater assembly when the glass is damaged or the assembly does not work.
Tools
Hexagon wrench / 1
Small bracket for
head cap screws and Reagent carousel anti-fogging heater assembly
bar code reader
spring washer and big flat
Anti-fogging mounting plate
washer M2×8 cross recessed pan head screw
Dust shield Antifogging M3×8 cross recessed
and sponge heater pan head screw
Heat
Temperature
conductive
switch
plate
Bar code
reader
Switch
Rubber
anchor plate
M3×6 cross recessed Glass cushion
pan head screw cap head screw window
Figure 3-21 Replace the anti-fogging heater assembly

How to do
3) Remove the 2 M3×10 hexagon socket head cap screws, the spring washer, and the big flat washer,
and remove the bar code reader.
4) Remove the 4 M3×6 cross recessed pan head screws, and remove the dust shield with sponge.
5) Remove the connectors of the temperature switch and the antifogging heater, unscrew the 4 M3×8
cross pan head screws, and remove the antifogging heating assembly of the reagent carousel.
6) Remove 1 M3×12 hexagon socket head cap screws, and remove the anchor plate of the switch, the
temperature protection switch, and the antifogging heater.
7) Remove 4 M2×8 cross recessed pan head screws, remove the thermal conductive aluminum plate
and the damaged glass pane, and clear the broken glass in the slot of the mounting plate. Replace
the rubber pad when necessary.
8) Place a new glass pane onto the silicone pad in the slot of the mounting plate of the antifogging
apparatus. Ensure that the glass is not cracked or dirty.
9) Use 4 M2×8 cross recessed pan head screws to fasten the thermal conductive aluminum plate into
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 3-25

the mounting position.

10) Apply thermal paste onto the fitting surface between the antifogging heater (if the heater is damaged,
use a new antifogging heater) and the thermal conductive aluminum plate, and place the heater in the
mounting position.
11) Apply thermal paste onto the fitting surface between the temperature switch (if the temperature switch
is damaged, use a new temperature switch) and the antifogging heater, and place switch in a middle
position. Place the anchor plate of the switch in the mounting position, and fasten it with 1 M3×12
hexagon socket head cap screw.
12) Use 4 M3×8 cross recessed pan head screws to install the reagent carousel antifogging assembly into
the mounting position of the reagent refrigeration compartment.
13) Plug the cable of the temperature switch and the antifogging heater, use 4 M3×6 cross pan head
screws to fasten the dust shield with sponge onto the mounting plate of the antifogging apparatus.
14) Install the bar code reader into a small bracket of the bar code reader, and pre-tighten the screw (plug
the cable of the bar code reader).
15) Power on the bar code reader, re-align the bar code scan position, and use an adjustment tool of the
bar code scan light of the BA24-J03 BA24 to perform alignment according to steps described on the
software. After the light of the bar code reader is adjusted, tighten the retaining screw.
16) Assemble and reset the panel removed in step 2.
Re-align barcode scanning position,see7.7.4 Bar Code Reader Position Adjustment.
3.5 Probe assembly
The probe assembly consists of probe drive assembly, arm assembly and the probe. The probe assembly can
move in horizontal and vertical direction, featuring fluid level detection, vertical obstruction detection. The probe
assembly has other functions, such as limiting of mechanical position, self-lock during power interruption, etc.
Horizontal direction: Probe moving to wash well→aspirating sample position→reaction carousel/ISE
aspirating position→wash well→aspirating reagent position→dispensing reagent position on the reaction
carousel→wash well.
Vertical direction: The probe moves in vertical direction among the positions of reagent bottle, sample tube,
cuvette, wash well and ISE sample injection port.
Reagent Preheating temperature sensor: It is a Negative temperature coefficient, the resistance decreases
with increasing temperature.
Resistance at 25℃ of temp sensor: 2252Ω±20.
Heater 24V/24W, Resistance = 24.6 ~ 28.5 Ω
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 3-26


Shielding cover
cover
Reaction carousel
Reagent bar code
panel
assembly
Rear panel
Lamp panel
Frame assembly
and the bracket
Figure 3-22 Locations of probe assembly on the instrument
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 3-27

10
6
3 11
7
2
8
1
12
Figure 3-23 Probe movement assembly

Table 3-5 List of FRU materials
2 115-037085-00 BA24 HbA1c sample probe assembly
3 115-016462-00 Guide rod and anti-collision spring
4 115-037552-00 Reagent preheating assembly
5 051-002479-00 LLD board PCBA
6 041-009179-00 Hardened power screw (M3×6)
7 BA30-10-06619 Synchronous belt B123MXL6.4
8 115-038796-00 probe drive horizontal motor assembly
9 115-036662-00 Probe drive assembly
10 044-000263-00 130mm arm base
11 043-002344-00 130mm arm cover
12 115-038797-00 probe drive vertical motor assembly
3.5.3 Replacing the optical coupler of horizontal and vertical movement

When to do
When the optical coupler of horizontal and vertical movement failed.
Tools
Name Code Quantity
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 3-28


Horizontal Horizontal movement

sensor bracket photocoupler
Vertical movement photocoupler
Figure 3-24 Replacing the optical coupler of horizontal and vertical movement
How to do
2) Open the shielding cover and remove the lamp panel, the reaction carousel panel. Protect the probe
from colliding during the disassembling.
3) When replacing the vertical movement optical coupler, disconnect the cable and remove the M3*6
cross pan head screw to remove the optical coupler. Replace it with new optical coupler, fix it and
connect the cable.
4) When replacing the horizontal movement optical coupler, disconnect the cable, remove one M3*6
cross pan head screw to remove the bracket and then remove one M3*6 screw to remove the
horizontal movement optical coupler. Replace it with new optical coupler and fix the optical coupler
and its bracket with M3*6 screws. Connect the cable.
5) Install back the panels.
After replacing the horizontal movement optical coupler, align the horizontal positions: probe to reaction carousel,
wash well, sample/reagent carousel and ISE sample injection port.
After replacing the vertical movement optical coupler, align the vertical positions: probe to reaction carousel,
wash well, sample/reagent carousel and ISE sample injection port.
Refer to 7.5 Probe unit.
3.5.4 Replacing probe assembly，Anti-collision spring and powder
screws
When to do
When probe assembly is damaged or anti-collision spring failed or cosmetic defect of the powder screw occurs.
Tools
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 3-29

Flathead screwdriver / 1
probe arm cover
Spring guide
post
Anti- Hardened powder

collision screw(M3*6)
spring
Probe
Figure 3-25 Replacing probe assembly-collision spring and powder screws

How to do
2) Open the shielding cover.
3) Remove the two hardened powder screws (M3*6) and the probe arm cover. At this time, you can
replace the hardened powder screw.
4) Use Flathead screwdriver to remove the spring guide post and anti-collision spring. At this time, you
can replace the anti-collision spring.
5) Disconnect the cable of the anti-collision sensor and the wash tubes.
6) Remove the probe assembly and replace it with new one. Connect the cable and tubes.
7) Restore the instrument in the reversed order of step 2~4.
N/A
3.5.5 Replacing Reagent Preheating Assembly
Reagent Preheating temperature sensor: It is a Negative temperature coefficient, the resistance decreases
with increasing temperature.
Resistance at 25℃ of temp sensor: 2252Ω±20.
Heater 24V/24W, Resistance = 24.6 ~ 28.5 Ω
When to do
When Reagent Preheating Assembly failed.
Tools
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 3-30

probe arm cover
Reagent
Preheating
Assembly
Heat
insulation
pad
M3*6
cross pan
head
M3*8 screw
cross pan
head
screw
Hardened powder
screw(M3*6)
Figure 3-26 Replacing Reagent preheating assembly

How to do
3) Remove the two hardened powder screws (M3*6) and the probe arm cover.
4) Remove the cable of reagent preheating assembly. Remove the connector of the wash tubes from the
probe.
5) Remove one M3*8 cross pan head screw and one M3*6 cross pan head screw. Remove the two
heating insulation pad. Lay down the reagent preheating assembly. Remove the cover of the reagent
preheating assembly and then remove the wash tube.
6) Install new reagent preheating assembly and route the wash tube.
7) Install the two heating insulation pads and fix the reagent preheating assembly with one M3*8 and one
M3*6 cross pan head screw.
8) Connect the cable and the wash tube.
9) Use the sealing glue to seal the inlet and outlet of the wash tube and the cable.
N/A
3.5.6 Replacing Liquid Level Detection Board (LLD Board)
When to do
When LLD board failed.
Tools
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 3-31

probe arm cover
LLD board
M3*6 cross pan

head screw
Hardened
power
screws(M3X6)
Figure 3-27 Removing LLD board

How to do
3) Remove the two hardened powder screws (M3*6) and the probe arm cover.
4) Disconnect the connector of the LLD board.
5) Remove the two M3*6 cross pan head screws to remove the LLD board.
6) Replace it with new one and restore the instrument.
N/A
3.5.7 Replacing horizontal rotational synchronous belt
When to do
When horizontal rotational synchronous belt failed.
Tools
Hexagon wrench / 1
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 3-32

Horizontal
rotational
synchronous belt
M3*8 hexagon
socket cap screw
Figure 3-28 Replacing horizontal rotational synchronous belt

How to do
3) Draw an arc along the flat washers under the two M3×8 hexagon socket head cap screws that fasten
the outside of the motor.
4) Loosen 4 M3×8 hexagon socket head cap screws that fasten the motor, and remove the synchronous
belt.
5) Sheathe a new synchronous belt slowly from the tip into two pulleys.
6) Move the motor. When the flat washers under the two outside screws basically overlap the arc drawn
in step 3, tighten the 4 screws to fasten the motor.
7) Reset the panel disassembled in step 2.
3.5.8 Replacement of Horizontal Motor Assembly
When to do
When Horizontal Motor Assembly failed.
Tools
Hexagon wrench / 1
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 3-33

Horizontal
rotational
synchronous belt
M3*8 hexagon
socket cap screw
Horizontal motor
Figure 3-29 Replacing Horizontal motor assembly
How to do
4) Remove the motor cable connector, remove 4 M3×8 hexagon socket head cap screws and the
spring/flat washers that are used to fasten the motor, and remove the horizontal motor assembly.
5) Use 4 M3×8 hexagon socket head cap screws and spring/flat washers to pre-tighten a new horizontal
motor, and move the motor until the flat washers under the two outside screws basically overlap the
arc drawn in step 3. Tighten the 4 screws to fasten the motor, and plug the motor cable connector.
N/A
3.5.9 Replacement of Vertical Motor Assembly
When to do
When vertical Motor Assembly failed
Tools
Hexagon wrench / 1
Diagonal pliers / 1
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 3-34

Probe movement
assembly
Synchronous
belt
Fixing plate B
Fixing plate A Vertical motor
M4*16 hexagon socket cap head screw
Figure 3-30 Replacing vertical motor assembly

How to do
2) Open the shielding cover .Unscrew all the M4*8 cross pan head screw with washer on the desk panels.
Remove the cover of the sample/reagent carousel, sample/reagent desk panel, reaction carousel desk
panel and auto wash desk panel. Protect the probe from being collided during the dismantling.
3) Disconnect the connectors of the vertical and horizontal motor. Disconnect the connector of the optical
coupler.
4) Remove 3 M6×16 hexagon socket head cap screws(see Figure 3-31 Replacing probe drive
assembly ) and spring/flat washers, and take out the probe drive assembly from the instrument.
5) Mark a line at the place where the upper surfaces of fixing plate A and B contact the bracket. Remove
the three M4*16 hexagon socket cap head screws with spring washers to remove the fixing plate A
and B.Remove the synchronous belt from the pulley and finally remove the motor.
6) Install new motor and sleeve the synchronous belt onto the pulley. Connect the motor with its fixing
plate A and B with three M4*16 hexagon socket cap head screws with spring washers and move the
motor till the fixing plates align with the line. Tighten the screws to fix the motor.
Refer to 7.5.1 ~7.5.9 to align the positions: probe to reaction carousel, wash well, sample/reagent carousel and
ISE sample injection port.
3.5.10 Replacing Probe Drive Assembly
When to do
When Probe Drive Assembly failed
Tools
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 3-35


Hexagon wrench / 1
Diagonal pliers / 1
Probe arm cover
Sample probe arm

assembly

head cap screws and
spring washer Hardened power
screw (M3×6)
Probe drive
assembly

head cap screws and
spring/flat washer
Figure 3-31 Replacing probe drive assembly

How to do
2) Open the shielding cover, remove the sample/reagent carousel cover, and remove the left panel
assembly, front cover assembly, rear panel, lamp panel, reaction carosuel panel, and sample/reagent
panel. Protect the probe from colliding during the disassembling.
3) Remove the cable and wash tube that pass through the precision shaft, remove all the cables and
tube terminals, and take out the braided hose.
4) Remove vertical and horizontal motor connectors, and remove 2 photocoupling connectors.
5) Remove 2 hardened power screws (M3×6) to take out the arm cover.
6) Remove 2 M3×10 hexagon socket head cap screws and spring washers to take out the probe arm
assembly, and move the cable out of the precision shaft. Prevent probe collision.
7) Remove 3 M6×16 hexagon socket head cap screws and spring/flat washers, and take out the probe
drive assembly from the instrument.
8) Place a new probe drive assembly into the mounting position, and use 3 M6×16 hexagon socket head
cap screws and spring/flat washers to fasten the assembly.
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 3-36

9) Thread the cable and tube on the probe arm assembly from the top of the precision shaft, and use 2
M3×10 hexagon socket head cap screws and spring washers to pre-tighten the arm assembly onto
the precision shaft.
10) Sheathe the braided hose into the cable and the tube, reinstall connectors of the cable, and insert the
cable into the corresponding slot. Screw the tube mounting terminals and the quick connector into the
corresponding port.
11) Connect the motor cable and the photocoupler cable.
12) Refer to 7.5.1 ~7.5.9 to align the positions: probe to reaction carousel, wash well, sample/reagent
carousel and ISE sample injection port. Tighten two M4*16 hexagon socket cap screws to fix the arm
assembly. Use two hardened powder screws (M3*6) to install the arm cover.
Refer to 7.5.1 ~7.5.9 to align the positions: probe to reaction carousel, wash well, sample/reagent carousel and
ISE sample injection port.
3.6 Mixer Assembly
Mixer assembly consists of drive assembly and arm assembly. The mixer can move in horizontal and vertical
direction and mix the reaction liquid after sample is dispensed and after the reagent is dispensed.
Horizontal direction: mixer can move to wash well and reaction carousel.
Vertical direction: The mixer moves in vertical direction among the positions of cuvette and wash well.
Mixer is located at the front of the instrument.
Shielding cover
cover
Reaction carousel
Reagent bar code
panel
assembly
Rear panel
Lamp panel
Frame assembly
and the bracket
Figure 3-32 Locations of mixer assembly on the instrument
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 3-37

9
2
1
10
Figure 3-33 Mixer movement assembly

2 BA30-10-06619 Synchronous belt. B123MXL6.4
3 115-038796-00 Horizontal motor assembly
4+5 801-BX50-00012-00 Mixer assembly
6 801-BA10-00023-00 DC motor WRF-130CH
7 043-003064-00 Mixer arm cover
8 044-000333-00 mixer arm base
9 115-036665-00 Mixer drive assembly
10 115-038797-00 Vertical motor assembly
3.6.3 Replacing the optical coupler of horizontal and vertical movement
When to do
When the optical coupler of horizontal and vertical movement failed
Tools

Cross screwdriver (long and short) / each respectively
Adjustable wrench / 1
Diagonal pliers / 1
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 3-38


Mixer Movement Assembly
Wash well support
shaft
M3×6 cross recessed pan

head screw
Horizontal
movement
photocoupler
Horizontal sensor
bracket
pan head screw
Vertical movement
photocoupler
pan head screw
Figure 3-34 Replacing the optical coupler of horizontal and vertical movement
Replacement steps:
2) Open the shielding cover and remove the lamp panel, the reaction carousel panel. Protect the mixer
3) When replacing the vertical movement photocoupler, remove the wash well support shaft, remove the
photocoupler cable, use a short crosshead screwdriver to take out 1 M3×6 cross recessed pan head
screw and take out the vertical movement photcoupler, use 1 M3×6 cross recessed pan head screw
to fasten a new photocoupler, and plug the cable. Install the wash well support shaft.
4) When replacing the horizontal movement photocoupler, remove the photocoupler cable, remove 1
M3×6 cross recessed pan head screw to take out the horizontal sensor bracket with the photocoupler,
remove 1 M3×6 cross recessed pan head screw to take out the horizontal movement photcoupler, use
1 M3×6 cross recessed pan head screw to fasten a new photocoupler onto the horizontal sensor
bracket, use 1 M3×6 cross recessed pan head screw to fasten the horizontal sensor bracket in the
mounting position, and plug the photocoupler cable.
5) Install the panel that is disassembled in step 2.
Refer to 7.6.2 Mixer to Horizontal Wash Position to align mixer rotary to wash well.
3.6.4 Replacing horizontal rotational synchronous belt
When to do
When horizontal rotational synchronous belt failed
Tools
Hexagon wrench / 1
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 3-39


head screws with spring
and flat washer
Horizontal motor
assembly
Horizontal
rotational
synchronous belt
Figure 3-35 Replacing horizontal rotational synchronous belt

Replacement steps:
2) Open the shielding cover, remove the sample/reagent carosuel cover, and remove lamp panel,
reaction carosuel panel, and sample/reagent panel. Protect the mixer from colliding during the
disassembling.
4) Loosen 4 M3×8 hexagon socket head cap screws that fasten the motor, and remove the synchronous
belt.
5) Sheathe a new synchronous belt slowly from the tip into two pulleys.
6) Move the motor. When the flat washers under the two outside screws basically overlap the arc drawn
in step 3, tighten the 4 screws to fasten the motor.
Refer to 7.6.1 and 7.6.2 to align Reagent Mixer Rotary to Cuvette and mixer rotary to wash well.
3.6.5 Replacement of Horizontal Motor Assembly
When to do
When Horizontal Motor Assembly failed.
Tools
Hexagon wrench / 1
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 3-40


head screws with spring
and flat washer
Horizontal motor
Horizontal
rotational
synchronous belt
Figure 3-36 Replacing horizontal motor assembly

Replacement steps:
2) Open the shielding cover, remove the sample/reagent carousel cover, and remove lamp panel,
reaction carousel panel, and sample/reagent panel. Protect the mixer from colliding during the
disassembling.
4) Remove the motor cable connector, remove 4 M3×8 hexagon socket head cap screws and the
spring/flat washers that are used to fasten the motor, and remove the horizontal motor assembly.
5) Use 4 M3×8 hexagon socket head cap screws and spring/flat washers to pre-tighten a new horizontal
motor, and move the motor until the flat washers under the two outside screws basically overlap the
arc drawn in step 3. Tighten the 4 screws to fasten the motor, and plug the motor cable connector.
3.6.6 Replacing DC motor, mixer and powder screws
When to do
When DC motor failed, mixer is damaged or twisted or cosmetic defect of the powder screw occurs.
Tools
Cross screwdriver / each respectively
(big and small)
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 3-41

Mixer arm cover
DC motor
M2*4 cross pan

head screw
with the flat
washer
Retaining nut
Mixer
Hexagon socket cap

screws(M3*6)
Figure 3-37 Replacing DC motor, mixer and powder screws

Replacement steps:
2) Open the shielding cover,remove 2 hardened power screws (M3×6) to take out the mixer arm cover.
The powder screw may be replaced directly.
3) Loosen the retaining nut and remove the mixer. When repairing the mixer, replace the mixer with a
new mixer, and insert the mixer into the motor shaft and tighten the retaining nut.
4) Remove the motor cable, remove 2 M2×4 cross countersunk head screw and flat washers, take out
the DC motor, replace the motor with a new DC motor, and use 2 M2×4 cross countersunk head
screws and flat washers to pre-tighten the motor. Plug the motor cable.
5) Install the mixer, tighten the retaining nut and install the mixer arm cover.
3.6.7 Replacement of Vertical Motor Assembly
When to do
When vertical Motor Assembly failed.
Tools
Hexagon wrench / 1
Diagonal pliers / 1
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 3-42

Vertical
Probe movement
motor
assembly
Synchronous
belt
Motor fixing
plate B
Motor fixing M4*16hexagon socket cap

plate A head screws with spring and
flat washer
Figure 3-38 Replacing vertical motor assembly

How to do
2) Open the shielding cover. Unscrew all the M4*8 cross pan head screw with washer on the desk panels.
Remove the cover of the sample/reagent carousel, sample/reagent desk panel, reaction carousel desk
panel, auto wash desk panel, left panel, right panel and front panel. Remove the bracket of the wash
well together with the wash well. Protect the mixer from being collided during the dismantling.
3) Disconnect the connectors of the vertical and horizontal motor. Disconnect the connector of the optical
coupler.
4) Remove 3 M6×16 hexagon socket head cap screws（see Figure 3-39 Exploded view of mixer drive
assembly） and spring/flat washers, and take out the mixer drive assembly from the instrument.
5) Mark a line at the place where the upper surfaces of fixing plate A and B contact the bracket. Remove
the three M4*16 hexagon socket cap head screws with spring washers to remove the fixing plate A
and B.Remove the synchronous belt from the pulley and finally remove the motor.
6) Install new motor and sleeve the synchronous belt onto the pulley. Connect the motor with its fixing
plate A and B with three M4*16 hexagon socket cap head screws with spring washers and move the
motor till the fixing plates align with the line. Tighten the screws to fix the motor.
Refer to 7.6.1 ~ 7.6.2 to align positions: Mixer Rotary to Cuvette and mixer rotary to wash well.
3.6.8 Replacement of Mixer Drive Assembly
When to do
When mixer Drive Assembly failed
Tools
Hexagon wrench / 1
Diagonal pliers / 1
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 3-43


Mixer arm cover
Mixer arm
assembly

Hardened power
head cap screws and
screw (M3×6)
spring washer
Mixer drive
assembly
M6×16 hexagon
socket head cap
screws and
spring/flat washer
Figure 3-39 Exploded view of mixer drive assembly

Replacement steps:
2) Open the shielding cover, remove the sample/reagent carousel cover, and remove the left panel
assembly, front cover assembly, rear panel, lamp panel, reaction carosuel panel, and sample/reagent
panel. Protect the mixer from colliding during the disassembling.
3) Remove the cable that passes through the precision shaft, remove all the cables and terminals, and
take out the braided hose.
4) Remove vertical and horizontal motor connectors, and remove 2 photocoupling connectors.
5) Remove 2 hardened power screws (M3×6) to take out the arm cover.
6) Remove 2 M3×10 hexagon socket head cap screws and spring washers to take out the mixer arm
assembly, and move the cable out of the precision shaft. Prevent mixer collision.
7) Remove 3 M6×16 hexagon socket head cap screws and spring/flat washers, and take out the mixer
drive assembly from the instrument.
8) Place a new mixer drive assembly into the mounting position, and use 3 M6×16 hexagon socket head
cap screws and spring/flat washers to fasten the assembly.
9) Thread the cable on the mixer arm assembly from the top of the precision shaft, and use 2 M3×10
hexagon socket head cap screws and spring washers to pre-tighten the arm assembly onto the
precision shaft.
10) Sheathe the braided hose into the cable, reinstall connectors of the cable, and insert the cable into
the corresponding slot.
11) Connect the motor cable and the photocoupler cable.
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 3-44

12) Refer to 7.6.1 ~ 7.6.2 to align the positions: mixer to reaction carousel and wash well. Tighten two
M3*10 hexagon socket cap screws to fix the arm assembly. Use two hardened powder screws (M3*6)
to install the arm cover.
Refer to 7.6.1 ~ 7.6.2 to align positions: Mixer Rotary to Cuvette and mixer rotary to wash well.
3.7 Photometer Unit
3.7.1 Functions and Parameters
The BS-230 has inherited the mature filter light-splitting technology of Mindray's BS series. The photoelectric
detection unit uses a light source to illuminate directly. After passing through the interference filter, composite
light becomes monochromatic light of a specific bandwidth.After being absorbed by a solution, the
monochromatic beam is received by a photodetector. The photodetector converts the optical signal with light
intensity into an electric signal. A microprocessing unit calculates the concentration of the solution by calculating
the change of the light intensity. Multiple monochromatic wavelengths required in a photometric system are
implemented by using a filter wheel apparatus. During measurement, filters are sequentially shifted into the
optical path to implement colorimetric measurement of each wavelength.
Table 3-7 Technical Parameters
Optical system filter wheel forward-splitting system
optical-to-electric conversion of silicon photodiode.
Wavelength 8 wavelengths: 340nm, 405nm, 450nm, 510nm, 546nm, 578nm, 630nm,
and 670nm
Wavelength accuracy ±2nm
Light source 12V/20W, tungsten-halogen lamp, transmitting light through fiber
bundle
Minimum reaction volume 100μL
Absorbance range 0-4A, 10mm light pathlength
Cuvette Light pathlength of cuvette:5mm
Number of cuvettes: 40 cuvettes, 5mm*5mm*29.5mm
Cuvette material plastic
Table 3-8 Terms of Optics
AD value the value converted from photoelectric signal (voltage) through AD converter.
Lamp background the AD value tested without the cuvette
Light intensity is too Light background AD value of a random wavelength < 12000, the "Light intensity is
weak too weak" alarm is triggered.
Light intensity is too Light background AD value of a random wavelength > 63000, the "Light intensity is
strong too strong" alarm is triggered.
3.7.2 Composition and Structure of Optical Assembly

The BS-230 optical assembly uses a filter wheel plus a PD for photometric measurement. See the figure below.
The light source illuminates directly, and the beam is converged by the lens 1 and then split by the filter. A
monochromatic beam is shaped by the lens 2 and then passes through the cuvette. After being absorbed by
the solution, the beam is converged by the lens 3. Finally, the optical signal is received by the photodiode and
converted into an electric signal for outputting. The whole optical path is from the reaction carousel inwards.
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 3-45

Light source Lens 1 Filter Cuvettes Lens 3
Photodiode
Lens 2 Optical base
Figure 3-40 Optical path
Optical assembly
Figure 3-41 Locations of light source assembly and optical measurement assembly
The optical assembly consists of a light source assembly and a measurement assembly.
1 115-038466-00 20W lamp assembly (FRU)
2 041-001143-00 Lamp base retaining screw
3 BA10-20-78211 Patch cord for lamp housing
fan
4 801-BA10-00099-00 Preamplifier board
PCBA(FRU/C)
5 801-BA10-00041-00 Filter 340 (C)
6 801-BA10-00042-00 Filter 405 (C)
7 801-BA10-00043-00 Filter 450 (C)
8 801-BA10-00044-00 Filter 510 (C)
9 801-BA10-00045-00 Filter 546 (C)
10 801-BA10-00046-00 Filter 578 (C)
11 801-BA10-00047-00 Filter 630 (C)
12 801-BA10-00048-00 Filter 670 (C)
13 801-BA10-00004-00 AD collection board (C)
3.7.3 Replacing Lamp
When to do
Replace the lamp when an alarm is triggered indicating that the lamp has insufficient intensity, or not turned on,
or has been used for over 6months/2000 hours.
Tools
Cross screwdriver
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 3-46

Figure 3-42 Exploded view of lamp and fiber bundle for installation
Note:
 Replace the lamp according to the instructions on the screen.
 Please wait for at least 5 minutes (if the lamp fan works properly) after turning off the lamp to avoid injury.
 Do not touch the bulb when installing the new lamp. In case of touching, please clean the bulb with fibre
cloth or ethanol-moistened gauze.
How to do
1) Select Utility -> Maintenance -> Maintenance -> Biochemistry Maintenance, and select Replace
Lamp.
2) Follow the instructions prompted by the software and wait for 5 minutes until the lamp cools down.
3) Use a cross screwdriver to loosen the screws of the lamp panel, and remove the panel.
4) Unscrew the cable connectors and the lamp base retaining screws with hands, to remove the lamp.
5) Install the lamp and panel in a reversed order. Before installing the panel, ensure that the lamp has
been installed properly in the right place and there is no gap between the lamp and the lamp base.
6) Select "Continue" and wait for 5 minutes for the new lamp to get steady. Then, exit the "Replace
Lamp" window.
7) Select "Maintenance" → "Biochemistry Maintenance" → "Lamp Background Test" to check the
lamp background. AD value of lamp background of all channels should be between 30000 and 55000;
if not, adjust the gain parameter to make the lamp background be between 48000 and 55000.
Note: If lamp background test is not performed, the lamp background will not be updated after lamp
replacement, and cuvette status may be misjudged when replacing the cuvette.
Refer to 7.3.2 Photoelectric Gain Adjustment to adjust the Photoelectric Gain.
3.7.4 Disassembling/Assembling Optical Assembly
When to do
Remove the optical assembly before replacing the filter, preamplifier board, and lamp radiating fan.
Tools
Cross screwdriver and hexagon wrench
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 3-47

Figure 3-43 Exploded view of optical assembly
NOTE:
 Do not touch the optical surface of the filter with a hand during disassembling/assembling.
 During disassembling, please wait for at least 5 minutes (if the lamp fan works properly) after turning off
the lamp, so as to avoid burn.
 Do not lose the adjustment washer under the assembly during disassembling.
How to do
1) Switch off the power supply of the instrument.
2) Use a cross screwdriver to loosen the screws of the lamp panel, and remove the panel and the panel
on the top of the reaction carousel.
3) Refer to the Section about the reaction carousel unit maintenance to remove the upper cover of the
reaction chamber and remove the reaction carousel. See 3.3 Reaction Carousel Assembly.
4) Remove the right cover.
5) Unplug the power cord of the lamp radiating fan.
6) Unplug the cable between the preamplifier board and the AD collection board.
7) Use a hand to unscrew off the nuts on the cable terminals, and then remove the lamp power cord
terminal from the terminals.
8) Use a cross screwdriver to loosen the 2 screws that fasten the wiring terminal bracket, and remove
the wiring terminal bracket together with the wiring terminal from the optical assembly.
9) Unscrew the screws that fasten the fiber baffle plate, and remove the fiber baffle plate.
10) Use a hexagon wrench to remove the 3 M4 hexagon screws that fasten the optical assembly.
11) Extract the optical assembly upwards. Adjustment washes may exist under the assembly, which
should not be lost and shall be restored after installation. The positions of the washers are shown in
the following figure, and the semicircle of the washer clasps the positioning pin.
12) Install the optical assembly in reserved order of the foregoing steps.
Figure 3-44 Exploded view of optical assembly
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 3-48


Refer to 7.3 Photometric Unit to adjust signal collecting position and the photoelectric gain.
3.7.5 Replacing Filter
When to do
Replace the filter when an alarm indicates that the light intensity is low and when energy of a wavelength channel
is confirmed weak.
Tools
Hexagon wrench, cross screwdriver
How to do
1) Remove the optical assembly according to the method described in the previous section.
2) According to the following figure and the following table, find the holes of the filter of the corresponding
wavelength. Use a cross screwdriver to loosen the retaining screws and washers on both ends of the
filter that needs to be replaced, and remove the filter. The outer cylinder surface of the filter has filter
center wavelength silkscreen, which may be used to check again whether the filter is expected to be
replaced.
Filter retaining
screw
Filter retaining
washer
Filter retaining
washer
Filter hole No.
Filter wavelength Filter direction

(nm)
Filter hole No.
Figure 3-45 Exploded view for replacing filter
Hole No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Filter wavelength (nm) 340 405 546 670 450 510 578 630
3) Install a new filter in reversed order of the foregoing steps.
4) Install the optical assembly in reserved order of the foregoing steps.
5) Select "Maintenance"->"Alignment" -> " Signal Collecting Position Adjustment " and
"Photoelectric Gain Adjustment".Refer to 7.3 Photometric Unit.
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 3-49

NOTE:
 Do not touch the optical surface of the filter with a hand during disassembling/assembling.
3.7.6 Replacing Preamplifier Board

When to do
The preamplifier board may need to be replaced when no photoelectric signal is output or a dark current is
abnormal.
Tools
Cross screwdriver and hexagon wrench
How to do
1) Remove the optical assembly according to the method.
2) See the following figure. Use a screwdriver to remove the retaining screws of the shielding cover, and
remove the shielding cover.
3) Use a cross screwdriver to remove the retaining screws of the preamplifier board, and gently take out
the preamplifier board.
4) Install the preamplifier board in reversed order. Use water as sample or reagent to request test, the
reaction curve must be flat and straight.
Retaining
Optical base screws on the Leaf spring Lens Lens
shielding cover base
Washer
Preamplifier
board
Preamplifier board
retaining screw
Shielding cover
Figure 3-46 Exploded view for installing related parts on preamplifier board side on optical base
NOTE:
 The parts such as the lens and the lens base in the holes on the preamplifier board in the optical base are
fixed by using only the preamplifier board, and are not fixed by other means. Therefore, the preamplifier
board should be taken out upwards. When placing the optical assembly after the preamplifier board is
taken out, the mounting holes should face upwards to prevent dropping of the parts in the holes.
Select "Maintenance"->"Alignment" -> " Signal Collecting Position Adjustment " and "Photoelectric Gain
Adjustment".Refer to 7.3 Photometric Unit.
3.7.7 Replacing lamp fan
When to do
Replace the lamp radiating fan when it fails.
Tools
Flathead screwdriver, hexagon wrench
How to do
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 3-50

1) Remove the optical assembly according to the method.

2) See the following figure. Use a screwdriver to remove 4 screws that fasten the fan, and remove the
fan.
3) Install a new fan, and fasten it with screws.
NOTE:
 The fan radiates heat towards the lamp base. During installation, the fan surface that bears characters
faces the optical base, and the surface without characters faces outwards.
Lamp Light source

base radiating
fan
Fan retaining
screws
Figure 3-47 Exploded view of lamp radiating fan

Select "Maintenance"->"Alignment" -> " Signal Collecting Position Adjustment " and "Photoelectric Gain
Adjustment".Refer to 7.3 Photometric Unit.
3.7.8 Replacing Reaction Cuvette
The cuvettes used on the BS-230 are disposable consumables and should be replaced manually after each
test.
CAUTION
 Do not use reaction cuvettes other than the specified ones; otherwise, system performance will not be
achieved as promised.
 Do not use reaction cuvettes other than the specified ones; otherwise, system performance will not be
achieved as promised.
 The reaction cuvettes are for single use only. If they are reused, the system performance may be degraded.
 When installing new reaction cuvettes, do not touch the light entrance of the cuvettes; otherwise accurate
measurement may not be achieved or the cuvettes will be considered unqualified.
 When installing new reaction cuvettes, place them steadily on the reaction carousel.
 Ensure the small window on the reaction carousel is always closed during measurement; otherwise, reliable
test results may not be achieved.
Manually replacing cuvettes
1) Make sure the system status is standby or cuvette load.
2) Select the button.

3) Select the cuvette segments you want to replace and select Start.
4) Push forward the handle on the small window to open it, and then take out the old cuvette segments.
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 3-51

Figure 3-48 Manually replace cuvette window

5) Align the holes on the new cuvette segment to the pins on the reaction carousel and install the cuvette
segment on the carousel.
6) Select Replace to replace other cuvettes. Click scan cuvettes to finish replacing the cuvettes.
7) After installing, close the small window.
The system will test the newly installed cuvettes and prompt replacing cuvettes is successful.
3.7.9 Replacing AD collection board
When to do
The AD collection board may need to be replaced when no photoelectric signal is output or a dark current is
abnormal.
Tools
Cross screwdriver and antistatic gloves
How to do
1) Power off the analyzing unit or the instrument.
2) Use a cross screwdriver to remove the right cover of the instrument.
3) See the following figure. Use a cross screwdriver to remove the screws that fasten the upper cover of
the AD box, and remove the upper cover of the AD box.
4) Unplug the signal cable between the AD collection board and the Main board.
5) Use a cross screwdriver to remove the screws that fasten the AD collection board, and remove the
AD collection board.
6) Install a new AD collection board in reversed order of the foregoing steps.
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 3-52

Signal cable interface
AD collection board
AD box upper cover
Figure 3-49 Exploded view of AD collection board
NOTE:
Wear ESD gloves when replacing the AD collection board.

Select "Maintenance"->"Alignment" -> "Photoelectric Gain Adjustment".Refer to 7.3 Photometric Unit.
3.8 ISE Unit (Optional)
The ISE module is an optional module for the fully-automated chemistry analyzer and designed to measure the
concentration of K+, Na+ and Cl- in serum, plasma and diluted urine. The sample volume for measurement is:
70µl for serum and plasma, 140µl for urine diluted at the ratio of 1:9 (1 for urine and 9 for diluent).
Work principle
The ISE Module measures sodium, potassium, lithium and chloride in biological fluids,
using ion selective electrode technology. The flow-through of each electrode uses selective membrane
tubing, specially formulated to be sensitive to corresponding ions. The potential of each electrode is
Measured relative to a fixed, stable voltage established by the double-junction silver/silver chloride
Reference electrode. an ion selective electrode develops a voltage that varies with the concentration
of the ion to which it responds.
The relationship between the voltage and the concentration can be expressed by Nernst equation
ENa ERef
ENa  ERe f  S log  Na
Na
Ref
Two-points Calibration
→factor S
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 3-53

Figure 3-50 ISE Work principle
Calibrator Calibrator
B A
Pump Pump Pump ISE
Waste tank B A W
Figure 3-51 Fluidic system of ISE Unit

Two-points calibration
1) Adding Calibrant A
2) Locating
3) Draining
4) Adding Calibrant B
5) Locating
6) Draining
One-point Calibration（serum sample test）
1) Adding serum sample
2) Locating
3) Draining
4) Adding Calibrant A
5) Locating
6) Draining
Parameters
Table 3-10 ISE Parameters
Item Features
Sample Serum,Plasma,Urine
Sample volume Serum, plasma 70uL, diluted urine 140uL
(10-fold dilution)
Method Direct method
Time 35s/cycle(Serum)
Speed 300Test/hour(Serum)/198 Test/hour(Urine)

Power 24VDC ，1A
Communication RS232C
Maximum ambient 32℃
temperature
composition
ISE module
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 3-54

There are five kinds of electrodes with Na+, K+, Cl-, reference and spacer electrodes. The sample is added by
the addition port of the ISE module, and the sample is analyzed and measured.
Spacer
Figure 3-52 ISE module

Peristaltic pump
–Pump W:Draining the wasted liquid, and locating the liquid in the tubing
–Pump A：Controlling adding calibrator A.
–Pump B：Controlling adding calibrator B.
Reagent module
The reagent module integrates calibrator A, calibrator B, waste container, and a chip used for monitoring reagent
inventory. It provides reagent for sample analysis and stores the liquid waste herein.
–Calibrant A: Two point and single-point calibration，Pump calibration，Bubble calibration,
Washing after each test.
–Calibrant B:Two point and single-point calibration for urine sample.
–waste container,：storage waste.
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 3-55

Figure 3-53 Peristaltic pump and Reagent module

Auxiliary reagent
–Cleaning solution:It is used once every 50 samples to prevent protein buildup,100uL of
cleaning solution will be used.
–Urine Diluent: It is used for urine samples. Urine samples must be diluted to perform
urine measurement: 1 part urine specimen to 9 parts Urine Diluent
Urine diluent
Cleaning solution
Figure 3-54 Cleaning solution and Urine diluent
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 3-56

3.8.2 Structure and FRU List
SP3.5*8 screw
ISE shielding box
ISE module
ISE shield
M4*8 screw
Figure 3-55 Exploded view for installation of ISE module
Pump bracket
Pump
M2.5*6 screw
M2.5*6 screw
Figure 3-56 Exploded view for installation of pump module
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 3-57

Figure 3-57 Exploded view for installation of reagent module

1 115-004626-00 K electrode
2 115-004627-00 Na electrode
3 115-004630-00 Cl electrode
4 115-004625-00 Reference electrode
5 115-004628-00 Spacer
6 BA34-10-63657 Main board of the ISE module
7 BA34-10-63659 Pre-amplification board of the ISE
module
8 BA34-10-63658 Compression plate
9 801-BA34-00104-00 ISE module bubble detector
10 801-BA34-00103-00 Sample tube of ISE module
11 BA34-10-63663 O ring of ISE module(3)
12 BA34-10-63668 O ring of ISE electrode
13 082-000684-00 Peristaltic Pump
14 801-BA34-00105-00 The peristaltic pump tube(3 pcs)
15 BA34-10-63666 ISE waste tube connector
16 BA34-10-63667 Tube connector of ISE (4)
17 801-BA34-00106-00 ISE module plastic tube for A ,B and
W liquid
18 BA34-10-63812 ISE module wand
3.8.3 Unclogging Waste Tubes
When to do
If the sample contains insoluble substances like fibrin or other substances, they can be accumulated in the
waste tube after long time use, causing clogging of the waste tube.
Maintenance Tools
Unclogging tool for ISE 115-023372-00 1
WARNING
Do not spill liquid on the analyzer. Liquid ingression may cause equipment damage.
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 3-58

Biohazards
Wear gloves and lab coat, and if necessary, goggles during the maintenance process.
Note
Excessive bleach and DI water flushed into the ISE reagent pack waste bag may cause waste bag over
expansion and clog the Cal A & Cal B reagent flow.
To prevent this problem, connect to an old used-up reagent pack or use the connector of the used-up reagent.
How to do
1) Ensure the analyzer is in idle (standby) status. Open the ISE window on the right side panel of
the analyzer.
2) Connect the waste tube fitting to a syringe and unclogging tool with 5mL of undiluted household
bleach.
3) Press the wand release button to remove the wand from the current in use ISE reagent pack and
keep it in a save place. Engage the wand to an old used-up reagent pack.
4) Inject bleach into the ISE waste tube and soak the tube for 5 minutes. Discharge the waste into
the reagent pack.
Note: When the bleach cannot be injected into the ISE pack, remove the wand and push down to open the
waste valve manually with a sharp object, and then inject again. If bleach can go through this time, the waste
bag was clogged and cannot be used. If bleach still cannot be injected, replacing the ISE wand is recommended.
5) Repeat this step with 5mL of DI water without the 5 minutes of soaking time.
6) Remove the wand from the old use-up pack and re-install it back to the current in use ISE pack.
Re-install the waste tube fitting back to the ISE electrode housing right angle adapter and waste
peri-pump tube back to the pump bracket. Re-install the housing cover.
Perform ISE pump calibration and if it succeeds, the tube has been successfully unclogged.
3.8.4 Replacing Pump Tube
When to do
Replace the pump tube when it is aged or leaking or has not been maintained for a half year.
Maintenance Tools
Cross screwdriver, pump tube.
Precautions:
Biohazards
How to do
1) Ensure the analyzer is on idle (standby) condition. Open the ISE cover on the right side analyzer
panel.
2) Select Utility-Maintenance-Maintenance-ISE-Remove Reagent Pack.
3) Select Utility -> Maintenance -> Maintenance -> ISE -> Replace Pump Tube and Calibrator Tube.
4) Select Pump Tube.
5) Replace it with new one. Make sure the connectors and tubes are correctly connected; otherwise
ISE module failure may occur.
6) Load the reagent pack and the procedure is completed.
7) Install back the right side panel.
8) Record the maintenance log.
Perform ISE pump calibration and if it succeeds, the tube has been successfully replaced.
3.8.5 Replacing Calibrator Tube
When to do
Replace the calibrator tube when it is aged or leaking or has not been maintained for over one year.
Maintenance Tools
Cross screwdriver, calibrator tube
Precautions:
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 3-59

Biohazards
How to do
1) Ensure the analyzer is on idle (standby) condition. Open the ISE cover on the right side analyzer
panel.
2) Select Utility-Maintenance-Maintenance-ISE-Remove Reagent Pack.
3) Select Utility -> Maintenance -> Maintenance -> ISE -> Replace Pump Tube and Calibrator Tube.
4) Select Calibrator Tube.
5) Replace it with new one. Make sure the connectors and tubes are correctly connected; otherwise
ISE module failure may occur.
6) Load the reagent pack and the procedure is completed.
7) Install back the right side panel.
8) Record the maintenance log.
Perform ISE pump calibration and if it succeeds, the tube has been successfully replaced.
3.8.6 Replacing ISE electrode
ISE electrodes are consumables and have a limited life span. When used for a long period or after measuring
a large number of samples, the ISE electrodes may have their performance degraded and should be replaced
immediately.
Purpose
To replace the ISE electrodes to ensure the optimal measurement performance.
When to do
 Reference electrode: Every 6 months
Other electrodes:
When 10,000 ISE tests are performed.
When the ISE electrodes are used for 6 months since installation.
 When calibration fails or quality control is abnormal as the result of degraded electrode performance.
Materials required
Reference electrode, ISE electrode
System status
Make sure that the status of the ISE module is Standby or Stopped
Precautions
BIOHAZARD
 Wear gloves and lab coat, and if necessary, goggles.
NOTE
 After performing this procedure, recalibrate the ISE electrodes prior to starting analysis.
How to do
1) To remove the electrodes
a) Select Utility > Maintenance > Maintenance > ISE Maintenance.
b) Choose Replace Electrode.
c) Select desired electrodes, and enter the lot number and expiration date.
d) Select Add and then select OK.
e) Select Continue.
f) Open the ISE side door and remove the cover of the shielding box.
g) Open the electrode case, take out the electrode, remove the tapes around its inside, and then
use clean tissue to wipe it.
NOTE
 Take out the insert from the reference electrode, and ensure no crystallized salt exists in and around it. If
needed, clean the electrode with warm water.
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 3-60

 Make sure the red ball of the reference electrode floats on the internal fluid. Make sure the O rings of all
electrodes remain intact.
h) Remove all electrodes from the ISE module.
2) To install the new electrodes
a) To install a new reference electrode:
Place the reference electrode at the bottom of the ISE module and make the rear part of the electrode contact
closely with the internal wall of the ISE module.
Loosen the compressor and ensure the electrodes are fixed tightly.
b) Install other electrodes in the order of Cl, K, Na, and spacer from bottom to top.
c) If the O ring is lost, install a new one. There are two more O rings in each electrode case.
d) Check if the electrode positions are correct:
 The Na, K and Cl electrodes are of the same size and shape. Ensure that the electrodes are inserted in
the correct order.
 If one of the electrodes cannot be easily pushed into the housing, check the electrode first and then repeat
the installation process.
 Check if the 5 electrodes are relatively on the same straight line; otherwise, liquid cannot flow through the
electrode tubes smoothly.
e) Select Continue. The system primes the tubes with calibrators A and B.
f) Select Done.
g) Restore the cover of the shielding box and close the side door of the ISE module.
h) Run ISE calibration.
i) If the calibration fails, perform the following operations:
 Run ISE calibration for multiple times so that the electrodes can get steady quickly.
 Or, drip little serum sample in the electrode channel, and leave it for 10-30 minutes, and then run calibration
again.
NOTE
 The new electrode can be calibrated successfully only after certain time period.
3.8.7 Removing reagent pack(ISE)

When powering off the analyzer for a long time, or storing the electrodes, or replacing the electrode tubes,
remove the reagent pack first.
When to do
Perform this maintenance procedure when powering off the analyzer for a long time (over 3 days), or storing
the electrodes, or replacing the electrode tubes
System status
How to do
1) Select Utility > Maintenance > ISE Maintenance, and choose Remove Reagent Pack.
2) Remove the tube of pump A and then reinstall the tube by switching the connectors of
the tube.
3) Handle pump B in the same way.
4) Select Continue. The system executes purge A and B each for 30 times.
5) Restore the reversed pump tubes.
6) Install the three red caps on the tube connectors of the reagent pack, and keep the
reagent pack at room temperature away from sunshine.
7) Select Done.
3.8.8 Storing electrodes(ISE)
Before the analyzer is powered off for a long time or after the reagent pack is removed, the ISE electrodes
cannot be moistened by regular prime, and may be damaged due to lack of water. It is necessary to store the
electrodes properly before powering off the analyzer for a long period.
Purpose
To store the electrodes separately to prevent them from being damaged due to lack of water while the analyzer
is powered off.
Materials required
Electrode cases and tapes
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 3-61

When to do
Perform this procedure when the analyzer is going to be powered off for over 3 days. If it will be powered off for
no more than 3 days, prime the ISE electrodes to protect them from being damaged.
System status
Precautions
BIOHAZARD
Wear gloves and lab coat, and if necessary, goggles during the maintenance process
note
Make sure that the storage temperature is below 40℃.
How to do
1) Remove the reagent pack,see 3.8.7 Removing reagent pack(ISE).
2) Open the ISE side door and remove the cover of the shielding box.
3) Remove all electrodes from the ISE module.
4) To save the reference electrode:
a) Put back the insert to the cell of the reference electrode and prevent the crystallized salt
from clogging the cell.
b) Store the electrode in an electrode case at the room temperature in a sun-shielding place.
5) To save the Na, K and Cl electrodes:
a) Take out a little calibrator A from the reagent pack, inject it into the cell of the electrode and
seal it with tape. Make sure proper amount of calibrator is injected into the cell of the
electrode.
b) Store the capped electrodes in an electrode case at the room temperature in a sun-shielding
place.
6) Restore the cover of the shielding box and close the side door of the ISE module.
3.8.9 Inventory Calculation of Reagent Pack
Reagent pack as one part of the ISE module should be installed as instructed by this manual. You should
install reagent pack while the analyzer is powered off, and then check the reagent inventory and prime the ISE
module with Calibrator A and B. If the reagent pack is not properly installed, error may be produced in inventory
calculation, and the actual volume may differ from that displayed on the screen.
The following operations may result in the actual inventory of the ISE reagent pack
less than the displayed one.
1) When the analyzer is turned on and the ISE module is in failure status, the reagent pack is changed, without
recovering the module failure or checking the inventory immediately.
Operation explanation: When the ISE module is in Stopped status, the software will stop writing volume
information into the reagent pack chip. However, the analyzer will automatically execute the sip action of the
ISE module during startup to consume certain amount of reagent. Therefore, when the reagent pack is replaced,
but the ISE module is not restored or the screen display refreshed, the software will not calculate the reagent
consumption volume until reading the new reagent pack. At this moment, the actual reagent volume =
displayed volume - consumption of Sip after replacing the reagent pack, which means that the actual reagent
volume is less than the displayed volume on the screen.
2) When the analyzer is powered on but the software is closed or the computer is shut down, the reagent
pack is changed.
Operation explanation: During shutdown, the analyzer will automatically execute the sip action of the ISE
module to consume certain amount of reagent. When the analyzer is started up, the software will detect a new
reagent pack and zero the consumption that is not written into the reagent pack chip, and then display the
volume read from the reagent pack chip. At this moment, the actual reagent volume = displayed volume -
consumption of Sip after replacing the reagent pack, which means that the actual reagent volume is less than
the displayed volume on the screen.
pack is switched to another analyzer and then installed back after use.
Operation explanation: During shutdown process, the analyzer cannot detect if the reagent pack is normal.
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 3-62

If the reagent pack is installed on the current instrument after being used on another one, the analyzer, when
started up, will detect that the recorded reagent volume on the chip is less than the original one, and the software
will zero the reagent consumption of Sip during shutdown and display the read volume on the screen. At this
moment, the actual reagent volume = displayed volume - consumption of Sip during shutdown (with reagent
pack installed), which means that the actual reagent volume is less than the displayed volume on the screen.
1) The ISE module is de-configured, but the reagent pack is still on the instrument.
Operation explanation: Though the ISE module is de-configured, the original reagent pack information is not
cleared from the database. When the ISE module is configured again with the same reagent pack, the Sip
period without ISE module will be included in calculation of the reagent consumption.
Note:
 In condition 1, restore the ISE module and check the reagent inventory immediately to minimize or eliminate
the calculation error.
 In condition 2 and 3, before running the operating software to start up the analyzer, remove the reagent
pack and then run the operating software. After the startup procedure is complete, re-install the reagent
pack and inquire the reagent volume immediately to minimize or eliminate the calculation error.
 In condition 4, remove the reagent pack and then de-configure the ISE module.
The following operations may result in the actual inventory of the ISE reagent pack
more than the displayed one.
1) When the analyzer is turned on and the ISE reagent pack is changed, without checking the inventory
immediately.
Operation explanation: The analyzer will automatically refresh the ISE reagent consumption, by subtracting
the consumption of calibrator A or B from the known volume (of the original reagent pack) and writing it into the
reagent pack chip, when calibrator A or B is consumed for 1%. The written volume is based on the original
reagent pack before replacement, and the volume of a used reagent pack is often less than that of a new one.
So the volume recorded on the chip of the new reagent pack is less than the actual volume, and the actual
volume is greater than the displayed volume on the screen.
pack is removed for storage, and re-installed before the operating software is run.
Operation explanation: During shutdown process, the analyzer cannot detect if the reagent pack is normal.
If the reagent pack is loaded before the analyzer is started up, the analyzer, when started up, will detect that the
reagent volume recorded on the chip is same as that recorded by the software, but the software will confirm by
mistake the reagent consumption of sip during shutdown. (Actually, no reagent is consumed.) Therefore, after
calculating the reagent consumption, the software will write the new volume information onto the chip and
display it on the screen. At this moment, the actual reagent volume = displayed volume + consumption of Sip
during shutdown (with reagent pack installed), which means that the actual reagent volume is greater than the
displayed volume on the screen.
3) The analyzer is powered off after the operating software is closed, and it is powered on again before the
operating software is run.
Operation explanation: When closed normally, the operating software cannot detect if the ISE module is
working. When powered on before the software is run, the analyzer, when started up, will detect that the reagent
volume recorded on the chip is same as that recorded by the software, but the software will confirm by mistake
the reagent consumption of sip during shutdown. (Actually, no reagent is consumed because the ISE module is
not working while the analyzer is powered off.) Therefore, after calculating the reagent consumption, the
software will write the new volume information onto the chip and display it on the screen. At this moment, the
actual reagent volume = displayed volume + consumption of Sip during shutdown (with reagent pack installed),
which means that the actual reagent volume is greater than the displayed volume on the screen.
Note:
 In condition 1, inquire the ISE reagent volume immediately to minimize or eliminate the calculation error.
 In condition 2 and 3, before running the operating software to start up the analyzer, remove the reagent
pack and then run the operating software. After the startup procedure is complete, re-install the reagent
pack and inquire the reagent volume immediately to minimize or eliminate the calculation error.
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 3-63

4 Hardware Circuits
4.1 Overview
This chapter describes the functions of the printed circuit board assemblies (PCBAs) used on the BS-230.
4.2 Harzards
Note:
 While the instrument is working, do not touch the hardware circuit boards with your hands or other objects.
 Before removing a circuit board, disconnect the instrument from the (AC) power supply. Please wear a pair
of anti-static gloves or take other measures to prevent static electricity prior to removing a circuit board.
4.3 Summary of PCBAs

The table bellows provides a summary of the PCBAs used on the BS-230 Chemistry Analyzer and briefly
describes their functions.
Table 4-1 Summary of PCBAs
PCBA（PCB） Functions ID
Main board The main board is the control center of the #1
051-002414-00 instrument. It is mainly used to fulfill the
following tasks: 1) communicating with a
computer through the RS232 serial port to
transmit data and instructions; 2)
communicating with the smart modules,
including the ISE module, through the
extended serial ports to transmit data and
instructions; and 3) controlling digital
potentiometer adjustment and photoelectric
data collection of the AD collection board
and receiving the photoelectric data.
Power driver board The power drive board drives and controls #2
051-002413-00 the probe, mixer, sample/reagent carousel,
reaction carousel, wash station and wash
syringe and other related components.
Reagent refrigeration board The reagent refrigeration board is used to #3
BA20-30-75227 drive the reagent refrigeration circuit
(including heatsinks), fans, and demisting
circuit of the reagent bar code reader.
Liquid Level Detection Board（LLD Board） The board detects the level of samples and #4
051-002479-00 reagents, and detect/convert the signals of
the vertical obstruct detection sensor.
AD collection board The AD collection board adjusts the #5
BA10-30-77759 photoelectric signals output by the pre-
amplification board and controls it for AD
conversion. It provides an SPI interface for
connecting with the Main board.
Pre-amplifying board The pre-amplification board converts the ＃6
BA10-30-77760 signals of the discrete photodiode array
from analog to digital.
Power supply board It used for power the whole unit, outputting #7
051-002304-00 the A12V, A5V digital, D12V/E12V analog,
C12V power, B24V power, and the B12V
power for partial Peltiers
ISE power PCBA It is used for powering the ISE module. #8

The locations of the PCBA on the instrument.
Figure 4-1 Locations of the PCBA on the instrument 1
Figure 4-2 Locations of the PCBA on the instrument 2
4.4 Functions of PCBA

4.4.1 Control Structure
The BS-230 Chemistry Analyzer consists of the analyzing unit (analyzer), operation unit (computer), and output
unit (printer).

The analyzing unit (analyzer) is composed of the temperature control system, reaction system (including ISE
module), photometric system, sample/reagent handling system, mixer system, and cuvette wash station.
The control diagram is as follows:
Optical System
Photoelectric signal
Control signal
Temperature
control signal
Temperature control
PC RS232 Hardware System
system
Control signal
Control signal
Position signal
Drive and execute

system
Figure 4-3 General functions

The hardware system has the following functions:
 Communicating with a computer through the serial port, and receiving/sending commands, responses, and
data.
 Controlling data collection of the photometric system.
 Controlling movement and status signal collection of execution units.
 Controlling working and temperature control signal collection of the temperature control system.
4.4.2 Main Board
Functions and Principles
 Communicating with computer through the serial port to transmit data and instructions and update its
application program.
 Communicating with the smart modules, including the ISE module, through the extended serial ports to
transmit data and instructions.
 Controlling digital potentiometer adjustment and photoelectric data collection of the AD collection board
and receiving the photoelectric data.
 Detecting position signal and horizontal obstruct signal.
 Detecting level sense signal and vertical obstruct signal through the interface for the LLD board.
The figure below shows the relation between the main board and other PCBAs.
Power
supply
board
Reagent
Power drive
refrigeration Main Board
board
board
AD collection
board
Preamplifier
board
Figure 4-4 Relation between main board and other PCBAs

The functional diagram of the control board is as shown below.

Drive clock/direction sign al

Injection unit
Probe wash pump valve signal
Location sensor

Level floater Mixer Unit
Wash p ump valve signal
Reaction Unit Drive clock/direction sign al

PC
FPGA Drive clock/direction signal
Reaction carou sel heater control signal

Temperature
Control Unit
Main Control Unit
Main Board
Figure 4-5 Functional diagram of main board

Description
PCB
The PCB layout of the main board is as shown below.

Figure 4-6 Main board PCB

Connectors
The main board includes the following connectors.
Power supply:
Power supply input (J2): 6-pin, providing +12V analog and +5V digital for PCBAs.
Pin No. Signal Reference Value
1 +5V 4.75~5.25V
2 GND /
3 / /
4 / /
5 12V 11.4~-12.6V
6 GND /
Connectors for sending/receiving communication signals:
 Serial port (J7) for PC: 10-pin, RS232, used for communication with a computer.
 Drive signal interface (J1):40 PIN, TTL used to transmit control signal to power drive board.
 Connector (J39) for AD collection board: DB25, used for communication with the AD collection board and
providing power supply for it.
 Connector (J6) for ISE module: 8-pin, RS232, used for communication with the ISE module.
 Connector (J5) for bar code reader: 8-pin, RS232, used for communication with the bar code reader.

 Connector for optical coupler (J12):36 PIN, used for the input of the sensors of moving parts.
 Connector for optical coupler (J13):36 PIN, used for the input of the sensors of moving parts.
 Connector for optical coupler (J14):10 PIN, used for the input of the liquid floater sensor.
 Connector of temperature sensor (J18):4PIN, used for the input of temperature sensor of the reaction
carousel.
 Connector of temperature sensor (J23):4PIN, used for the input of temperature sensor of reagent
preheating.
 Connector of the liquid level detection board (J11):4PIN, for power supply and signal output of LLD board:
4-pin, used to input a level signal and an anti-collision signal into and provide a power supply for the LLD
board.
Connectors for debugging:
 JTAG connector (J8): 10-pin, used for debugging the FPGA.
Indicators
The main board contains the following indicators.
 +12V power supply indicator (D8): green. It is lit when the analyzer power switch is turned on, indicating
that the +12V power supply has been connected.
 +5V power supply indicator (D7): green. It is lit when the analyzer power switch is turned on, indicating that
the +5V power supply has been connected.
 +3.3V power supply indicator (D9): green. It is lit when the analyzer power switch is turned on, indicating
that the +3.3V power supply has been connected.
 Analog +12V power supply indicator (D20): green. It is lit when the analyzer power switch is turned on,
indicating that the analog +12V power supply has been connected.
 Analog -12V power supply indicator (D21): green. It is lit when the analyzer power switch is turned on,
indicating that the analog -12V power supply has been connected.
 D19: orange FPGA configuration indicator. On indicates FPGA is successfully configured.
 D14: Green FPGA working status indicator. LED is flashing every second, indicating FPGA works normally.
 D23: Green. When communication with the lower layer unit is interrupted, the indicator is lit.
Test points
In the following positions of the main board can signal tests be performed.
 12V: +12V power supply input. Normal range: 11.4 - 12.6V.
 P12V: analog +12V power supply input. Normal range: 11.4 - 12.6V.
 N12V: analog -12V power supply input. Normal range: -11.4 - -12.6V.
 VDD: +3.3V power supply. It is secondary power supply used to power the major digital circuits of the PCBA.
Normal range: 2.97 - 3.63V.
 2.5V: +2.5V power supply. It is secondary power supply used for FPGA downloading. Normal range: 2.25
- 2.75V.
 1.2V: +1.2V power supply. It is secondary power supply used to power the FPGA core. Normal range: 1.14
- 1.26V.
Installation Methods and Precautions

Steps:
1) Before replacing, you need to confirm the closed channel configuration of the current main board of
the instrument.
2) Before replacing the main board, you need to back up the unit parameters in advance. Refer to 6.7.3
Unit parameter Backup.
3) Power off,and remove the back cover.
4) Disconnect all the connectors on the main board (it is recommended to take pictures before
disconnecting to avoid subsequent wiring errors)
5) Replace the new main board and connect all the connectors.
6) Need to brush the control system software after replacement, refer to 6.4.3 Upgrading Control System.
7) After brushing the control system software, you need to confirm the parameters. If there is any change,
you need to configure the parameters according to Section 6.7.4 Parameter Configuration.
Note
 Prior to removing the PCBA, disconnect the instrument from the power supply and wear a pair of anti-static
gloves or wrist straps.

 Make sure that the connectors are inserted properly into the PCBA.
 Check the connectors with locks and ensure they have been locked properly.
 Check other connectors and ensure that they are inserted into the end of the slots.
 It requires great force to plug/unplug the J1,J12~J13 connectors. Hold the PCBA by its edge while
plugging/unplugging the connectors to prevent it from being deformed or damaged.
 After connecting J39 connector (DB25), tighten the retaining screws on two sides of it.
 Save the parameters before removing the PCBA in order to load the parameters after the PCBA is removed.
4.4.3 Power driver board

 It is used to control the step motor, DC motor and Valve.
 It receives the signal from the Main Board through the connector for the control board.
 It control and drive the syringe, sample/reagent carousel, sample/reagent probe, mixer, reaction carousel
valve.
The functional diagram of the power drive board is as shown below.
The PCB layout of the power drive board is as shown below.

Power drive board

Inject ion u nit
Probe vertical motor
Probe wash pump valve signal
Location sensor Probe horizontal motor
Probe syringe motor
Motor
Level floater
Mixer un it drive
CPLD A3985/
A3979
Reaction unit
PC
FPGA
Pump/valve
Pump/valve
drive
Pump/valve
drive
Reaction carou sel heater control signal
220V heater drive Reaction carou sel heater
Temperature control unit
Main control unit Power supply board
Main l board
Figure 4-7 Power drive board

Figure 4-8 Power drive board PCB

Connectors:
The power drive board contains the following connectors.
Power supply:
Power supply input (J17): 8-pin, providing 24V, 12V analog and +5V digital for PCBAs.
1 +24V 23.5~26V
2 +24V 23.5~26V
3 +5V 4.75~5.25V
4 +12V 11.4~12.6V
5 GND /
6 GND /
7 GND /
8 GND /
 Connector (J20) for transmitting control signal of main control board: 40-pin, TTL, used for transmitting a
control signal.
Connectors for debugging:
 JTAG connector (J2): 10-pin, used for debugging the FPGA.
Connectors for drive and control:
 Valve driving connector (J6): 8-pin, used for driving interior pump and interior wash valve of the probe.
 Sample/reagent carousel motor driving connector (J15): 4-pin, used for driving the sample/reagent
carousel motor.
 Reaction carousel motor driving connector (J16): 4-pin, used to drive reaction carousel motor.
 Sample/reagent horizontal motor driving connector (J5): 4-pin, used for driving the sample/reagent
horizontal motor.
 Sample/reagent vertical motor driving connector (J13): 4-pin, used for driving the sample/reagent vertical
motor.
 Sample/reagent syringe motor driving connector (J8): 4-pin, used for driving the sample/reagent syringe
motor.
 Sample/reagent mixer horizontal motor driving connector (J10): 4-pin, used for driving the sample/reagent
mixer horizontal motor.
 Sample/reagent mixer vertical motor driving connector (J14): 4-pin, used for driving the sample/reagent
mixer vertical motor.
 Mixer motor driving connector (J22): 2-pin, used to drive the mixer motor.
 Reagent preheating driving connector (J24): 2-pin, used for driving the reagent preheater.
Indicators
The power drive board contains the following indicators.
Power supply:
 +5V power supply indicator (D2): green. It is lit when the analyzer power switch is turned on, indicating that
the +5V power supply has been connected.
Test points
In the following positions of the power drive board can signal tests be performed.
 24V: 24V power supply input. Normal range: 23.5 - 26V.
Note
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 4-10

 It requires great force to plug/unplug the J20 and J17 connectors. Hold the PCBA by its edge while
plugging/unplugging the connectors to prevent it from being deformed or damaged.
4.4.4 AD collection board

 Adjusting gains of 8 photoelectric signals via a digital potentiometer.
 Controlling the channel selection switch to switch among 8 channel signals at different time.
 Converting photoelectric analog signals into digital signals via an AD converter and then outputting the
signals.
The figure below shows the relation between the AD collection board and other PCBAs.
Preamplifier
board
AD collection
board
Main Board
The functional diagram of the AD collection board is as shown below.

Preamplifier
board
Single analog signal gain

adjustment
Main Board
AD
Description
PCB
The PCB layout of the AD collection board is as shown below.
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 4-11

Figure 4-9 Preamplifying AD PCB

Connectors
The AD collection board includes the following connectors.
Power supply:
 Power supply output connector (J1): 6-pin, used to provide +12V and -12V power supplies for the
preamplifier board and receive optical and electric signals from the preamplifier board.
1 Signal 0.25V-2.5V (water blank condition)
2 +12V 11.4~12.6V
3 GND /
4 GND /
5 GND /
6 -12V -11.4~-12.6V
 Main board connector (P1): 25-pin, used for communication with the main control board.
Indicators
The AD collection board contains the following indicators.
Power supply:
 +12V power supply indicator (D5): green. When it is lit, it indicates that the +12V power supply has been
connected.
 -12V power supply indicator (D4): green. When it is lit, it indicates that the -12V power supply has been
connected.
 +5V power supply indicator (D3): green. When it is lit, it indicates that the +5V power supply has been
connected.
Test points
In the following positions of the AD collection board can signal tests be performed.
 VIN: Optical/electric signal output Normal range: varies with the signal strength and lies between 0-5V.
 VPP: +12V power supply input. Normal range: 12V±5%, that is, 11.4 - 12.6V.
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 4-12

 VSS: -12V power supply input. Normal range: -12V±5%, that is, -11.4 - -12.6V.
 VCC: +5V power supply input. Normal range: 5V±5%, that is, 4.75 - 5.25V.
 AVCC: analog +5V power supply. Normal range: 5V±5%, that is, 4.75 - 5.25V.
 DVCC: digital +5V power supply. Normal range: 5V±5%, that is, 4.75 - 5.25V.

Refer to 3.7.9 Replacing AD collection board.
Note
 It requires relatively great force to plug/unplug connectors J1. Hold the PCBA by its edge while
plugging/unplugging these connectors to prevent it from being deformed or damaged.
 After connecting P1 connector (DB25), tighten the retaining screws on two sides of it..
4.4.5 Pre-amplification Board

 Converting optical signals into electric signals via a photodiode array.
 With the help of the back circuit, filtering signals and transmitting them to the AD collection board after
amplification.
The figure below shows the relation between the pre-amplification board and other PCBAs.
Optical signal
AD collection
Preamplifier board
board
Figure 4-10 Relation between pre-amplification board and other PCBAs

The functional diagram of the pre-amplification board is shown below.
Optical signal
PDA
Signal filtering and amplification
AD collection
board
Figure 4-11 Functional diagram of preamplifier board

Description
PCB layout
The preamplifier board layout of the main board is shown below.
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 4-13

Figure 4-12 PCB layout of preamplifier board
Connectors
The pre-amplification board includes the following connectors.
Power supply:
 Power supply input connector (2): 1-pin, used to provide +12V power supplies for the preamplifier board.
 Power supply input connector (6): 1-pin, used to provide -12V power supplies for the preamplifier board.
 Power supply input connector (3): 1-pin, used to ground the preamplifier board.
 Preamplifier board signal output connector (1): 1-pin, used to transmit 1 optical/electric analog signal.
Refer to 3.7.6 Replacing Preamplifier Board.
4.4.6 Liquid Level Detection Board（LLD Board）
The BS-230 LLD board is used to sense the sample/reagent fluid level, and primarily implements the following
functions:
 Sensing the reagent/sample levels; detecting the fluid level steadily and reliably, especially allowing the
sample/reagent probe to correctly detecting the fluid level inside reaction cuvettes.
 Outputting level sense signals to the main control board when the probe contacts the fluid level.
 Detecting vertical collision, and outputting the detection signal to the main control board.
The functional diagram of the LLD board is shown below.
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 4-14

Vertical
collision
circuit
probe Capacity Connect

Main
detection CPU or
Board
chip circuit
Figure 4-13 Functional diagram of LLD board

Description
PCB layout
The top layer of the LLD board is shown below.
图 1.1 Figure 4-14 LLD board PCB

Connectors
The LLD board contains the following connectors.
Probe connector (J1): 2-pin, used for connecting the sample/reagent probe with related circuit.
Pin No. Signal
1 GND
2 Probe capacitor signal input
Power supply and signal output connector (J2): 4-pin, used to provide power supply for the LLD board and
output the level sense signal and vertical obstruction signal.
1 GND /
2 Vertical High level (about 4V) is output when no vertical
obstruction obstruction occurs, and low level (about 0V) is output
signal output when vertical obstruction happens.
3 Level sense Low level (about 0V) is output when the probe fails to
signal output detect the fluid level, and high level (about 4V) is output
when the probe detects the fluid level.
4 +12V 11.4~12.6V
Reserved port:serial port communication cable connector (J3): 3-pin, used for communication between the LLD
board and the control drive board.
Pin No. Signal
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 4-15

1 RXD
2 RST
3 TXD
Indicators
The LLD board contains the following indicators.
 Level sense indicator (D5): green.It is extinguished when the probe fails to detect the fluid level, and vice
versa.
 Vertical obstruction indicator (D1): red.It is extinguished when no vertical obstruction occurs, and vice versa.
 Level detection system working indicator (D2): yellow.When level detection system works normally, it is
flashing. If strong obstruction signal is detected, the indicator is constantly lit.
Test points
In the following positions of the LLD board can signal tests be performed.
 LEVEL: level sense signal output.Normal condition: Low level (about 0V) is output when the probe fails to
detect the fluid level, and high level (about 4V) is output when the probe detects the fluid level.
 GND: grounding terminal of the LLD board.
 5V:5V power for the level detection board. Normal range: 4.75~5.25V.
 3.3V:3.3V power for the level detection board. Normal range: 2.97~3.63V.
 RAM: vertical obstruction signal output.Normal condition: High level (about 4V) is output when no vertical
obstruction occurs, and low level (about 0V) is output when vertical obstruction happens.
Note
 Make sure that the connectors are inserted properly into the end of the slots on the PCBA.
 It requires great force to plug/unplug the connectors. Hold the PCBA by its edge while plugging/unplugging
the connectors to prevent it from being deformed or damaged.
4.4.7 Reagent Refrigeration Board

The reagent refrigeration board is relatively independent in the entire hardware system and has the following
major functions:
 Refrigeration control and drive: controlling the switch of the heatsinks and refrigerating the reagent
compartment to keep the temperature within certain range.
 Control of cooling fans and demisting.
The functional diagram of the reagent refrigeration board is shown below.
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 4-16

Temperature sen sor
Reagent
Temperature
refrigeration Refrigeration
indication 2 Pelt iers
board control circuit
circuit
2 Pelt ier radiat ing fan s
6 reserved system radiating

Voltage conversion fan s
12V circuit
1 lamp radiating fan

12VFAN
1 power drive board
rad iatin g fan
Antifogging circuit
1 reserved radiating fan
Reaction carousel fan

Photoelectric 4 reaction carousel
Main Board feedback signal
coupling temp erature c on trol fans
processing circuit
Figure 4-15 Functional diagram of reagent refrigeration board

Description
PCB layout
The PCB layout of the reagent refrigeration board is shown below.
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 4-17

Figure 4-16 Reagent refrigeration board PCB

Connectors
The reagent refrigeration board includes the following connectors.
Power supply:
Power supply input connectors (J86): providing refrigeration F12V and refrigeration B12V for the PCBAs.
Pin No. Signal Reference Description
Value
1 F12V 11.4~12.6V 12V power supply input for cooling fans.
4 GND 0
2, 3 B12V 11.4~12.6V Refrigeration power supply input: used
5, 6 FGND / for loading the corresponding Peltiers
J89_1 and J89_2.
Peltier connectors (J4-J7): providing power supply for the Peltiers.
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 4-18

Connector Pin No. Signal Reference Value

J89_1 1 1 Peltier 0V for ON and 12V for OFF.
2 12V

J89_2 1 2 Peltier 0V for ON and 12V for OFF.
2 12V
Demisting circuit connector (J15): providing power supply for the demisting heater.
J9 1 1 demisting 11.4~12.6V
2 heaters /
3 /
4 0
Reagent refrigeration fan connectors (J84, J85): providing a power supply for the reagent refrigeration 12V fan.
J84 1 GND /
2 FAN 11.4~12.6V
J85 1 GND /
2 FAN 11.4~12.6V
Temperature sensor connector (J88): checking temperature of the refrigeration compartment and refrigeration
board.
Connector Pin Signal Reference
No. Value
J88 1 GND 0V
2 Temperature sensor signal of the /
refrigeration compartment
PCBA radiating fan connector (J75): providing a 12V power supply for the PCBA radiating fan.
J75 1 GND /
2 FAN 11.4~12.6V
Whole unit radiating fan connector (J81): providing a 12V power supply for the whole unit radiating fan.
J81 1 GND /
2 FAN 11.4~12.6V
Lamp radiating fan connector (J73): providing a 12V power supply for the lamp radiating fan.
J73 1 GND /
2 FAN 11.4~12.6V
Reaction carousel constant-temperature fan connectors (J76, J77): providing a 12V power supply for the fan
that keeps temperature of the reaction carousel.
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 4-19


J76 1 GND /
2 FAN 11.4~12.6V
J77 1 GND /
2 FAN 11.4~12.6V
Indicators
The reagent refrigeration board includes the following indicators.
Power supply:
No. Description Color Introduction
D45 C24V Green When it is lit, it indicates that the power supply works normally.
D48 VCC Green When it is lit, it indicates that the power supply works normally.
D47 B12V Green When it is lit, it indicates that the power supply works normally.
D49 VDD Green When it is lit, it indicates that the power supply works normally.
D46 F12V Green When it is lit, it indicates that the power supply works normally.
Indicators to indicate PCBA functions:
No. Description Color Introduction
D15 Fan power supply indicator Green When it is lit, it indicates that the
refrigeration board is working.
D3 Refrigeration power supply Green When it is lit, it indicates that the
indicator refrigeration board is working.
D4 Indicating the reagent Red When the reagent compartment
compartment temperature temperature exceeds the high limit
D6 Indicating the reagent Green When the reagent compartment
compartment temperature temperature is within the target range
D5 Indicating the reagent Yellow When the reagent compartment
compartment temperature temperature is lower than the low limit
D7 Indicating status of the peltier Green When it is lit, it indicates that the peltier is
working.
NOTE:
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 4-20

4.5 Power Supply System

4.5.1 Power Supply System of Whole Unit
Connected
E yellow to housing Analyzer Switch
green Main Power Switch
L brown L brown L
Power jack Power
N light blue N light blue supply
N
board
Figure 4-17 Power supply system of the whole unit
Power Supply System

The power supply board, as the major part of the entire power supply system, provides power supply for the
lamp, DC power supply for major control boards, and power supply for refrigeration modules. For details, see
the figure below:
A12V/2A Lamp
5V Analog +/-12V Analog +/-12V

Power supply board
Analog Power
5V/4A AD collection Preamplifier
Main Board Supply C onversion
board board
Board
12V/5A
Power drive board
24V/6A
ISE Pow er Board ISE module
12V/11A
Reagent
refrigeration
board
Figure 4-18 Power Supply System

4.5.2 Performance Indices
Power supply input
 AC voltage input: 220-230V, 220/230V, and 110/115V.
 AC voltage frequency: 50/60±1Hz
 AC input power: 1KVA
Power supply output
No Name Rated Output Usage Control Description
1 5V 5V/4A 5V digital Controlled by analyzer power switch
2 12V 12V/2A Lamp Controlled by operating software
3 12V 12V/11A Reagent refrigeration Controlled by main power switch
4 12V 12V/5A 12V drive Controlled by analyzer power switch
5 24V 24V/6A 24V drive and heater Controlled by analyzer power switch
NOTE:
 Control by operating software means that the lamp voltage is controlled by the operating software while
the main power switch and analyzer power switch are turned on.
 Control by analyzer power switch means that the power supply is controlled by the analyzer power switch
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 4-21

with the prerequisite that the main power switch is turned on.
 Control by main power switch means that the power supply works normally when the analyzer power switch
is turned on, and vice versa.
4.5.3 Power supply board
Functions and principles are described below.
The PCB layout of the power supply board is shown below.
Figure 4-19 Layout of power supply board

Indication of voltage outputs:
LED Indication Status Controlled By
L12V When L12V is lit, it indicates that the Controlled by operating
lamp outputs a 12V power. software
D5V When D5V is lit, it indicates that the Controlled by analyzer
PCBA outputs a 5V power. power switch
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 4-22

B12V When B12V is lit, it indicates that the Controlled by main

reagent refrigerator outputs a 12V power switch
power.
P12V When P12V is lit, it indicates that the Controlled by analyzer
lamp outputs a 12V power. power switch
P24V When P24V is lit, it indicates that the Controlled by analyzer
PCBA outputs a 24V power. power switch
NOTE:
 Control by operating software means that the lamp is controlled by the operating software while the main
power switch and analyzer power switch are turned on.
 Control by analyzer power switch means that the power supply is controlled by the analyzer power switch
with the prerequisite that the main power switch is turned on.
 Control by main power switch means that the power supply works normally when the analyzer power switch
is turned on, and vice versa
Output connectors:
No. Pins Output Description
J1 1 AC input L
3 AC input N
J2 1 12VOUT
2 Analyzer Switch
3 Ground (Analyzer Switch)
J3 1
12
2
5
3 Upper heater of reaction carousel (220V)
10
7 Lower heater of reaction carousel (220V)
9
4 /
6 /
8 /
11 /
J4 1 Lamp ground
2 Ground
3 Ground
4 Ground
5 Ground
6 Ground
7 Ground
8 Ground
9 Ground
10 Ground
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 4-23

No. Pins Output Description

11 12V output of lamp
12 12V output of reagent refrigeration
13 12V output of reagent refrigeration
14 24V output of driving
19 5V output
20 5V output
J5 1 Control input of deionized water heater
2 Control input of wash solution heater
3 Control input of reaction carousel heater
4 Ground
5 Control input of inlet valve
6 Ground
7 Control input of dispense valve
8 Ground
9 Reserved
10 Ground
11 Lamp control input
12 Ground

1) Turn off main switch and remove the back cover.
2) Remove 4 screws of disassemble Power Box,then Pull out top cover.
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 4-24

4 screws
Top cover
Figure 4-20 Replacing power board 1

3) Draw out 10cm and disconnect AC 110/220 cable.
4) Rotate power box 90 degrees clockwise. Disconnect all cables left.
AC
110/220
cable
cables
Figure 4-21 Replacing power board 2
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 4-25

NOTE:
4.5.4 Replacing Power switch

Replacing Main Power Switch
1) Turn off the power, remove the cable, and remove the back cover of the instrument
2) Disassemble the two screws on the fixing bracket shown in the figure below.
Figure 4-22 Main Power Switch position

3) Disconnect the power cord from the main power switch. Note that the line and switch are marked. To
avoid errors, it is recommended to take a picture.
4) Replace the main power switch.
5) Connect the wire, pay attention to the corresponding, the cables can not be connected wrong, the joint
should be tightly inserted, can not be loose. If the metal piece is loose, refer to the middle picture in
the figure below and squeeze the metal piece slightly.
6) Connect the power cord and turn on the main power switch.
7) After the power-on test is normal (the main switch will light), restore and replace the bracket and the
rear case.
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 4-26

Figure 4-23 Replace the main power switch
Replacing rocker switch

1) Turn off the power.
2) Remove the left side panel.
Figure 4-24 rocker switch Position

3) Remove the two screws that secure the switch support plate . Take the picture for the switch wiring.
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 4-27

Figure 4-25 The rocker switch wiring

4) Remove the rocker switch wiring.
5) Remove the switch from the bracket and replace it with a new one.
6) Wiring in order, note: there are corresponding signs on the wire and switch (1a, 1b, etc.), please
connect accordingly, and compare according to the picture, not connected.
7) Replace the bracket.
8) After the power-on test is normal (the switch will light),replacing the shell.
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 4-28

4.6 Wiring Diagram of Analyzer

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Cables from power jack
protection switch on
Heater temperature
Heater temperature
Heater on reaction
protection switch
reaction carousel
reaction carousel
to pow er switch
under reaction
Heater under
E yell ow green
carousel
carousel
Housing ground
Main Power
Power jack Switch
M07-00061S---
D
Main control board N light blue D
Main control board control signal L brown

J16 cable J5
12
2
5
J3
10
5 bl ue
7
9
1 PV1CTRL 1 2 3 4 5 6
2 PV2CTRL 7 bl ack 5 1
1
J14
3 PV3CTRL 9 yellow
6 2 J1
3
4 GND 4 red 1 brown L

1
5
7 3
5 220VCTRL1 1 bl ue
AC power supply cables from
7
6 220VCTRL2 2 bl ack 8 4 2 power switch to PFC board

and 24V board
34
33
7 GND 6 yellow
9 10 3 3 light blue N
8 220VCTRL3 3 red
15 GND 8 yellow 11 12
20 GND 10 red
9 LAMPCTRL 11 yellow
12 GND 12 bl ack J4
Main control board

12V&5V power cord
J2 12GND 6 8 bl ue 11 1 Power supply board
4 1 GND 4 10 bl ack
12V 3 18 yellow
C 5 2 C
5V 1 20 red
6 3 12 2 1 1 12Vout NO
Drive board power cord J2 2
Power drive board BA10-20-78108
3 3 bl ue C
13 3
5V 3 19 red
J17
GND 7 9 bl ack + Analyzer Switch
2 6
12V 4 17 yellow
14 4
12GND 8 7 bl ue
1 5 2 bl ack GND
24V 1 15 orange
3 4 24V 2 14 orange 15 5
GND 6 5 white
8 GND 5 4 white
7
16 6
Refrigeration board 12V

power patch cord Refrigeration board 12V power cord
17 7
J86
6 B12V 3 12 yellow
5 B12V 2 13 yellow B
B 18 8
4 GND 6 3 bl ue
GND 5 2 bl ue
3
GND 4 6 white 19 9
2
C12V 1 16 orange
1
ISE power supply PCBA

ISE module
3 yellow 12V
1 24V 3
1
2 GND 2
2 1 bl ue GND
1
J1 J2
M32: lamp 20 10
1 bl ack
MINDRAY
2 bl ack
12VGND
11 red
1 red
LAMP12V A
A
Power Supply System Cabling
TITLE: Diagram
File: Bytes:
DWG NO. REV 1.1

Date: Time:
Software & Rev: Microsoft office Visio 2003 SHEET 2 OF 9 SIZE A4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 4-29

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
C31: Sample probe
PROBE
1 bl ack GND
2 red
D
D
Sam ple probe level
BA30-20-06546
detection cable
Power supply board
1 bl ack
J5
2 red
J4
BNC
Power drive
J66 1 2
Dionized water blank sensor
board
J20
(Sample probe) level
sense board PCBA
11
18 17
28 27
31
38 37
42 41
22 21
48 47
14 13
16 15
20 19
24 23
26 25
30 29
34 33
36 35
40 39
44 43
46 45
50 49
1
2 bl ack
5 yellow
4 red
3 bl ue
8 yellow
7 yellow
J65
6 red
8 yellow
11 red
9 bl ue
11 red
3 yellow
1 bl ue
4 red
2 bl ack
12
32
2
4
1 2 3 4
Main control board control signal

Cables from m ain control board to
4 NC
5 NC
7 NC
2 NC
3 NC
6 NC
22
44
1
12V&5V power cord

Main control board
power drive board
40 DIR_ RESERVED_MOTOR3
39 CLK_RESERVED_MOTOR3
cable
31 DIR_ RESERVED_MOTOR2
27 DIR_RESERVED_MOTOR1
11 VALVE_WASH_INJECT1
12 VALVE_WASH_INJECT2
38 DIR_ SYR_MOTOR2
36 DIR_ SYR_MOTOR1
37 CLK_SYR_MOTOR2
35 CLK_SYR_MOTOR1
16 PWR_PV_WASH1
17 PWR_PV_WASH2
10 PUMP_FILL_OUT
13 PREHEAT_REAG
25 CLK_ WASH_UP
24 DIR_WASH_UP
44 DIR_ FILL _UP

45 CLK_FILL_SYR
9 VAVLE_FILL_IN
43 CLK_FILL_UP
8 PUMP_FILL_IN
46 DIR_FILL_SYR
32 CLK_STIR_UP
33 DIR_STIR_UP
15 LAMP_CTRL
41 CLK_FILL_R
42 DIR_FILL_R
23 DIR_ STIR_R
5 220VCTRL1
6 220VCTRL2
8 220VCTRL3
22 CLK_STIR_R
28 CLK_FILL_T
29 DIR_FIIL_T
20 REAC-CLK
21 REAC-DIR
4 red LEVEL2
14 STIR_DC
3 PV3CTRL
2 PV2CTRL
1 PV1CTRL
18 RELAY_T
3 bl ue GND
6 12GND
4 GND
19 GND
34 GND
47 GND
4 GND
1 VCC
3 12V
7 GND
50 VCC
48 VCC
49 VCC
33 5V
34 5V
33 5V
1 GND
34 5V
4 NC
5 NC
7 NC
3 NC
6 NC
2 NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
22
44
NC
NC
3
J14 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4
4
6
5
11
18 17
28 27
31
38 37
42 41
22 21
48 47
14 13
16 15
20 19
24 23
26 25
30 29
34 33
36 35
40 39
44 43
46 45
50 49
2 4 6
1
9
8 34
J1
J16
C 12 C
32
1 3 5 33
2
1
3
2
J11
J2
Main board
J39
J5 J6 J7
13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
J23 J22 J21
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 20 22 24 26 2 4 6 8 J18
18 28 30 32 34 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 2 4 6 8 2 4 6 8 10
J12 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 J13 13 15 19 23 25 27 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14
1 3 5 7 9 11 17 21 29 31 33 1 3 5 7 1 3 5 7 1 3 5 7 9
3 2 1
3
2 bl ack
3 red
Reagent preheating sensor patch

Cable 1 from main control board to Cable 2 from main control board to
3 PRTD_T1
Patch cord from main control board to ISE
2 PRTD_REF
position sensor position sensor PC communications
module
Reaction carousel temperature

1 red VCC 1 patch cord
+ 4 white PHO_REAC_T 2 1 red VCC 1
C13: reaction carousel C 2 bl ack C16:sample/reagent +
GND 3 4 white PHO_FILL_T 2 1 NC NC 1
home position sensor - carousel C
3 green GND 4 2 bl ack GND 3 PC COM
sensor cable
- Cable between m ain control board
cord
E home position sensor 3 RXD 2
1 red VCC 5 E 3 green GND 4 1 and AD board
+ 1 red VCC
4 white PHO_REAC_TC 6 + 5 2 TXD 3 NC
Reaction Carousel Coder C C15:sample/reagent 4 white PHO_FILL_TC
- 2 bl ack GND 7 C 6 2
Sensor carousel 4 NC NC 4
3 green GND 8 - 2 bl ack GND 7 RXD232
E 1 VCC Red 1
1 red VCC 9 coder sensor 3 green GND 8 ISE module 5 GND 5 3
Black1
+ E
Red 2
4 whitePHO_FILTER_MOTOR 10 1 red VCC 9 TXD232
10 DCP_CLK
+
Black
C
11 DCP_DIN
2 RXD Green 3
18 AD_BUSY
Red
C40: filter wheel PHO_WASH_UP 6 NC NC 6
19 AD_CLK
2 bl ack GND 11 4 white 10
9 DCP_EN
4
6 AD_DIN
- C
20 AD_RC
22 CH_A2
23 CH_A1
24 CH_A0
home position sensor B
21 CH_A3
17 15GND
3 TXD Blue 2
4 15GND
B E 3 green GND 12 Standby - 2 bl ack GND 11 8 RTS 7 NC
14 +15V
12 GND
25 GND
13 GND
1 +15V
5 GND
15 -15V
1 red VCC
16 VCC
7 GND
8 GND
2 -15V
13 3 green 12
3 VCC
+ E GND 5 GND Black 4 5
C18: sample vertical 4 white PHO_FILL_UP 14 1 red VCC 13 7 CTS 8
C + GND
movement motor 4 white PHO_WASH_SUCKSYR 14 6 RTS White 10
- 2 bl ack GND 15
Preheating Sensor
C 9 NC 6 temperature sensor
Standby 2 bl ack GND 15
Reagent bar code reader
home position sensor E 3 green GND 16
M29: Reagent
- 7 CTS Yel low 6 NC carousel
1 red VCC 17 E 3 green GND 16
C17: sample probe rotation + 4 white PHO_FILL_R 7 C29: reaction
18 1 red VCC 17 8 TRIG Orange 9
motor C + ISP_RESET
- 2 bl ack GND 19 Cuvette wash station 4 white PHO_WASH_EJECT 18
home position sensor C 9 NC NC 5 8 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
E 3 green GND 20 anti-collision - 2 bl ack GND P1
1 red VCC 21 3 green GND 20 NC 7 NC
+ E 4 NC
C19: sample syringe m otor C 4 white PHO_FILL_SYR 22 1 red VCC 21 9
+ NC 8
home position sensor 2 bl ack GND 23 4 white PHO_RESERVED1 22 NC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
- Wash Station Hom e Position C
3 green GND 24 - 2 bl ack GND 23 NC 11 10
E
VCC 25 E 3 green GND 24 NC
+ NC 12
C28: mixer vertical 4 white PHO_STIR_UP 26 + VCC 25 AD collection board BA10-30-77759
C SHIELD
- 2 bl ack 27 4 white PHO_RESERVED2 26
syring
GND
water
NC 13
positi
home
Dioni
movement motor C
zed
on
3 green 28 2 bl ack GND 27

e
home position sensor E GND -

1 red VCC 29 3 green GND 28 NC 14
+ E
C27: mixer rotation motor 4 white PHO_STIR_R 30 1 red VCC 29
C + NC 15
home position sensor 2 bl ack GND 31 Wash Solution Syringe 4 white PHO_RESERVED3 30
- C
2 bl ack GND 31
E 3 green GND 32 Home Position -
33 NC E 3 green GND 32
34 NC 33 NC
34 NC
MINDRAY
A A
TITLE: Main board cabling diagram
File: Bytes:
DWG NO. BA10 REV 1.1
Date: Time:
SHEET 3 OF 9 SIZE A2
Software & Rev: Microsoft office Visio 2003
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 4-30

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1
1
2
2
1
M19: Mixer DC motor
preheating block
P01: interior pump

M29: Reagent
Power supply board
SV01
P02
J4
D D
- +
Power drive board pow er cord

2 white
1 white
4 orange
3 orange
2 bl ack
2
1 bl ue
4 red
1
1
3 yellow
2
Patch cord from drive board

Patch cord from drive board
to preheater
to mixer motor
24V 1
24V 2
12V 4
12GND 8
VCC 3
GND 5
GND 6
GND 7
1 black
yellow
5 blue
6 red
2 red
4 red
3
2 red
1 blue
1 blue
2 red
Syringe motor cabl e 1 2 1 2 7 5 3 1 7 5 3 1 1 2 3 4
6 white 4 white 8 6 4 2 8 6 4 2 J17 8

6 5 6 7
1
J22 J24
4 4 yellow 3 yellow J9 J6 Cables from main control board to

1 2
2
power board
DGND 12V
1 2
GND 24V
GND 24V
Bla
ck
GND 5V
J8
3 3 blue 2 blue 3 3 4
R
d
2 e
1 GND 1GND
3 4
1
1 1 red 1 red 2 NC 2 NC 5 6
3 NC 3 NC
4
Reagent probe vertical 5 6 4 NC 4 NC 7 8

movement motor cable 5 NC 5 NC
C 7 8 6 NC 6 NC C
6 white 4 white 7 NC 7 NC 9 4
1
6
9 4 8 PUMP_FILL_IN 8
4 yellow 3 yellow 9 VAVLE_FILL_IN 9 11 12
4
2
10 PUMP_FILL_OUT 10
J13
11 12 11 VALVE_WASH_INJECT1 11 13 14
3 3 blue 2 blue 12 VALVE_WASH_INJECT2 12
3
13 14 13 PREHEAT_REAG 13
14 STIR_DC 14 15 16
1 red 1 red 15 LAMP_CTRL 15
1 15 16
4
16 CLK_WASH_SYR 37 17 18
17 DIR_WASH_SYR 38
Filter wheel motor 17 18 18 RELAY_T 18 19 20
patch cord 19 GND 19
19 20 20 REAC-CLK 20 J40
6 white 00 4 white 21 22
1
Main control board

6 Power drive board 21 REAC-DIR 21
21 22 22 CLK_STIR_R 22
5 yellow 3 yellow 23 DIR_ STIR_R 23 23 24
4
2
J20 23 24 24 CLK_RESERVED_MOTOR1 24
25 DIR_RESERVED_MOTOR1 25 25 26
J7
3 2 blue 2 blue 26 CLK_WASH_UP 26

25 26
3
27 DIR_WASH_UP 27 27 28
1 red 28 CLK_FILL_T 28
1 1 red 27 28 29 DIR_FIIL_T 29
4
30 CLK_RESERVED_MOTOR2 30 29 30
Reagent probe rotation motor 29 30 31 DIR_ RESERVED_MOTOR2 31
cable 32 CLK_STIR_UP 32 31 32
6 white 4 white 31 32 33 DIR_STIR_UP 33
1
6 34 GND 34 33 34
35 CLK_SYR_MOTOR1 35
4 yellow 3 yellow 33 34 36 DIR_ SYR_MOTOR1 36
4 35 36
2
37 CLK_RESERVED_MOTO4 16
J5
3 blue 35 36 38 DIR_RESERVED_MOTO4 17
3 2 blue 39 CLK_RESERVED_MOTOR3 39 37 38
3
37 38 40 DIR_ RESERVED_MOTOR3 40
1 1 red 1 red 41 CLK_FILL_R 41 39 40 B
B 42 DIR_FILL_R 42
4
39 40 43 CLK_FILL_UP 43
44 DIR_ FILL _UP 44 41 42
Exterior Wash Syringe 41 42 45 CLK_FILL_SYR 45
46 DIR_FILL_SYR 46 43 44
6 white 4 white
1
6 43 44 47 GND 47
48 VCC 48 45 46
4 yellow 3 yellow 49 VCC 49
45 46
2
4 50 VCC
J11
47 48
3 3 blue 2 blue 47 48
3
49 50
1 red 49 50
1 1 red
4
J12 J15 J4 J10 J16 J14
4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1
Reagent carousel motor cable
3 yellow
3 yellow
4 white
3 yellow
4 white
3 yellow
4 white
4 white
3 yellow
4 white
3 yellow
2 blue
2 blue
4 white
1 red
2 blue
1 red
2 blue
2 blue
1 red
1 red
movement motor cable

2 blue
1 red
Wash solution syringe
1 red
Reaction carousel
motor patch cord
Mixer rotation
Mixer vertical
motor cable
motor cable
station motor
Cuvette wash
MINDRAY
4 yellow
6 white
4 yellow
4 yellow
4 yellow
4 yellow
3 blue
6 white
6 white
6 white
4 yellow
1 red
6 white
6 white
3 blue
3 blue
3 blue
1 red
1 red
1 red
3 blue
1 red
3 blue
1 red
A A
6
1
3
6
3
6
1
TITLE:
1
Power drive board connection diagram
File: Bytes:
DWG NO. BA23 REV 1
Date: Time:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 4-31

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
D D
Preamplifier board
BA10-30-77760
AGND_SHILED
340nm
AGND
AGND
+15V
-15V
6
1
2
3
4
5
preamplifier board
collection board to
Cables from AD
C C
2 4 6
J1
1 3 5
AD collection board
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
P1
1 2 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
3
B B
Cable between main board and AD

board
10 DCP_CLK
18 AD_BUSY
11 DCP_DIN
19 AD_CLK
9 DCP_EN
6 AD_DIN
20 AD_RC
22 CH_A2
23 CH_A1
24 CH_A0
17 15GND
21 CH_A3
4 15GND
14 +15V
12 GND
25 GND
13 GND
1 +15V
5 GND
15 -15V
16 VCC
7 GND
8 GND
2 -15V
3 VCC
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
J39
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
A
Main Board MINDRAY A
TITLE: AD collection board cabling diagram
File： Bytes：
DWG NO. BA10 REV 1.1
Date： Time：
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 4-32

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
M42-M43: refrigeration 92 fan

C35: reagent refrigeration temperature
sensor
D Demisting D
Demisting temperatur
GND
GND
GND
12V
12V
12V
Reagent refrig eration temperature sensor patch
GND
heater e protection
Reagent refrig eration/radiating fan cable

12V
sw itch
Rear panel fan patch cord
Demisting heater cable

reserved
cord
1 GND
4 +5V
2 12V
2 12V
2 12V
1 GND
1 GND
1 GND
3
J88 1 2 J81 1 2 J79 1 2 J80 1 2 J78 1 2 J82 1 2 J83 1 2 J84 1 2 J85 1 2 1 2 3 4
J15
J89 Power supply board
J86
PELTIER cable 1 J4
6 1
C 1 12V bl ue C
12V 1
1 4 5 2 4 1
12VFANGNDFAN
bl ue
M30-M31:PELTIER
2 3
GND 2 COOLER 4 whit
Reagent 2 5
12V GND e
PELTIER cable 2 refrigeration 4 5 2
1 board 3 yello
12V 3 6 w
12V 12V GND 5
1 2 yello
2 w
GND 6 6 3
COOLER 1 oran
2
ge

power patch cord
power cord
J74 1 2 3 J73 1 2 3 1 2 3 J71 1 2 3 J75 1 2 J76 1 2 J77 1 2 J87 1 2 3

J72
Temperature control chamber fan patch cord
2 12V
1 GND
1 GND
1 GND
2 12V
2 12V
FAN3
Lamp box radiating fan patch cord
refrigeration board and

GNDFAN
Cable between reagent

12VFAN
B B
PCB fan
12V
12V
GND
GND
12V
12V
GND
12V
12V
GND
GND
GND
FAN
Temperature control chamber fan cable

Power drive board
radiating fan
A
MINDRAY A
TITLE: Reagent refrigeration board cabling diagram
File: Bytes:
DWG NO. A-BA20-30-75232 REV 1.1
Date: Time:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 4-33

5 Fluidic system
5.1 Overview
The major function of the fluidic system is:
 To provide deionized water for washing interior/exterior of probes and mixers via the water supply unit.
 To provide the whole unit with deionized water via the deionized water tank and to discharge waste liquid
via the drainage module.
This chapter describes the working principles and repairing methods of the BS-230's hydropneumatic system.
5.2 Fluidic Diagram
See A.7 Fluidic Diagram.
5.3 Principles of Hydropneumatic System
The hydropneumatic system is composed of the probe wash module and water supply/drainage module. See
the figures below:
Hydropneumatic
System
Probe and Mixer Inlet/outlet

Wash Module module
Waste drainage
Mixer cleaning
Probe Wash
Inlet
Figure 5-1 Principles of Hydropneumatic System

5.3.1 Probe wash module
The probe/mixer wash module consists of: 1 probe, 1 mixer, 1 syringe, and 2 diaphragm pump. The sample
syringe SY01 is 500μl. The probe and mixer exterior are washed by the diaphragm pump P02. The probe interior
is washed by the diaphragm pump P01.
This module is used for fixed-quantity sampling and probe/mixer cleaning.
 Fixed-quantity sampling is realized through cooperation of the syringe SY01, and the sample probe NS
with the aim of delivering fixed-quantity reagent and sample.
 The sample probe interior is washed by a diaphragm pump P01,with SV01.
 The probe and the mixer exterior are washed by a diaphragm pump P02. The T piece connector for wash
tube sample is divided into two parts and the flow is controlled by thin tubes. A check valve is used at the
diaphragm pump inlet to restrict the flow.
The schematic diagram of the probe wash module is shown below.

SV01 T105
D05 T104 D06
T106
T102 T103
SY01 MIX
NS
D19
D18
T204
D04
D17
T203
D16
T202
P01 D15
P02
D14
D03
CV1
D13
Panel
D02 T101
T201
D12
Figure 5-2 Schematic diagram of probe wash module
5.3.2 Water Supply/Drainage Module

The water supply/drainage module includes the water supply part and waste drainage part.
Inlet deionized water is provided from the outside of the instrument, and is conveyed by the interior wash pump
and the exterior wash pump to other modules. as detailed below:
 detecting deficient fluid level of dionized water, and alarming.
 filtering deionized water, and performing filtering before the inlet deionized water outside the whole unit is
distributed to each unit.
The liquid waste is discharged to the external waste tank under the action of gravity.
Waste comes from the following sources:
 Cleaning interior/exterior of sample probe and reagent probes
 Cleaning exterior of sample mixer and reagent mixer
 Condensate water of the reagent carousels
 Overflowed fluid of the reaction carousel
The first two are the major sources and account for over 99% of low-concentration waste.
The fluidic diagram of the module is shown below.

T106 Reagent carousel

MIX
NS
W23
W12
T303
W11
W22
W21
T302
W02
Panel
D02 T101 T301
T201 W01
D12
FL01
D01 D11
FL02
FS01 V02
V01
Figure 5-3 Schematic diagram of cuvette wash unit
5.3.3 Interfaces for fluid connection

The Hydropneumatic system of BS-230 contains 4 external interfaces, as shown in the figure below:
1) Fluidic outlets: used for discharging waste.
2) Fluidic inlets: used for supplying deionized water used for interior wash and the cleaning of the exterior of
probe and mixer.
3) Control cable connector: used for connecting the DI water level sensor.

Interfaces for fluid connection
No Name
1 Dionized water sensor
2 Deionized water 1
3 Deionized water 2
4 Low-concentration waste
3 4
Waste
Legend
Water Sensor
1 2
Figure 5-4 External fluidic interfaces of the instrument
5.4 Introduction of Fluidic Actions

5.4.1 Fluidic Initialization
The specific procedure is described below:
 Power off all the pump and valve and they return to the home position.
 The floater status of the deionized water tank is checked. If related alarm is removed, the system
moves to the next step. If not, the system gives out the alarm and the fluidic initialization fails.
 Cleaning Probe/Mixer Exterior is performed.
NOTE:
The fluidic initialization is one part of the startup , system recovery and system wakeup procedure.
5.5 Removing and Reinstalling Hydropneumatic Components
This section describes removing and installation methods of the Hydropneumatic components, and provides
schematic diagrams and pictures of components for service engineers to refer.
5.5.1 Overview
When an alarm is displayed on the operating software of BS-230, service engineers can analyze the instrument
status and finally locate the failure source, and if necessary, replace the failed part or component. Generally,
service engineers are not recommended to remove the electric devices, such as pumps, solenoid valves,
syringes, etc. Only when both hardware and software are confirmed normal but the Hydropneumatic alarm still
remains are service engineers suggested to remove the relevant device and then analyze or replace it.
Prior to removing Hydropneumatic components, make sure that all pumps and solenoid valves of the
Hydropneumatic system have been turned off, and both the analyzer power switch and main power switch have
been placed to the OFF position.
Table 5-1 Necessary tools for removing/installing Hydropneumatic components
Name Quantity
Cross screwdriver 1
Hexagon screwdriver 1
Flathead screwdriver 1
Cable tie Several

Diagonal pliers 1
Tube cutter 1
5.5.2 Probe and mixer wash module
Sample probe 500μl syringe Mixer
Probe wash well
Mixer wash well
Figure 5-5 Assembly drawing of whole unit -- Probe and mixer wash module-front view

Probes/Mixers exterior wash
Probe interior
cleaning valve
Probes Interior
wash pump
Figure 5-6 Assembly drawing of whole unit -- Probe wash module-rear view
No. Part No. Part Name Remarks
1 801-BA23- Syringe 500ul(ZDV) FRU
00025-00
2 082-002435-00 Two-position two-way valve FRU/probe interior
wash valve
3 BA30-21-15311 KNF diaphragm pump assembly FRU/probe interior
wash pump
4 2000-21-06116 Rotational diaphragm pump assembly FRU/probe exterior
wash pump
5 M6Y-020003--- Liquid valve. duckbill check valve FRU /check valve
1/8"X1/8"
6 M6G-020049--- Plastic FRU
tube.PTFEID1.5mmXOD2.5mmX100M
7 0040-10-32301 Rubber hose .PTFE,0.040"IDX0.066"OD FRU
8 082-002374-00 Rubber hose 0.30.2*6.4mm TPU FRU
polyether
9 082-002375-00 Rubber hose .1.6*3.2mm TPU polyether FRU
10 801-BA40- Wash well (mould MR61463) FRU
00221-00
Removing/Installing Probe Syringe Assembly

When to do
Analyze or replace the wash syringe when it has abnormal sound, worse precision, leaking, or other failures.
How to do

2) Open the rear panel.

3) Remove the 4 M4×8 cross pan head screws used to fix the syringe shield and remove the shield.
4) Disconnect the syringe motor cable and sensor cable.
5) Remove the tube from the barbed connector of the syringe.
6) Remove the four M3×12 hexagon socket head cap screws with spring washer and remove the syringe.
Installation Procedure
1) Install the 4 M3×12 hexagon socket head cap screws with spring washer and do not miss the shock
pad .
2) Cut off a little from the tube's end and insert the tube to the barbed connector of the syringe. If a strap
has been applied, restore it.
3) Connect the syringe motor cable and sensor cable.
4) Use 4 M4×8 cross pan head screws to fix the syringe shield on the right side plate.
5) Power on the analyzer, log on the software with service user account, and then select Utility ->
Maintenance -> Maintenance -> Engineer -> Clear. If the interior wash syringe is replaced, select
the "Replace Interior Wash Syringe" item. If the cuvette wash syringe is replaced, select the "Replace
Cuvette Wash Syringe" item. Click OK to zero the use count of the relevant syringe.
Right baffle weld (BA49)
Wash Syringe Assembly

115-013114-00
Syringe dust shield
M3×12 hexagon socket cap head

screw, with spring/flat washer
Figure 5-7 Replacing Probe syringe Assembly
Removing/Installing Solenoid Valves

When to do
When a solenoid valve cannot be turned on or has leaks, it needs to be removed and then analyzed or replaced.
Removing Steps
3) Disconnect the solenoid valve’s power cord connector.
4) Mark the installation direction of the valve and the connection mode of the inlet and outlet tubes to
prevent them from being confused.
5) Remove the tubes and apply strap on their openings to prevent liquid spraying.
6) Loosen the screws on the solenoid valve and then remove the solenoid valve.
1) Check the installation direction according to the marks, connect the inlet and outlet tubes, and then
tighten the tube clamps or straps.
2) Tighten the retaining screws to fix the solenoid valve.
3) Make sure that the power cord is connected to the correct positive and negative ends.
Verification steps
Refer to 7.8 Hydro Unit.

Interior cleaning valve
Figure 5-8 Details of wash solenoid valve assembly
Note
 The tubes must be connected in correct order otherwise the analyzer may not work normally. Do not
confuse the inlet tube with the outlet tube.
 Take caution not to spill the liquid onto other parts.
 The positive and negative of the cable of the solenoid valve must be correctly connected.
 After replacement or reparation, conduct fluidic prime in case the air bubbles in the tube affect the
performance of the analyzer.
Replacing interior/Exterior wash pump

When to do
The pump does not work, that is, there is no flow or pressure.
The pump flow and pressure is low.
The pump has leaks.
Noise is produced when the pump is working.
Removing Steps
3) Disconnect the pump’s power cord connector.
4) Mark the connection mode of the inlet and outlet tubes and prevent them from being confused.
5) Remove the tubes and apply straps on their openings or use a tank to hold water, so as to prevent
liquid from entering the instrument.
6) Loosen the screws fixing the pump and then remove the pump.
1) Connect the inlet and outlet tubes according to the marks and then tighten the tube clamps.
2) Tighten the retaining screws to fix the pump.
3) Make sure that the power cord is connected correctly.
Verification steps
Note
 The tubes must be connected in correct order otherwise the analyzer may not work normally. Take caution

not to spill the liquid onto other parts.

 Make sure that the power cord of the pump is connected to the correct positive and negative ends. After
replacement or reparation, conduct fluidic prime in case the air bubbles in the tube affect the performance
of the analyzer.
Interior Wash Pump Probe Exterior Wash
Figure 5-9 Structure of pump
Removing/Reinstalling Filter
When to do
 The filter used for more than 1 year or it has damaged.
Removing Steps
1) There are two filter respectively on the cleaning fluid . The filters are installed on the tubes between
the fluidic interfaces and the DI water tank.
2) Disconnect the tubes at the two ends of the filter and remove the filter.
1) Install the new filter and fix it with clamp or cable tie. For the severely twisted tube, cut about 5mm off
its end. Make sure the tubes are tightly connected to the deep of the connector.
2) After the filter is replaced, prime it first otherwise the instrument may not work normally.
Verification steps
Figure 5-10 Assembly drawing of whole unit -- Acetabular filter

Removing and Reinstalling Restrictive Tube

When to do
When the probe and mixer exterior wash flow decreases, the restrictive tube may be clogged. Remove the
restrictive tube for analysis or replacement.
Disassembling Steps
1) Check the connecting position of the restrictive tube, and mark its inlet and outlet to avoid confusion.
2) Remove one end of the restrictive tube and collect the residual water with a container.
3) Unplug the other end of the restrictive tube and remove the tube mark on it.
1) Cut off a section of restrictive tube (082-002375-00) for the same length as the old one.
2) Sleeve the tube mark and install the restrictive tube in the original position.
D19
D18
T204
D17
T203
D16
T202
D15
P02
Verification steps
Note
 When removing or installing the restrictive tube, prevent misconnection and do not pull or bend it too much.
5.5.3 External Modules

Cap assembly of DI water tank
The cap assembly of external DI water tank contains one FRU.
Table 5-3 Cap assembly of DI water tank FRU

1 115-037347-00 washing barrel cap module
15L water tank

The waste tank and DI water tank contains one FRU.
Table 5-4 15L water tank FRU

1 043-000491-00 15L water tank 15L
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 5-10

6 Software
6.1 Software Installation
6.1.1 Introduction of Installation Package
The installation package of the operating software contains three folders: Setup, SetupGuide, and Thirdparty.
Figure 6-1 Folders in operating software installation package

Setup folder: includes the operating software installation file setup.exe and the KillBsLog tool that can end the
Bslog service.
Figure 6-2 Setup folder

Bslog: a service run automatically when the operating software is started, and used to record the logs of the
software. When started, the software checks if the service is started, and if it is not started, the software gives
an alarm indicating startup failure. When logging on the software, you are allowed to end this process, and this
action will not be recorded in the logs.
SetupGuide folder: includes the software installation and upgrading guide.
Thirdparty folder: includes dotnetfx and SQLExp installation packages. The former contains the installation
program of Microsoft .net Framework and is the running environment assembly of SQL; while the latter is
database software.
6.1.2 Analyzer Software Version Information
The software version can be viewed from the software package. Open the Setup folder in the software package,
right-click the ModVersion.dll file to select Properties, and view the software version in Version of the Details
tab page.

Figure 6-3 View Software Version
6.1.3 Folder Structure

The default installation path of the operating software is: D:\Mindray\BS230
After installation, the folder structure is like the following:
Figure 6-4 BS-230 folder

The OperationSoft folder is relatively important and expanded as follows:

Figure 6-5 OperationSoft folder

Important folders include:
AbsData stores reaction curve files.
AlarmFile stores alarm log messages.
Database database file, which contains all parameters, test results,
calibration and QC data, etc.
BA80_DATA.MDF:database storage file
BA80_LOG.LDF: database boot file
The Backup folder contains BA80.bak, a database backup,see
Figure 6-37 Database location
ExceptionLog records address segment for error analysis when the software
collapses abnormally. (Note: There are two ExceptLog files, and the
other one is in Instrument_1 folder.)
Help online help in .chm format.
Instrument_1 log file.
PrintTemplate Print template
Item Mindray's chemistry parameter file.
Language Software Language
6.1.4 Log Files

The BsLog process records in real-time mode the communication and action information of the software and
analyzer, which includes but not limited to the following:
 Keyboard input
 Error log, operation log and maintenance log of the software
 Communication instructions between the PC and analyzer
 Action instructions of the analyzer
 Floater and photocoupler statuses of the analyzer (real-time)
 Pump and valve powering statuses of the analyzer (real-time)

 Photoelectric data (real-time)

 ……
Separate log files are produced every day and stored in the following addresses:
1) In the WorkstationLOG folder of D:\Mindray\ BS230\OperationSoft.
2) In the InstrumentLOG folder of D:\Mindray\ BS230\OperationSoft\Instrument_1
The folder structure is shown below:
Figure 6-6 InstrumentLOG folder

Important folders include:
Perio the water blank data.
Lislog LIS communication data.
RPC (short form of Remote Procedure Call)
basic control command data.
ISEAdapterSrv ISE command and test data.
Workdata Instrument work instruction record
6.2 Computer Settings

6.2.1 Computer Requirements (for International Customers)
CPU At least Intel Dual Core, 2.6GHz
Memory At least 2GB for each RAM
Network Adapter If you are going to connect the computer with the LIS or Internet, you should
prepare another network adapter (Intel gigabit network adapter)
Serial Port The computer should provide an RS232 serial port, which is used to connect
with the analyzer.
USB USB2.0 and above, no less than 2
Other built-in speakers (instrument alarm sound prompt)
Operating System Microsoft Window 8/10 (64 bit)

6.2.2 Hard disk defragment

Install the operating system in the C drive and the operating software of the instrument in the D drive. Make
sure that the C drive is over 30G and D drive over 100G, and the disk file system is of NTFS format. Deselect
the two options at the bottom of the disk properties window: “Compress drive to save disk space” and “Allow
Indexing Service to index this disk for fast file searching”.
Figure 6-7 Hard disk defragment
6.2.3 Application Software

Except for the operating system, other application software must not be installed or reserved on the computer.
If anti-virus application has been installed, remove the automatic scheduled scanning and add Workstation (BS-
230) and BSLOG to the trust list.
6.2.4 Remove Screen Saver and System Standby
To remove the screen saver and system standby, select None in the Screen saver pull-down list box of the
Screen Saver Settings window, and then select Change power settings -> Change plan settings to go to the
Edit plan settings window. Perform the settings as shown in the figures below.

Figure 6-8 Remove screen saver

Select None in the Turn off the display and Put the computer to sleep pull-down list boxes.
Figure 6-9 Standby settings
6.2.5 Disable Automatic Synchronization with Internet Time Server

Double click the time icon on the lower-right corner of the task bar. The Date and Time Properties window is
displayed.
Figure 6-10 Disable automatic synchronization with Internet time server-1

Select the Internet Time tab, and then deselect the checkbox in front of Synchronize with an Internet time server.

Figure 6-11 Disable automatic synchronization with Internet time server-2
6.2.6 Turn off Automatic Updates

Turn off the automatic updates on the Windows Update window.
Figure 6-12 Turn off the automatic updates
6.2.7 Resolution Setting

Determine whether the screen resolution is 1280*1024.
Procedure:
On the PC desktop, right-click and select Display > Advanced display setting, set the resolution to 1280*1024,
and click OK, as shown in the following figure:

Figure 6-13 Set Resolution
6.2.8 Confirmation of Administrator Permission and UAC

1. Confirming that the current account is the Administrator
1) Open the command prompt. Enter windows+X, and click Command Prompt (Administrator) (A), shown
as the following figure.

Figure 6-14 Open Command Prompt

2) Enter the net user administrator /active:yes command to activate the administrator account (pay
attention to the space in the command), and press Enter. The "Command(s) completed successfully"
is displayed, as shown in the following figure:
Figure6-15 Enter command to Activate the Administrator Account

2. Logging in using the administrator account
Press Ctrl+Alt+Delete, click Log Off to enter the login screen, and click Administrator to enter the OS using
the Administrator account.
3. Modifying UAC setting
1) Enter regedit to run the registry, as shown in the following figure:

Figure 6-16 Run Registry

2) Find the EnableLUA item (0 indicates to disable UAC) in the following path of the
registry.[HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Microsoft\Windows\CurrentVersion\Policies\System
]
3) Check the EnableLUA item. If the value is 1, change it to 0 (0 indicates to disable UAC).
6.2.9 SQL Version Check
Check the database version in the installation software directory and confirm that the database software is not
installed in the computer. If there is, refer to 6.6.2 SQL Database Uninstalling.
6.2.10 Check the installation.
On the Customize Format window, ensure that the decimal point "." has been chosen in the Decimal symbol
pull-down list box.
Note: Customize Format is configured according to the actual conditions of the countries which purchase the
analyzer. For example, the decimal point in Spain is "," so "," should be set as the decimal point (".") in this
country.
Figure 6-17 Special character setting
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 6-10

6.2.11 Firewall Whitelist Setting

Add the program of the operating software into the whitelist to ensure that the instrument and PC communicate
normally and avoid instrument disconnection.
Set relevant program to Allow programs to communicate through Windows Firewall. Specific operation is
as follows:
1) Choose Control Panel > Windows Firewall, and click Allow programs to communicate through
Windows Firewall.
2) In the program list, select the program with operating software, and tick it.
6.3 Installation of Operating Software
6.3.1 Preparation before Installation
1) Download the corresponding version of the software on the TDP.
2) Complete the computer settings, refer to 6.2 Computer Settings.
6.3.2 Software Installation
Please refer to the “UpgradeGuide_EN” in the “SetupGuide” folder of the installation package,see Figure 6-1
Folders in operating software installation package ,which will be updated with the software update.
The following are the detailed installation steps:
1) Run setup.exe in the Setup folder.
Note:If it is the first time the software has been installed, the system will prompt you to reboot the computer.
The SQL Server will be installed automatically after the computer is rebooted.
If the software has been installed and is uninstalled, the PC will not restart.
2) Click Next to enter the installation screen.
Figure 6-18 Installation Wizard Screen

3) The following screen is displayed. Wait for the third-party program to install. Then, the PC will
automatically restart.
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 6-11

Figure 6-19 Installing SQL Software

Note: During database installation, the DOS dialog box is displayed. Do not close this dialog box. It will
automatically disappear after the database is installed. It takes about 20 minutes to install the database. As
shown in the following figure:
Figure 6-20 DOS Dialog Box During SQL Installation

Note: If the DOS dialog box is closed by mistake, the installation fails. Follow the steps below to handle
the problem:
 Uninstall the SQL database, and reinstall the software. (For details about database uninstalling,
see section 6.6.2 SQL Database Uninstalling )
 If the installation fails again, restore the system, and reinstall the software.
3) Select the path for installing the software.
Select the path for installing the software, and click Next, as shown in the following figure:
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 6-12

Figure 6-21 Select a Path to Install the Software

4) Wait till the language selection window pops up.
Figure 6-22 Software installing

5) Choose a language that is used to display the software screens and printed reports, and then select
Next.
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 6-13

Figure 6-23 Select Language for the Operating Software

6) Select Finish. The installation is complete.
Figure 6-24 Installation Finished Screen

7) Confirm the configuration file,refer to 6.3.3 Confirm the configuration file.
6.3.3 Confirm the configuration file
Note:
1) After the installation is complete, the default serial port connecting the analyzer is COM1. If the
software can not be run due to the serial port configuration, please refer to 3).
2) The configuration file is located in the installation directory by default. If the path has been changed
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 6-14

during software installation, find the configuration file in the new directory.
3) The serial port in the configuration file should be set as the one used by the instrument.
Step 1: Open the configuration file COMMUNICATION_USE.INI in the default directory:
D:\Mindray\ BS230\OperationSoft\COMMUNICATION_USE.INI
Step 2: Check if the configurations in the COMMUNICATION_USE.INI file are the same with the following
examples. If they are different, change them according to relevant instructions.
[INSTRUMENTS]
HasTestInstrumentsNum=1
; Note: Number of Instrument
HasSDM=0
; Note: Is SDM configured
IsUseInstrument1=1
IsUseInstrument2=1
IsUseInstrument3=1
IsUseInstrument4=1
NameOfInstrument1 = 240
NameOfInstrument4 =240
[SAMPRACK_COMM_USE]
SAMPRACK_COMM_TYPE=SERIALPORT
SAMPRACK_COMM_NAME=SIM
; Note: Serial port of SDM
[BAUDRATE_SEC]
Baudrate=38400
; Note: Baud rate of SDM
[Demo]
ComPort=COM1
Step 3: Open the configuration file InstrServerConfig.ini in the default directory:
D:\Mindray\ BS230 \OperationSoft\Instrument_1\ InstrServerConfig.ini
Step 4: Check if the configurations in the InstrServerConfig.ini file are the same with the following examples. If
they are different, change them according to relevant instructions.
[INSTR]
INSTRNO=1
SERVER_IP=127.0.0.1
SERVER_PORT=7001
CLIENT_IP=127.0.0.1
CLIENT_PORT=8001
[SERIALPORT]
COMPORT=COM1
; Note: Serial port
BAUDRATE=38400
; Note: Baud rate
6.4 Software Upgrading
The software upgrade is divided into two parts, operating software upgrades and control system upgrades.
Please refer to the “UpgradeGuide_EN” in the “SetupGuide” folder of the installation package,see Figure 6-1
Folders in operating software installation package ,which will be updated with the software update.
Note:After the upgrade is complete, be sure to turn off the analyzer's power and restart to configure the
instrument parameters
6.4.1 Preparation before Upgrading
When it comes to upgrading V25.00.06 software, be sure to check the 6.9 upgraded to V25.00.06 instructions
first.
Check the software version

Enter the current operating software system on the operating computer to confirm the current software version
information, as follows:
Steps:
Enter the main screen of the operating software, select Utility > System Setup > Instrument Setup > Software
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 6-15

Version, and confirm the current software version information.
Figure 6-25 Operating Software Version
LIS Setting backup

If the customer uses the LIS, the LIS setup information needs to be backed up.
Steps:
1) Select Utility > System Setup > LIS Setup.
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 6-16

Figure 6-26 Host Communication Parameters window

Note: Take pictures of this LIS setting interface, Channel number content also needs to take full. Make sure no
Settings related are lost.
2) If the customer uses TCP/IP for LIS connection, you need to take a screenshot of the operating
computer network settings.
In the lower right corner of the desktop taskbar, right click, pop up "Network Settings", select the
network settings used by the LIS, screenshot IP settings information
Figure 6-27 IP setting information
Data Backup
Upgrading the software may result in database loss, so please make a backup before upgrading. Please refer
to 6.7.1 Data backup.
Backup system parameters

During the process of upgrading the control system, the unit parameters may change, so you need to back up
in advance,refer to 6.7.3 Unit parameter .
6.4.2 Upgrading of Operating Software
1) Use the engineer username and password to quit the operating software to the desktop.
2) Access the Windows Task Manager window.Workstation.exe 、 BsLog.exe 、 BsLog1.exe 、
Instrument.exe Check if relevant processes of the Workstation and Upgrade have been ended. If
not, select the process and click End Process.
The processes include:
Workstation.exe, BsLog.exe,BsLog1.exe,Instrument.exe .
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 6-17

Figure 6-28 Task Manager Window

3) Select programs on the menu on the lower right corner;Then select programs and features and
double click the BS230 program to remove it.
4) Reboot the computer.
5) Install the new operating software.Refer to 6.3.2 Software Installation.
6) After finishing the installation, do not reboot the computer or run the BS-230 operating software.
Please executive upgrade control system upgrade.
6.4.3 Upgrading Control System
1) Confirm again that the instrument unit parameters have been backed up, refer to 6.7.3 Unit
parameter Backup.
2) Re-confirm that the new version of the software has been installed, the instrument's main power
switch and analysis unit power switch are turned on.
3) Run the upgrading tool UpgradeEntry:
D:\Mindray\BS230\UpgradeTool\UpgradeEntry.exe
Figure 6-29 Screen of UpgradeEntry

4) Select a serial port used for the analyzer from "Uart name". The default setting is COM1. Note: If
the service engineer changes the serial port during instrument installation, the acutal one used
for PC communication should prevail. Select the target units to write the program. "All Units"
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 6-18

should be selected when the first time to upgrade.
Figure 6-30 UpgradeEntry 1

5) The burning file is under the installation directory and the default installation
directory :D:\Mindray\BS230\AnalyzeSoft. Any burning file can be selected when the "All Unit"
selected.

6) The control units will be download from the "Main Unit" After "Start" button clicked.

7) Click the "Exit" button when the upgrade completed.
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 6-19

Figure 6-33 Upgrade completed
8) Power off, and power it on again after 10 seconds.

9) 10 seconds later, Reboot the computer to run the operating software.
10) Check according to 6.4.4 Confirmation after Upgrading.
6.4.4 Confirmation after Upgrading
1) Refer to 6.3.3 Confirm the configuration file, Confirm that the configuration file has no errors,
otherwise modify it.
2) Check the software version information after entering the software to check whether the upgrade
is successful,refer to Figure 6-25 Operating Software Version.
3) Check whether the database information is lost. If it is lost, refer to Section 6.7.2 Database
Recovery.
4) Check if the LIS connection is normal. If it is abnormal, refer to LIS Setting backup content for
restoration
5) Check whether the unit parameters are consistent with the backup. If not, please refer to 6.7.4
Parameter Configuration for parameter configuration restoration.
6) If an alarm message appears: unmatched operating software version,refer to 10.2.4 Unmatched
Operating Software VersionA22039.
6.5 Software startup process and autostart settings
6.5.1 Normal Startup Procedure
The normal startup procedure of the operating software is as follows:
1) The system checks if the Bslog process has been started automatically. If not, the Bslog.exe program is
run.
2) Sql server is started, and it will exit if an error indicating database initialization failure occurs.
3) The software process is started.
4) Enter the username and password.
5) The software shakes hands with the middle-/lower-layer units. (If handshake fails, an alarm is given
prompting the unit is abnormal.)
6.5.2 Software antostart settings
Normally, with the startup of Windows, the software will start automatically. If there are special circumstances
that must prohibit the program from running automatically, you can modify the computer startup items:
How to do:
1) Switch to the desktop using the service user account, Right click the task bar and select Task Manager.
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 6-20

Figure 6-34 Change Startup Item Configuration
2) Select Startup and the CL-1000i（Here is the CL-1000i as an example. The actual display is workstation）
icon. The screen is shown as follows:
Figure6-35 Task manager window

3) Deselect the checkbox to the left of "CL1000i" to disable auto startup of the operating software.
Note: To restore auto startup, repeat steps 1 to 3 and select the "CL1000i" checkbox.
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 6-21

6.6 Software and SQL Database Uninstallation

6.6.1 Remove the software
1) End the BSlog process by using the KillBslog tool in the installation package.
2) Find the Workstation program on the Control Panel window and uninstall it.
6.6.2 SQL Database Uninstalling
1) Select Start menu > Control Panel > Programs > Programs and Functions on the computer
desktop, and uninstall SQL Server.
2) Then delete the "Microsoft SQL Server" folder generated during installation, run the registry, enter
regedit in Start > Run, enter the registry editor, and delete the following contents in the registry:
HKEY_CURRENT_USER\Software\Microsoft\MicrosoftSQLServeHKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFT
WARE\Microsoft\Microsoft SQL Server (note that you must delete the entire Microsoft SQL Server
folder).
3) Enter regedit in the bottom left corner of the computer Start > Run, enter the registry editor, and then
search
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SYSTEM\CurrentControlSet\Control\Session Manager,
Find the PendingFileRenameOperations value and delete all the data in it.
Figure 6-36 Delete the Database

4) After the SQL database is uninstalled, the operating software can be executed again. The software
automatically installs the SQL data during the installation process.
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 6-22

6.7 Data backup and recovery

6.7.1 Data backup
To back up the data
1) First exit the operating software.
2) enter it again to refresh the database.
The database is in the Database folder under the installation directory. You can choose to back it up in the
following two ways:
1) Use the engineer account to exit the operating software, enter the installation directory, find and copy
the entire Database folder to the computer E drive. File default path:
D:\Mindray\BS230\OperationSoft\DataBase\
2) Use the engineer account to exit the operating software, enter the installation directory, copy the
BA80.bak file in the Backup folder under Database to the computer E disk. File default path:
D:\Mindray\BS230\OperationSoft\DataBase\Backup
240Pro
Figure 6-37 Database location
6.7.2 Database Recovery

To recover the database, first find the storage location of the local disk where the database to be restored is
located. It is recommended to back up the current data.
1) If you copy the entire Database folder, copy and paste directly to D:\Mindray\BS230\OperationSoft\
2) If you are copying the BA80.bak file, you need to copy and paste the file into this directory.
D:\Mindray\BS230\OperationSoft\DataBase\Backup, please delete the two files BA80_DATA, BA80_LOG,
and then restart the software.
6.7.3 Unit parameter Backup
1) Run the operating software. Select Utility -> Maintenance -> Parameter Configuration, select a unit
from the drop down list of "Unit Parameter" to inquire parameters, and then click Save. Repeat this
step for other units.
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 6-23

Figure 6-38 Parameter Configuration window

2) Click Save ,the Save as dialog box is displayed. Select a partition, and create a new folder named in
the format of "Instrument SN + Unit Parameter Backup", and name the unit to be stored.
6.7.4 Parameter Configuration
Parameter configuration requires the use of R&D user name and password, user name superstar,
password, please consult TS
1) Select Utility -> Maintenance -> Parameter Configuration, select the unit of the required
configuration parameters in the “Unit Parameter” drop-down list, click Search, the following
interface appears: (to the reaction l unit For example)
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 6-24

Figure 6-39 Parameter Configuration 1

2) If only one parameter needs to be configured, for example, modify the position 3 parameter shown
in the figure above, double-click the parameter value, change it to “100”, click “Configure”, and
then search the unit again to see if the modification is successful. If this is not successful, repeat
this step.
Figure 6-40 Parameter Configuration

If the instrument has an alarm message
Then the setting parameters are out of range and new setting parameters need to be replaced.
3) If you need to recover by backup parameters, take the following steps: (taking the reaction unit
as an example)Select reaction unit in the unit parameter. 1→Click Search 2→Click Load
3→Select the backup parameter path in the pop-up box→Select the reaction unit parameter
→Click to open . At this time, the parameters have been imported to the current interface,click
,complete parameter configuration.

4) Select the corresponding unit to search and check whether the parameters are configured
successfully. If not, repeat the above operation
6.8 Demo Software Setup
If you want to enter the software in Demo mode, first exit the operating software and add a command in the
start program of WorkStation.exe. To do so, create a shortcut for WorkStation.exe on the desktop, right-click on
the icon and select Properties; then modify the Target field in the pop-up window by adding three space-
separated running parameters (“-Demo”, “MCUDemo”, and “-ISEDemo”) after “WorkStation.exe”, as indicated
in the figure below. When this is done, you can launch the operating software in Demo mode.
Note: If there is no serial port on the computer, you need to install the virtual serial port software. You can run
the demo software after adding the COM1 port. Otherwise, the software will report an error and cannot enter.
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 6-25

Figure 6-41 Demo Setup
6.9 upgraded to V25.00.06 instructions

The main board, together with operation software, upgraded the encryption algorithm of close reagent system.
The operation software is upgraded to V25.00.06, The main changes are as follows:
1) Closed system database encryption algorithm upgrade. The new version of the software adds the function
of self-checking whether the database is cracked or not. Please refer to “Must Read_Upgrading to
V25.00.06 and above_upgrade help tool guidance” for details.
2) Added function: when the blocking reagent reaches the biochemical expiration date, the user will be alerted
in advance.
Upgrade main control board to V2.0, the main changes are as follows:
1) Order number unchanged after upgrade, but the main board is one-way compatibility and the operating
software V25.00.06 or above must be used after the upgrade. Main board encryption mode optimization,
improve the ability to crack.
Upgrade tools and guides are packaged with the new operating software.
The new software is uploaded to TDP.

View Files:/Bio-chemistry/Auto-Biochemistry /BS-240Pro&240E/Software
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 6-26

7 Alignment
7.1 Basic Operation
7.1.1 Utility - Maintenance
Table 7-1 Utility - Maintenance
No Description
1 Maintenance and Diagnostics: used to maintain and diagnose the
system at user end.
2 Alignment: used to align all mechanical positions, and the
hydropneumatic, pyrology and ISE units.
3 Parameters: used to inquire and configure parameters, and to
export parameters of each unit.
Figure 7-1 Maintenance screen
7.1.2 Alignment fixtures

Fixture package code: 115-048339-00
Note: This code contains all the alignment fixtures in the table below.
Table 7-2 Alignment fixtures
No Code Name Image/Precision Quantity

1 BA24-J04 BA24 cuvette alignment 2
fixture

No Code Name Image/Precision Quantity

2 BA10-J16 Reagent bottle center 3
alignment fixture
3 BA48-J10 Sample position 3

alignment tool
4 BA60-J07 Pseudo probe 1
5 BA80-J20-001 Feeler gauge 1
6 BA48-J16 Mixer alignment lever 1
7 BA24-J05 BA24 mixer horizontal 1

position alignment
cuvette
8 BA40-J76 Mixer wash well 1

alignment fixture
9 BA24-J01 Pseudo cuvette for auto 1

wash station alignment
(Only for BS-240)
10 BA48-J12 probe wash well 1
alignment tool
(Only for BS-240)
11 BA24-J03 Reagent carousel bar 1

code reader alignment
tool
12 / Clearance gauge 0.5mm~0.8mm 1

7.1.3 Mechanical Reset

Alignment methods and procedure:
1 Install the pseudo probe (BA60-J07), and block the collision sensor with folded thick
paper.
2 Access the Alignment window and select Mech Reset to reset the mechanical parts of
the system.

7.2 Alignment Procedure

Start
Download program of
Installation of
Preparation Powering On upper layer/lower
Operating Software
layer unit
Photoelectric unit Signal Collecting Photoelectric gain

adjustment Position Adjustment adjustment
Bar Code Unit Bar code label Adjusting Bar Code Testing reagent bar
(Optional) printing and affixing Reader Position code scanning stability
Sample/reagent
Reaction Carousel Sample/Reagent Sample/Reagent Sample Carousel
carousel unit
Circumferential Carousel Outer Ring Carousel Middle Ring Inner Ring Radial
parameter
Position Adjustment Radial Position Radial Position Position
adjustment
Adjust Horizontal Position Adjust Horizontal Position Adjust Horizontal Position

Setting Parameters Probe to Horizontal Position from Probe to Sample/ from Probe to Sample/ from Probe to Sample/
of Probe Unit on Reaction Carousel Reagent Carousel Outer Reagent Carousel Middle Reagent Carousel Inner
Ring Ring Ring
Vertical Extreme Position

Sample Probe Rotary to SIC Sample Probe Rotary to ISE Probe to Horizontal Position Sample Probe Cuvette
from Probe to Reagent
Height (Optional) (Optional) on Wash Well Height
Bottle
Adjusting Horizontal Adjusting Mixing Position Adjusting Horizontal

Setting Mixer Unit
Position from Mixer to from Mixer to Reaction Position from Mixer to
Parameter
Reaction Carousel Carousel Wash Well
Preparations before Checking Floater/

Fluidics Alignment Syringe Check Fluidic Prime
Alignment Valve Status
Setting Reaction Reagent

Setting Pyrology Reaction carousel
Carousel Sensor refrigeration
Unit Parameter heating detection
Parameter adjustment
Completing parameter
configuration table and test record
table
End
Figure 7-2 Alignment Procedure

7.3 Photometric Unit

Select Utility—>Maintenance—>Alignment—>Photometer Unit. The window is as shown below.
Figure 7-3 The window of Photometric unit

[1 Turn On Lamp] and [2 Turn Off Lamp] are the switch light source light command.
[3 Index Setup] is set for the optical gain indicator, please do not change it at will.
7.3.1 Signal Collecting Position Adjustment
Alignment index:
The best photoelectric collecting position is in the middle of the two border lines.
1) Select Signal Collecting Position Adjustment to display the alignment window.
2) Make sure the lamp has been turned on for over 1 minute. If not, wait for 1 minute, and then select
Start to proceed to the next step.
3) A window pops up to prompt you to add 200 µl DI water with pipettor in the designated cuvette. Select
Next.
4) Observe the waveform in the upper part of the window and check if the photoelectric signal meets the
alignment requirement. See the figure below. If not, adjust the photocoupler.

The green box must

be within the two
red lines.
Figure 7-4 Signal Collecting Position Adjustment

 If you want to adjust the position of optical coupler. The position sensor of the reaction carousel
is located on the right of the analyzer. Remove the right panel before alignment. Loosen the
three M3 hexagon screws on the optical coupler bracket. Use a wrench to knock the sensor
gently to adjust clockwise the position of the sensor and the green box moves right. If you adjust
the position counter clockwise, the green box moves left. After position adjustment, tighten
slightly the screws and click re-align. The software restarts testing.
 If the photocoupler is in a proper position, select Done without any adjustment.
Reaction carousel
position sensor
Figure 7-5 Reaction carousel position sensor
7.3.2 Photoelectric Gain Adjustment

Alignment index:
1) The water blank AD value of each channel is set to 52000-54000.
2) 255 ≧ The optical gain coefficient of all channels ≧ 40.
3) The dark current of all channels is 1~200.

Figure 7-6 Access the "Index Setup" screen
Figure 7-7 Alignment procedure

Alignment methods and steps:
1) Select Photoelectric Gain Adjustment.
2) Make sure the lamp has been turned on for over 3 minutes, and then select "Done". If you do not
click "Done", you need to wait for 3 minutes.
3) According to the screen prompt, check whether 1# cuvette segment is taken out. If there is, continue
with the next step.
4) The photoelectric gain is adjusted automatically. When adjustment is complete, select Done.
5) Select "Continue" to test the dark current and the water blank AD of each channel.
6) Select "Continue" to finish the alignment and exit the procedure.
Note
If you had adjust the position of optical coupler, ensure that the screws on the reaction carousel position sensor
bracket have been tightened.
Alignment parameters can be saved only after each procedure is complete. Another alignment is required if a
procedure is terminated. If the parameter is not successfully configured or out of range, the parameter range
will be displayed by the alarm message and re-perform the alignment.

7.4 Sample/Reagent carousel unit

Select Utility -> Maintenance -> Alignment -> Sample/Reagent Carousel.The window is as shown below.
Figure 7-8 The window of Sample/Reagent Carousel Unit
7.4.1 Reaction Carousel Circumferential Position Adjustment

Alignment index:
The probe (pseudo probe BA60-J07) can pass through the through-hole on the cuvette alignment fixture (BA24-
J04).
Operation methods and steps:


1) Select Reaction Carousel Circumferential Position Adjustment and then operate according to the
screen prompts.
2) Select Continue to reset all mechanical parts of the whole unit.
3) Place Cuvette alignment fixture BA24-J04 on the 19# and 14# cuvettes.
4) Adjust the position of probe to the reaction carousel.
a) Click the button on the software window to move the probe above the dispensing position
and the diluting position on the reaction carousel. Check if the probe can pass through the
center hole of the fixture on the two cuvettes, otherwise adjust the probe's radial position and
reaction carousel's circumferential position parameters. The left and right arrow on the
window can adjust the circumferential position of the reaction carousel.

BA60-J07
BA24-J04
Reaction carousel's orbit
The crossover point of Reaction

carousel's orbit and probe's orbit
Probe's orbit
Figure 7-10 Reaction Carousel Circumferential Position Adjustment

b) If the software cannot be debugged successfully, there may be a deviation in the mechanical
position, so you need to adjust it as shown in the figure below.
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 7-10

probe's circumferential position adjustment: Loosen

the 2 screws to move the probe rocker arm.
probe's radial position adjustment ： Loosen the 3

screws to move the base.
Figure 7-11 How to adjust mechanical position

c) Select Continue to proceed to the next step.
5) Click Continue. Check the position of the probe in dispensing position and diluting position.
6) Select Continue. The alignment is complete. Select Exit to close the window.
Note
 The alignment tools will be used in following alignment. Do not remove them.
 The left arrow button is equivalent to rotating clockwise and the right arrow button rotating counterclockwise.
 When selecting Large Step, you can set up the concrete steps according to the reference range.
 Once the probe arm length is determined, it must not be adjusted during alignment of probes and carousels.
 If the probe arm length is changed, the probe and carousel units should be aligned again.
 Alignment parameters can be saved only after each procedure is complete. Another alignment is required
if a procedure is terminated. If the parameter is not successfully configured or out of range, the parameter
range will be displayed by the alarm message and re-perform the alignment.
 If you loosen the two fixing hex socket screws of the probe rocker arm, you need to adjust the horizontal
position of the probe to the reaction carousel, the wash well and the reagent carousel. If the debugging is
out of range, it is possible to rotate when the rocker arm is fixed. Over the rocker arm, you need to re-adjust
and fix the rocker arm.
7.4.2 Sample/Reagent Carousel Outer Ring Circumferential Position

Alignment index:
The probe (fixture: BA60-J07 pseudo probe) can pass through the center hole of the sample position alignment
fixture (BA48-J10) in sample positions 1#, 14#, and 27# of the outer ring of the sample/reagent carousel.
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 7-11


1) Select "Sample/Reagent Carousel Outer Ring Circumferential Position", and then operate
according to the screen prompts.
2) Place a sample position alignment fixture BA48-J10 in sample positions 1#, 14#, and 27# of the outer
ring of the sample/reagent carousel.
The probe tip can pass

through the central hole
of the alignment tool.
BA48-J10
Figure 7-13 sample position alignment tool

3) Click to move the probe to 1# position of the sample/reagent carousel outer ring, and click the up and
down arrow buttons to stop the probe at the visually nearest position above the fixture. Check if the
probe tip is aligned with the middle of the through-hole. If it is not, click the left and right arrow buttons
to adjust the probe's circumferential position on the outer ring, so that the probe tip can pass through
the central hole of the fixture in 1# position.
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 7-12

The 4 arrows are

used to control the
probe.
The 2 arrows are used to

control the carousel.
Figure 7-14 Sample/Reagent Carousel Outer Ring Circumferential Position Adjustment

4) Adjust the reagent probe in 14# and 27# positions of the sample/reagent carousel outer ring according
to step 3.
5) Select Continue. The alignment is complete.
6) Select Exit to close the window.
7.4.3 Sample/Reagent Carousel Middle Ring Circumferential Position
Alignment index:
The probe (fixture: BA60-J07 pseudo probe) can pass through the center hole of the reagent center alignment
fixture (BA10-J16) in reagent positions 1#, 14#, and 27# of the middle ring of the sample/reagent carousel.
1) Select Sample/Reagent Carousel Middle Ring Circumferential Position.
2) Place a reagent position alignment fixture BA10-J16 in positions #1, #14 and #27 of the
sample/reagent carousel, and then select "Continue".
3) Adjust the positions #1, #14 and #27 of the middle ring of the sample/reagent carousel according to
step 4 of "Sample/Reagent Carousel Outer Ring Circumferential Position".
4) Select "Continue". The alignment is complete.
7.4.4 Sample/Reagent Carousel Inner Ring Circumferential Position
Alignment index:
The probe (fixture: BA60-J07 pseudo probe) can pass through the center hole of the reagent center alignment
fixture (BA10-J16) in reagent positions 41#, 54#, and 67# of the inner ring of the sample/reagent carousel.
1) Select "Sample/Reagent Carousel Inner Ring Radial Position".
2) Place a sample position alignment fixture BA10-J16 in positions 41#, 54#, and 67# of the sample
carousel, and then select "Continue".
3) Adjust the positions 41#, 54#, and 67# of the inner ring of the sample/reagent carousel according to
step 4 of "Sample/Reagent Carousel Outer Ring Circumferential Position".
4) Select "Continue". The alignment is complete.
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 7-13

Note
if a procedure is terminated. If the parameter is not successfully configured or out of range, the parameter
range will be displayed by the alarm message and re-perform the alignment.
7.5 Probe unit

Select Utility—>Maintenance—>Alignment—>Probe Unit. The window is as shown below.
Figure 7-15 The window of probe unit
7.5.1 Probe to Horizontal Position on Reaction Carousel

Alignment index:
The probe (pseudo probe BA60-J07) can pass through the through-hole on the cuvette alignment fixture (BA24-
J04).
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 7-14

1) Select Probe to Horizontal Position on Reaction Carousel.

2) Place the cuvette alignment fixture (BA24-J04) in positions 19# and 14# of the reaction carousel, and
then select "Continue".
3) Select the down arrow button to lower the probe to the top of the alignment fixture in position 19# so
that it can align with the center hole..
4) Adjust the circumferential position of the probe arm and ensure that the probe can enter the central
hole on the fixture. Press the probe arm and tighten the screws on it. If error exists, click the left and
right arrow buttons to adjust the probe till it meets the requirement.
BA24-J04
Figure 7-17 The cuvette alignment fixture

5) Select Continue and verify the alignment with the up and down arrow buttons. If the index is not
satisfied, return to the previous step and try again.
6) Click "Continue". Move the probe to the top of the position 14#. Click the up and down arrows to drop
the probe to the top of the fixture. Check whether the probe tip can enter the center hole of the fixture.
If it cannot, click the left and right arrows to adjust parameters until index requirements are met.
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 7-15

7) Select Continue and verify the alignment with the up and down arrow buttons. If the index is not
satisfied, return to the previous step and try again.
8) Select Continue to save parameters and exit the window.
7.5.2 Probe to Horizontal Positions on Wash Well
Alignment index:
The sample probe tip can enter the center on the wash well and does not interfere with the wall of the wash
well.

1) Select Probe to Horizontal Positions on Wash Well.
2) Then, adjust it with the left and right arrow buttons until it is in the center of the wash well.
3) Confirm the alignment result. If the requirements are not met, return to the previous step..
The probe tip enters the center on

the wash well and does not interfere
with the wall of the wash well.
Figure 7-19 Probe to Horizontal and Vertical Positions on Wash Well

7.5.3 Probe to Sample/Reagent Carousel Outer Ring
Alignment index:
The probe tip can enter the center hole of the alignment fixture (BA48-J10) in positions 1#, 14#, and 27# of the
outer ring of the sample/reagent carousel.
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 7-16


1) Select Probe to Sample/Reagent Carousel Outer Ring.
2) Place a sample position alignment tool (BA48-J10) in position 1#, 14#, and 27# on the outer ring of
the sample/reagent carousel, and then select Continue.
3) Select the up/down and left/right arrow buttons to move the probe so that it can enter into the central
hole on the alignment tool.
7.5.4 Probe to Sample/Reagent Carousel Middle Ring
Alignment index:
The probe tip can enter the central hole of the alignment fixture (BA48-J10) in 1#, 14# and 27# positions of the
sample/reagent carousel middle ring.
1) Select Probe Rotary to Sample/Reagent Carousel Middle Ring.
2) Place a sample position alignment tool (BA10-J16) in position 1#, 14#, and 27# on the middle ring of
7.5.5 Probe to Sample/Reagent Carousel Inner Ring
Alignment index:
The probe tip can enter the central hole of the alignment fixture (BA48-J16) in 41#, 54#, and 67# positions of
the sample/reagent carousel inner ring.
1) Select Probe Rotary to Sample/Reagent Carousel Inner Ring.
2) Place a reagent position alignment tool (BA10-J16) in position 41#, 54#, and 67# on the inner ring of
7.5.6 Probe to Vertical Limit Position on Reaction Carousel
Alignment index:
When reaching the cuvette bottom, the probe is lifted for 0.15mm, which means that the clearance gauge can
pass with 0.15mm through the gap between the sensor plate and the arm base and it cannot pass with 0.20mm.
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 7-17


1) Select Probe to vertical limit position on reantion carousel.
2) Check that cuvettes are loaded in 1#, 14#, and 27# positions of the reaction carousel.
3) Adjust the probe over the 3 cuvette positions, and ensure that the lifting height meets the requirement.
7.5.7 Probe to Vertical Limit Position in Reagent Bottle
Alignment index:
When reaching the bottom of the reagent bottle, the probe is lifted for 0.15mm, which means that the clearance
gauge can pass with 0.15mm through the gap between the sensor plate and the arm base and it cannot pass
with 0.20mm.
1) Select Probe to Vertical Limit Position in Reagent Bottle.
2) Load the reagent bottle in 1#, 14#, and 27# position on the middle ring of the sample/reagent carousel.
3) Adjust the probe over the 3 reagent positions, and ensure that the lifting height meets the requirement.
7.5.8 Probe to Horizontal Postion on ISE Part (Optional)
Alignment index:
The probe has its tip above the ISE sample injection port but deviates slightly from the central hole. The probe
tip should not contact with the inwall of the sample inject port.
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 7-18


1) Ensure the ISE has been installed.
2) Select Probe to Horizontal Postion on ISE Part.
3) According to Step 3, select the down arrow button to lower the probe to above the ISE sample injection
port. Select the left/right arrow buttons to adjust the probe radially till it is 1mm away from the center
of the sample injection port or deviating slightly from the central hole. The probe tip should not contact
with the inwall of sample inject port.
Figure 7-23 Probe to Horizontal Postion on ISE Part

4) If the probe fails by adjusting parameters, loose the screws fixing the ISE module on the chassis, and
then move it till requests are met.
5) If the problem still remains, use a cross head screwdriver to loosen the screws on the ISE module and
move it till requests are met.
6) The operation in Step 3 is verified in Step 4. If requirements are not met, return to Step 3.
7.5.9 Probe to Vertical Postion on ISE Part (Optional)
Alignment index:
The probe has its tip level with the third transition line in the sample injection cup.
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 7-19


1) Check if the Probe Rotary to ISE alignment has been completed.
2) Select Probe to Vertical Postion on ISE Part.
3) According to Step 3 on the screen, select the up/down arrow buttons to make the probe tip level with
the third transition line inside the sample injection cup. (You can see three transition lines, and the
probe tip shall be level with the one at the bottom, as shown in the figure below.)
Probe tip levels

with this line
Figure 7-25 Probe to Vertical Postion on ISE Part
Note
 Alignment of each position is verified the next step.
if a procedure is terminated.
 If the parameter is not successfully configured or out of range, the parameter range will be displayed by
the alarm message and re-perform the alignment.
7.6 Mixer Unit

Select Utility—>Maintenance—>Alignment—>Mixer Unit. The window is as shown below.
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 7-20

Figure 7-26 The window of Mixer Unit
7.6.1 Mixer to Horizontal Position on Reaction Carousel

Alignment index:
The mixer (mixer alignment lever BA48-J16) can pass the through hole of the mixer horizontal position alignment
cuvette (BA24-J05) in position 31# of the reaction carousel.

1) Install the mixer alignment fixture BA48-J16, and then select Mixer to Horizontal Position on
Reaction Carousel.
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 7-21

BA48-J16:
Alignment
lever
(inserted to
the end)
Figure 7-28 mixer alignment fixture

2) Place the mixer horizontal position alignment fixture (BA24-J05) in position 31# of the reaction
carousel.
3) According to Step 3 on the screen, adjust the mixer position to align with 31# cuvette.
a) Click the Up and down arrow to move the mixer to above the fixture.
b) When the mixer aligns with the center of the fixture, use M3 Hexagon wrench to
pretighten the screw to the extent that the arm cannot swing freely but the
arm can rotate when you push it with your hand.
c) Rotate the arm downward and pretighten the screw and then rotate it upward and
then tighten the radial screw.
Because the radial

screw is located at
the lower side, you
need to rotate the BA48-J16
mixer to leave
enough space to
tighten the radial
screw.
BA24-J05
Figure 7-29 Mixer to Horizontal Position on Reaction Carousel

d) Move the mixer to above the reaction carousel fixture and tighten the
circumferential screw.
4) If the lever is not correct horizontally, select the left/right arrow buttons in Step 4 to adjust so that it can
align with the alignment tool.
6) Select Continue, remove the fixture and store it properly.
7.6.2 Mixer to Horizontal Wash Position
Alignment index:
The mixer (mixer alignment lever BA48-J16) can enter the through hole of the wash well alignment fixture
(BA40-J76) and the gap between the probe’s wash well and the fixture shell is even.
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 7-22


1) Select Mixer to Horizontal Wash Position.
2) Select Continue. Place fixture BA40-J76 in the mixer wash well.
3) Click the up and down arrow to move the mixer alignment tool to above the wash well fixture. Click left
and right arrow to make the mixer alignment tool align with the center hole of the wash well fixture. If
deviation exists, loosen the screw of the wash well to adjust the position of the wash well till the
requirements are met.
BA40-J76
Figure 7-31 Mixer to Horizontal Wash Position

5) Remove the fixture. Select Continue to save parameters and exit the window. Install the real mixer.
7.6.3 Mixer to Vertical Position on Reaction Carousel
Alignment index:
The lever lowers into the cuvette, the gap between which the go gauge of the mixer alignment tool (BA80-J20-
001) can pass and the no-go gauge cannot.
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 7-23


1) Select Mixer to Vertical Position on Reaction Carousel. Make sure the mixing position is holding a
cuvette instead of alignment tool.
2) Select Continue. After the system resets mechanically, the sample mixer moves into the cuvette.
3) Select the up/down arrow buttons, and insert the alignment tool (BA80-J20-001) between the mixer's
straight-knurled column and cuvette edge. Gently push the alignment tool to observe if the Go Gauge
can easily pass while the No-go Gauge cannot.
The Go Gauge (thinner

side) can easily pass while
the No-go Gauge (thicker
side) cannot.
Figure 7-33 Mixer to Vertical Position on Reaction Carousel

7.7 Bar Code Unit (Optional)
7.7.1 Bar Code Sticking Requirements
1) The bar code label should be clear, and not vague, dirty or scratched.
2) The sample bar code label should be stuck upright and plane and 9mm away from the tube bottom.
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 7-24

Bar
Sample tube
code
area
9mm
Figure 7-34 The sample bar code Sticking Requirements

3) The reagent bar code label should be stuck in the front side below the bottle opening, and in
the middle of the vertical and horizontal directions.
Do not stick to the

corner
Do not stick to the

corner
Figure 7-35 The reagent bar code Sticking Requirements
7.7.2 Bar code Unit

Select Utility -> Maintenance -> Alignment -> Bar code unit. The window is as shown below.
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 7-25

Figure 7-36 The window of Bar Code Unit
7.7.3 Bar Code reader model Adjustment

Select Utility -> Maintenance -> Alignment -> Bar code unit->Bar code reader model configuration
Note: The barcode scanner model configured for the instrument is MS-3.
Figure 7-37 Bar code reader model configuration
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 7-26

7.7.4 Bar Code Reader Position Adjustment

Alignment index:
1) The light beam transmitted from the bar code reader can pass through the sample bar code slot and the
reagent bar code slot on the bar code reader alignment tool (BA24-J03).
2) The bar code in 1~5# on the outer ring and 1~5# positions on the middle ring of the sample/reagent
carousel can be identified correctly and completely and displayed on the screen.
1) Select Bar Code Reader Adjustment.

2) Use cross screw driver to remove the tube holder in 26# and 27# position on the outer ring and place
the bar code alignment tool BA24-J03(The slot facing the outside of the carousel. )Click Continue.
Insert the positioning

Reagent bar code
pin at the lower side of
scanning slot
the BA24-J03 into the
two holes after the tube
holder is removed.
Sample bar code

scanning slot
Figure 7-39 Bar Code Reader Position Adjustment 1

3) Loosen the four screws of the bar code reader and its bracket. Adjust the angle of the light beam to
make it pass through the sample bar code slot. Use the left and right arrow on the software screen to
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 7-27

adjust the position until the parameters of the sample/reagent carousel meet the requirement.
Place a white paper in

front of the alignment tool.
When all the scanning
light passes through the
slot, a complete straight
Adjust the screw here (two line will fall on the paper.
more at the lower side) to
adjust the bar code reader
position.

4) Check again if the light goes through the slot on the fixture. If not, return to previous step to make
adjustment till requests are met.
5) Remove the alignment tool. Place the bar coded sample tube and reagent bottle respectively in 1~5#
position on the outer ring and middle ring. When the bar code is scanned, the bar code reader indicator
turns yellow-green and the software screen prompts the identification rate is ≥80%. Scan the bar codes
and check if the bar codes are correctly identified.
When bar code is

identified, the indicator
here turns yellow-green.
When no bar code is
scanned, it is red.

6) If all bar code cannot be read, check if the light direction meets the requirement and the bar code
reader works normally.
Note
 If Bar Code Reader Adjustment has been performed, the bar code system will be initialized and only Code
128 will be recognized. If the client uses other code systems, you need to click UtilitySystem
SetupBar code, re-check the bar code option.
7.7.5 Bar Code Stability Test

Alignment index:
1) When the sample/reagent carousel rotates for several circles, the bar code identified in the same position
should be the same.
2) The bar code in all positions of the sample/reagent carousel can be identified correctly and completely and
displayed on the screen. Randomly choose 3 bar code on the outer ring and inner ring, and check that the
bar code displayed on the screen is same as that on the bar code label.
Note: Before doing the bar code stability test, please confirm the information of the bar code system used. If it
is not Code 128, you need to click UtilitySystem SetupBar code，and then select the corresponding bar
code.
1) Place bar-coded sample tubes in position 1-40# on the outer ring and bar coded reagent bottles in
position 1#-40# on the middle ring of the sample/reagent carousel.
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 7-28

2) Select Bar Code Stability Test, set the scan circle as 10, and select Start.
3) After scanning, check if the identified bar code meets the requirement. If different bar code is read in
the same position, the position will be indicated in red.
4) If the stability test fails, find the reasons and take actions according to the following probabilities:
a) Check if the failed bar code meets the printing standard, the bar code label is not tilting, dirty or
damaged and has been applied in correct position.
b) Check if the glass scanning window is clean without contamination.
c) The scanning window is not blocked by the sponge cushion.
d) If none of the above happens, replace the bar code reader, adjust it properly and do the test again.
e) Generally, the three methods above are enough to troubleshoot the problem.
Figure 7-42 Sample Bar Code Stability Test
Note
 Check that the sponge cushion seals the bar code reader completely without blocking the scanning light.
Otherwise, adjust the bar code reader again
 After alignment, check if the screws on the bar code reader and conversion board have been tightened
7.8 Hydro Unit

Select Utility—>Maintenance—>Alignment—>Hydro Unit. The window is as shown below.
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 7-29

Figure 7-43 The window of Hydro Unit
7.8.1 Preparations before Alignment

1) Check if all tubes have been connected correctly.
2) Check if the solenoid valves have been connected to the correct cables.
3) Fill the water tank with sufficient water.
4) Connect the water supply tube to the analyzer, and connect the waste tanks.
5) Check if the inlet filter assembly has been installed.
6) Remove the pseudo probe from the probe arm, and install the real probe instead.
Installation requirements:
1) Gap between the probe plate and the arm surface is not allowed. Otherwise, check the retaining bolt
and tube, because the tube's elasticity will also affect the probe's bouncing;
2) A washer has been applied on the retaining bolt, and the nut has been tightened;
3) After fixing the probe with bolt and spring, manually lift the probe and release it, and check that the
probe can bounce back freely through the spring;
4) Adjust the LLD board and the relative positions of the probe plate and photocoupler so that the probe
plate is in the middle of the photocoupler.
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 7-30

7.8.2 Checking Floater and Valve Status
Figure 7-44 The window of Valve/Floater/Pump Alignment

Manually switch the floater status one by one according to the table below, and then select Query to refresh the
floater status. Check if the actual fluid level of each container is the same as the status displayed on the screen.
Tank Name Floater Status Screen
Display
Water tank, Diluted Wash Solution Floater triggered (high Not empty
Tank level)
Water tank, Diluted Wash Solution Floater not triggered (low Empty
Tank level)
When the valve voltage is normal

1) Select Utility—>Maintenance—>Alignment—>Hydro Unit—> Valve/Floater/Pump
Alignment,see Figure 7-44 The window of Valve/Floater/Pump Alignment,select the
corresponding valve to Turn on/Turn off, and you can hear the crisp sound.
2) The valve is powered by DC 12V, the multimeter is adjusted to DC, the black probe is grounded,
and the red probe measures the red and black wires respectively.
Valve Red wire voltage Black wire voltage
Turn on 12V 0V
Turn off 12V 12V
When the Pump voltage is normal

1) Select Utility—>Maintenance—>Alignment—>Hydro Unit—> Valve/Floater/Pump
Alignment,see Figure 7-44 The window of Valve/Floater/Pump Alignment,select the
corresponding Pump to Turn on, and you can feel the vibration of the pump by hand.
2) The Pump is powered by DC 12V, the multimeter is adjusted to DC, the black probe is grounded,
and the red probe measures the red and black wires respectively.
Pump Red wire voltage Black wire voltage
Turn on 12V 0V
Turn off 12V 12V
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 7-31

7.8.3 Probe syringe Return Volume Alignment

1) Select probe syringe Return Volume Alignment.
2) Make sure the probe alignment and the fluidic prime are finished.
Figure 7-45 Tip screen

3) Click start, the instrument automatically calculates.
Figure 7-46 Probe syringe Return Volume Alignment
7.8.4 Fluidic Prime

1) Select Utility—>Maintenance—>Alignment—>Hydro Unit
2) Select Valve/Floater/Pump Alignment,see Figure 7-44 The window of Valve/Floater/Pump
Alignment.
3) Exterior wash tubing prime: select "P02 Exterior Wash". Click "Turn On" and observe the probe
and mixer wash wells. When water is sprayed out from the wash tube without air bubbles, select "P02
Exterior Wash" again and click "Turn Off". The exterior wash tubing prime ends..
4) Interior wash tubing prime: select "SV01 Interior Wash". Click "Turn On". Then, select "P01 Interior
Wash" and click "Turn On". Meanwhile, remove the sample syringe of the probe, push and pull the
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 7-32

syringe plunger repeatedly until air bubbles are removed completely from syringes and T pieces. After
all air is discharged, turn off the pump first and then turn off the valve by selecting the turned off
pump/valve and clicking "Turn Off" to end the prime.
5) Reinstall the syringe in such a way that the syringe scale 7.5 is aligned with the V notch.
6) Exit the window.
7.9 Pyrology Unit
Select Utility -> Maintenance -> Alignment -> Pyrology Unit. The window is as shown below.
Figure 7-47 The window of Pyrology Unit
7.9.1 Configuration of Sensor Parameters

Alignment index: Configure the parameters correctly according to the rated values of the reaction carousel
sensors, and configure the △AD value of temperature sensors.
1) Select Sensor Configuration.
2) According to the sequence number on the temperature sensor, contact the headquarters to find the
resistance of rated temperature points (0, 37 and 100), select sensor 1 and input the resistance for
each temperature point, and then select Calculate.
3) When a dialog box pops up indicating qualified sensor, select Configure to configure the parameters
to the relevant sensor.
4) Observe the △AD value of PCB, and input it in the edit boxes at lower-right corner of the window for
sensor 1. Select Configure, and then select Search to verify them.
5) When configuration is complete, select Exit.
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 7-33

Figure 7-48 The window of Sensor Parameters
7.9.2 Observe Temperature Curve

Alignment index:
The reaction carousel temperature is within 36.7~37.3 ℃ and reagent preheating temperature is within
43~47 ℃.
1) Select Reaction Carousel Temperature Curve.
2) Select Turn on heater.
3) Select Sensor temperature curve 1(reaction carousel heating curve).Select Start in the temperature
curve area. Check the reaction carousel temperature curve for 1 minute when the curve is steady and
the temperature reaches 37℃. The curve of sensor is straight and stable with value within 36.7~37.3℃.
4) Check the reagent preheating curve in the same way. Sensor temperature curve 2 is the reagent
preheating curve.
5) Select Stop. Select Exit to close the window.
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 7-34

Figure 7-49 Reaction Carousel Temperature Curve
7.10 ISE Unit

Select Utility -> Maintenance -> Alignment -> ISE Unit. The window is as shown below.
Figure 7-50 ISE unit Alignment
7.10.1 Module Intialization

Handshake:
When the ISE module shakes hand with the system, click "Start". When data returns "<ISE!>", the data is
displayed on the display bar and the next line displays "Handshake successful" indicating that the module is
normally communicated with the system, as shown in the figure below.
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 7-35

Purger A:
a) On the Purge A interface, define the parameters as below, interval time: 5S, cycle count: 30 times.
b) Click "Start" and wait until "<ISE!>" returns on the current data display area, indicating that a calibrator
A purging cycle is completed. During this, pump A and waste liquid pump rotate clockwise and pump
liquid out. Repeat the operation above for several times and you can see that calibrator A tube is
gradually filled with liquid and drained to the dispensing port.
c) In this case, click "Stop". The software will stop purging after the current calibrator A purging cycle is
completed.
d) If no liquid flow is detected or liquid flow is slow after several executions, check whether the hose
connector is properly and reliably connected and whether the peristaltic pump works normally.
Purge B:
The operator for "Purge B" is the same as that for "Purge A".
Air Bubble Detector Calibration:
a) Click "Start" under Part Check - Pump Check.
b) After calibration, wait until the current data display area returns calibrated data (data format: <BBC A
xxx M xxx L xxx>). The next line displays "Air bubble detector calibrated", indicating the debugging is
successful.
c) If the current data display area displays calibrated data as <ERC BBC x000000>, the next line displays
"specific error" (marked with red text) according to the returned error code. For error codes, Table 7-3
ISE Error Codes..
Pump Check:
a) Place a test tube filled with deionized water in the W position of the sample carousel;
b) Click "Start" under Part Check - Pump Check.
c) Operate as instructed on the screen. After calibration is complete, wait until the current data display
area returns data as <PMC A xxxx B xxxx W xxxx> (each value shall fall in between 1500 and 3000),
and the next line displays "Pump Check Correctly", indicating that the debugging is successful.
d) If the current data display area returns calibrated data as <ERC PMC x000000>. For x, see Appendix.
The next line displays "specific error" (marked with red text). For error codes, see Table 7-3 ISE Error
Codes.
Wash:
Prepara sufficient wash solution in the sample carousel (usage in each wash operation is 100 ul), and then input
the level of the wash solution in the cuvette in "Set liquid level in cuvette", and click "Clean". Wait until the data
area returns <ISE!> (wait for about 160 s). The next line displays "Clean completed", including the wash is
complete.
Two-point calibration:
a) Click "Start" in the "Two-point calibration" area to display the confirmation dialog for fluidic tube wash.
If it is possible to check that the last wash operation has been waited for more than 15 min, directly
click OK; otherwise, wait until the countdown time ends.
b) After the countdown time ends, automatically execute the two-point calibration testing. After the testing
is complete, the current data display area returns the calibration result "< Na xx.xx K xx.xx Cl xx.xx
xxxxxxxx>". ;
c) If an error code displays during calibration, repeat several times of two-point calibration. If the problem
persists, replace the corresponding electrode reporting error as instructed by error message. For error
codes, see Table 7-3 ISE Error Codes.
7.10.2 ISE Error Codes

Note: Error codes will be affixed to result strings. An error code is in format of 7 ASCII characters, such as
<1234567>. Each digit represents a specific meaning, as shown below:
Table 7-3 ISE Error Codes
Digit #1 Digit #2 Digit #3 Digit #4 Digit #5 Digit #6 Digit #7
Error Type (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7)
Air bubble included S 0 0 0 0 0 0
in the sample
Air bubble included A 0 0 0 0 0 0
in the calibrator A
Air bubble included B 0 0 0 0 0 0
in the calibrator B
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 7-36

Air bubble included C 0 0 0 0 0 0

in the wash
solution
Air in Segment M 0 0 0 0 0 0
Pump calibration P 0 0 0 0 0 0
error
No fluid in F 0 0 0 0 0 0
electrode pipes
Air bubble D 0 0 0 0 0 0
monitoring error
Chip reading error R 0 0 0 0 0 0
Chip writting error W 0 0 0 0 0 0
Saving calibration Q 0 0 0 0 0 0
result error
Command error T 0 0 0 0 0 0
No error 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Na+ 0 1 1 1 1 1 1
K+ 0 2 2 2 2 2 2
Na+，K+ 0 3 3 3 3 3 3
Cl- 0 8 8 8 8 8 8
Cl-,Na+ 0 9 9 9 9 9 9
Cl-,K+ 0 A A A A A A
Cl-,K+,Na+ 0 C C C C C C
The error types in the table above are described as below:
1) - Air bubble/hardware;
2) - Electrode voltage overflowed during calibrator B calibration or blood measurement;
3) - Electrode voltage overflowed during two-point calibration or calibrator A calibration in blood
measurement mode, or calibrator B calibration in urine measurement mode;
4) - Electrode voltage noise during calibrator B calibration or blood measurement;
5) - Electrode voltage noise during two-point calibration or calibrator A calibration in blood measurement
mode, or calibrator B calibration in urine measurement mode;
6) - Voltage drift during calibrator A calibration in blood measurement mode, or slope drift
during two-point calibration;
7) - Exceeds the slope or module measurement range;
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 7-37

8 Installation
8.1 Installation Procedure
8.1.1 Installation Procedure
The approximate installation procedure of the analyzer is as follows: for your reference:
Table 8-1 Analyzer installation procedure
Classification Main Content Remarks
Before Check if the analyzer and reagents are arrived, check The LIS and water unit
installation whether the water unit, UPS, LIS, etc. are prepared in are not required
advance, confirm the trainees, and confirm that the arrived
reagents have been refrigerated.
Prepare tools and alignment fixtures
Download relevant information on TDP: latest software (if Please search for the
new software is released, and the version is higher than the specific file path on the
factory analyzer); download the maintenance manual for TDP
backup
Once again, confirm that the above is correct.
During Check the quantity of the goods and confirm whether the In case of any missing,
installation installed reagents are refrigerated. timely give feedback
Check Packing List
Unpacking
Transfer the analyzer to the department installation location
Remove the analyzer fixed parts and foam tape
Install accessories
Connect the pipeline
Install the PC
Software Installation
Start the analyzer
Adjust the positions
Prime the fluidic system
Set the analyzer, and initialize maintenance records
Apply for testing for performance verification
Record data, and fill in the installation report
Assist the LIS in connection (if any)
Train the customer for operations and simple troubleshooting
Print template settings (refer to the corresponding chapter of
the instruction manual)
Confirm that the analyzer works normally, and the pipeline
and wire are neat and beautiful.
After Regularly visit the customer after installation, and take the The customers whose
installation initiative to care analyzers are newly
installed have more
operational problems
8.1.2 Installation Time Consumption

The estimated time spent in the installation procedure is as follows:
Table 8-2 Estimated time spent in the installation procedure
No. Work Content Time
Consumption
Step1 Confirm the installation environment, water and electricity are About 1 H
qualified, check the quantity of goods, and installed reagents,
and check the packing list

Step2 Disassemble the analyzer and accessory box About 1 H

Step3 Connect the accessories and fluidics system About 0.5 H
Step4 Install the PC About 0.5 H
Step5 Install the software (if the control software should be About 0.5 H
upgraded, about +1H will be required)
Step6 Startup About 0.5 H
Step7 Confirm and adjust the positions About 0.5 H
Step8 Prime the fluidic system About 0.5 H
Setp9 System Setup About 1 H
Step10 Verify performance and test the analyzer with running water About 2 H
Step11 Train the customer for operations and simple troubleshooting About 4 H
Step12 Reconfirm and check the analyzer and software, and perform About 1 H
5S on site
Step13 Other (such as LIS connection, signature and acceptance) About 1 H
Total About 14 H
8.2 Check before Installation

8.2.1 Installation Environment
 Altitude:-400～2,000m
 The system is for indoor use only.
 The bearing platform (or ground) should be level (with gradient less than 1/200).
 The bearing platform (or ground)should be able to support at least 100Kg weight.
 The installation site should be well ventilated.
 The installation site should be free of dust.
 The installation side should not be in direct sun.
 The installation site should be kept away from a heat or draft source.
 The installation site should be free of corrosive gas and flammable gas.
 The bearing platform (or ground) should be free of vibration.
 The installation site should be kept away from large noise and power supply interference.
 Keep the system away from brush-type motors and electrical contact device that is frequently switched on
and off.
 Do not use such devices as mobile phones and radio transmitter near the system.
 Operating temperature: 15°C-30°C with fluctuation <2°C/H.
 Relative humidity: 35%-85%, without condensation.
 Provide air conditioning equipment if the room temperature does not meet the requirements.
 Install the equipment near a sewer for convenient discharging of waste liquid.
 Dimensions before packing: 690mm(length)×580mm(depth)×595mm(height)
 Dimensions after packing: 825mm(length)×695mm(depth)×795mm(height)
8.2.2 Configuration Check
 BS-230 analyzer
 Packing list of accessory kit
 Packing list of ISE accessory kit (for ISE module only)
8.3 Installation Requirements
8.3.1 Space and Accessibility Requirements for Installation

Wall
Minimum 500
Maximum 3000
Minimum 500
Operation Unit
708
Analyzer
Minimum 500
1180
Front
Unit: mm
Minimum 500
Figure 8-1 System Clearance
8.3.2 Power Supply and Noise

 Power supply: 220V: 220-230V~ 50Hz, 220/230V~ 60Hz; 110V: 110/115V~ 60Hz. Voltage fluctuation: +/-
10%. Line frequency: +/-3Hz. Three-wire power cord with good grounding performance (ground voltage ≤
5V).
 The instrument should be powered by a properly-grounded power supply no less than 3000VA, and the
mains socket used to connect the instrument should have its load no less than 10A.
 Keep the instrument at least 2.5m away from the main socket.
 If you are going to use a UPS to power the instrument, make sure that the UPS can provide power supply
greater than or equal to 3000VA/2100W.
WARNING
 Make sure the power socket is grounded correctly. Incorrect grounding may lead to electric shock or
equipment damage.
 Measurement of ground voltage:
 First confirm that the neutral and ground wires cannot be shorted,set the multimeter to the AC 250V scale,
connect the black probe to the earth wire and the red probe to the live wire and neutral wire. If grounding
is proper, the voltage between earth wire and neutral wire should be less than 5V, and the voltage between
earth wire and live wire should be similar to that between live wire and neutral wire.
 Check if the power socket outputs voltage meet the specified requirements and has a proper fuse installed.
8.3.3 Water Supply and Drainage

 Water quality: resistance no less than 1 (MΩ.cm@25°C) and conductance no more than 1μS/cm.
 Water temperature: 5-32°C.
 The 15L DI water tank is provided for holding DI water.
 DI water tank is placed on the ground. The tube must not be twisted or pulled too tight in case the tube falls
off the connector.
 The analyzer discharges low-concentration waste to the sewer or the low concentration waste tank. Follow
the local regulations for waste discharge.
 When Low-concentration waste is discharged to a sewer, the diameter of the discharge outlet must be no
less than 50mm and the height of the discharge outlet must be no higher than 100mm.
 The low-concentration waste tube must be shorter than 5m. The tube must be routed from high to low
smoothly without U shape or V shape twists or turns otherwise the waste liquid may flow back into the
instrument. Refer to the figure below.

Waste outlet Waste outlet Waste outlet
Waste tank Waste tank Waste tank
Waste outlet Waste outlet Waste outlet
Discharge outlet Discharge outlet Discharge outlet
Biohazards
Dispose of liquid waste according to the local regulations.
CAUTION
The supplied water must meet the requirements of water quality; otherwise, unqualified water may result in
incorrect test results.
8.3.4 Computer Requirements

Refer to 6.2.1 Computer Requirements (for International Customers).
8.4 Installing the Analyzer
8.4.1 Unpacking
1) Please check the packing list before unpacking, including: biochemical host, accessory box, deionized
water tank(15L), waste tank(15L), ISE module accessory box (optional ISE).
Note: The checklist of the packing list is recorded in the BS230 Installation Acceptance Report,
see Appendix A.1 BS-230 Installation Acceptance Report.
2) The main unit of the biochemical analyzer weighs about 70 kg. You are recommended to use the
forklift to remove it from the truck. Check whether the anti-dumping indicator of the main box becomes
red (if so, the analyzer may be dumped).

Figure 8-2 Anti-dumping indicator of main unit box

3) Use a flat-blade screwdriver to tilt the metal piece and remove the upper cover and side cover.
Figure 8-3 Remove the main unit box

4) Remove the screw with a wrench and remove the fixed angle iron so that the machine can be lifted.
Figure 8-4 Remove the fixed angle iron

The fixed angles and screws under removal are as shown below:

Figure 8-5 the L fixing angle iron
5) Lift the main unit and place it on the bracket to ensure that the leveling feet of the main unit fit the
grooves in the bracket.
Figure 8-6 The leveling feet of the main unit fit the grooves in the bracket
8.4.2 Removing Packaging

1) Open the protective cover of the biochemical analyzer, and remove the tape and shock absorbing
foam on the face shell.
2) Properly save the parameter configuration table(Parameter list) attached to the reagent carousel. The
parameter configuration table contains the factory-corrected parameter information. If any parameter
is missing or changed, you can refer to this table to modify the parameter. (Recommended to take a
photo of it and save it in the hard disk of the client computer).
8.4.3 Installing Accessories
Remove the packaging and plastic from the countertop of the biochemical analyzer. Take out the probe package
from the accessory box. Take out the white washer in the package, moisten it with water, and place it in the
metal connector of the probe.

Note: Keep the washer

carefully. If it is lost,
there is a spare washer
in the accessory box.
Figure 8-7 Install the washer of the probe
Installing the probe

1) Before installing the probe, remove the arm cover; loosen the screw that fix the probe by hand and take it
out.
If you cannot
loosen the
fixing screw
of the probe,
you can use
a flat-blade
screwdriver.
Figure 8-8 Remove the arm cover; loosen the screw that secure the probe
2) Insert the probe through probe hole on the arm of the probe, and align the hole on the shutter of the probe
to the column in the arm cavity.
3) Check again that the washer is inside the metal connector of the probe. If so, align the tube connector with
the connector of the probe and tighten it clockwise. If not, find it and install it in the metal connector before
connection.

Figure 8-1 Connect the metal connector of the probe

4) Make sure that the shutter of the probe is in the middle of the black sensor (on the Liquid level detection
board). If it is not in the middle position, check if the shutter is deformed, if so, correct it, and then insert the
plug connected to the end of the probe into the J1 connector socket of the Liquid level detection board.
Figure 8-9 Confirm the shutter of the probe in the middle of the sensor and connect the plug
5) Insert the spring into the column in the arm cavity and tighten the screw compression spring.

Figure 8-10 Tighten the screw of the probe

6) Pinch the probe by the part near the probe arm. Push the probe upwards and then release it to check if the
spring works well, and if the probe can rebound in place. If it does, proceed to the next step. If not, check
if the spring is clamped or the screw fixed too tightly, and troubleshoot.
Note: Do not press on or break the tube of the probe, and do not interfere with the rebound of the probe.
Figure 8-11 Check if the probe works well

7) After the installation is complete, turn on the main power switch and the analyzer switch, and observe that
the LED orange lamp numbered D2 on the circuit board in the probe arm flashes, indicating that the level
detection system is normal.
Note: Do not install the arm cover at this time. After waiting for the fluidic system priming, confirm that there is
no leakage at the connector of the fluidic system, and then install the arm cover, and then perform step 8.
8) Pinch the probe by the part near the probe arm. Push the probe upwards and then release it to check if the
probe works well. If it does, proceed to the next step. It not, it indicates that the arm cover is not installed
correctly. Reinstall the arm cover and check the probe until it can move freely.

Installing the mixer

1) Take out the mixer from the accessory box and raise the mixer arm to the vertical top.
2) Screw the mixer vertically from one end of the large hole of the retaining screw until the end
surface of the mixer is flush with the end surface of the small hole of the retaining screw.
3) Install the mixer mounting hole at the uppermost end of the mixer motor shaft. Pay attention
that the close cooperation between the mounting hole and the motor shaft.
4) Tighten the mixer retaining screw clockwise and visually check that the mixer is vertical with
a straight reference, such as a ruler. If it is not vertical, reinstall it.
Note: If the retaining screw cannot be tightened by hand, you are recommended to use a
Monkey spanner and a Nipper pliers to fix it, but care must be taken not to over-force,
otherwise the motor shaft may be damaged.
5) After installing the mixer, confirm whether it is fixed firmly. Pull the mixer down by hand. If it
is not loosened, the installation is OK. If it falls off, re-fix it.
Keep the
sections flush.
Rotate the retaining screw clockwise.
Figure 8-12 Install the mixer
Check the Syringe

Check if the fixing screw of the syringe are loose, if so, loosen the screw and tighten.
Figure 8-13 Check the fixing screw of the syring
8.4.4 Connect the pipeline

1) Fill the DI water tank with DI water.
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 8-10

Note: If the client wants to connect directly to the water unit, skip this step.
2) Use the 2 filters configured in the accessory box to connect the connector of the DI water tank. The
filter is installed in the tube between the DI water tank and the analyzer inlet, about 150 - 300 mm from
the end of the tube at the connection end of the analyzer inlet. After the filter is connected, the ends
are fastened with a clamp or a tie (for a tube with a severely deformed end, the end should be cut
about 5 mm); the tube should be inserted into the root of the connector. Note: The filter connector is
not oriented.
Note: If the client is connected directly to the water unit, please connect the outlet of the water unit
directly to the water inlet of the analyzer with a tube, and install a filter in the middle of the tube.
Figure 8-14 Install the filters

3) For the filter connecting with the connector of the DI water tank, place one end of the installed level
sensor into the DI water tank, respectively, screw the screw cap, and connect the other end of the tube
respectively to the DI water interface, and connect them with the corresponding sensor interfaces;
install the low-concentration waste tube.
4) If the analyzer is equipped with an ISE module, first remove the panel electrolyte plug of the ISE
sample port, remove the back plate, and put on the peristaltic pump tubes (3). The directions of the
tubes are as shown below.
Figure 8-15 Install the peristaltic pump tubes

ISE reagent package installation
Open the small door on the left side of the instrument and remove the packaging foam and tape that
secures the ISE reagent pack reader.
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 8-11

Figure 8-16 Remove the packaging foam of ISE

Install the reagent package reader as shown below. When the installation is in place, you will hear the
sound, and ensure that the reader is installed in place. Otherwise, an alarm such as “ISE
communication error” will appear
Figure 8-17 Install the reagent package reader

After the analyzer is installed, the correct tube connections are as follows:
Fluidic Port Panel
Low-conc.
DI water DI water waste outlet
inlet1 inlet2
Low-level floater
Deionized water
FL01
Figure 8-18 Fluidic Port Panel
8.4.5 Connecting the Overall System

1) If a UPS is equipped, install the UPS and connect it to the UPS ground.
2) Connect the power cords and data cables of the main unit of the biochemical analyzer, the computer,
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 8-12

the printer, and the monitor. Be careful not to turn on the switch first.
3) Connect the serial cable of the computer and the main unit of the biochemical analyzer. Note that the
PC and the biochemical analyzer are connected by serial port, and the COM1 port on the PC is
selected.
8.4.6 Setting the PC
Please set the PC according to section 6.2 Computer Settings.
8.4.7 Software Installation
1) Install the latest version of the operating software, please refer to 6.3 Installation of Operating Software
for the specific installation steps.
2) Upgrade the control system. Please refer to 6.4.3 Upgrading Control System .
Note: If the software has not been updated after the analyzer is delivered, only the first step should be
performed when the analyzer is installed.
8.4.8 Starting up the System
1) Turn on the main power switch and the analyzer power switch.
2) Start the computer. The Workstation operating software is run automatically when the Windows is
started. You are also allowed to run the operating software by selecting the shortcut icon on the
desktop or in the Start menu. See the figure below. The system skips the initialization procedure when
detecting that the fluidic prime is not performed. Enter the username “ServiceUser” and password
“#BS8A#SEU” in the login window.
Figure 8-19 startup screen
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 8-13

Figure 8-20 login screen

3) When the main screen is shown, select Utility -> System Setup -> Factory F2. Select 1 Optional
Modules, enable/disable ISE module, sample bar code and reagent bar code, and then select OK.
See the figure below:
Note that for closed models, make sure that " Enable/disable Reagent Bar Code " is checked
Figure 8-21 optional Modules window
8.4.9 Aligning the Analyzer

Confirm the position of the analyzer during installation of the new analyzer to avoid deviations in the position of
the analyzer during transportation or other conditions.
1) First, back up the parameters of the analyzer unit. For details, please refer to 6.7.3 Unit
parameter Backup.
2) Enter the Utility-Alignment screen.
3) Please follow the table below for alignment. For details, please refer to the index in the
reference.
Contents to be Checked and Reference
Aligned
Alignment of rotation positions of 7.4 Sample/Reagent carousel unit
reagent carousel and reaction carousel
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 8-14

Positions of the probe to wash well, 7.5 Probe unit

reagent carousel, and reaction carousel,
which is in the center of sample/cuvette
Positions of mixer to wash well and 7.6 Mixer Unit
reaction carousel, which is in the center
of wash well and cuvette
Syringe Check Requirements: The syringe has no
abnormal noise and no leakage, the fixing
screws are not loosened, and there is no
alarm during the test
Position of barcode scanner and 7.7 Bar Code Unit (Optional)
stability test (optional)
If there are no fixtures on site, refer to Appendix A.2 BS-230 Moving Parts Position Confirmation Guide (No
Alignment Tooling) for alignment.
8.4.10 Aligning the ISE (Optional)
If the analyzer is equipped with an ISE module, please align the ISE by referring to 14.2.3 Alignment of the ISE
module.
8.4.11 Prime the fluidic system
Prime the fluidic system for the newly installed analyzer by referring to 7.8.4 Fluidic Prime.
8.4.12 Initial Maintenance Record
Select Utility -> Maintenance -> Maintenance to display the maintenance window. Confirm all scheduled
maintenance procedures and set up start time for them. The maintenance frequencies include Daily, Weekly,
Two-Week, Monthly, Three-Month, Six-Month, and Other. Select the Select All button on each maintenance
frequency tab page, and then select OK. The current date and time appears in the Date Performed column of
each maintenance procedure as shown in the figure below.
Figure 8-22 Scheduled Maintenance screen
8.4.13 Startup Initialization

When the fluidic prime is finished, exit the operating software and reboot the computer. The operating software
is automatically run and starts initializing. When the login window is displayed, enter the user name “Admin”
and password “#Admin”.
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 8-15

Figure 8-23 Login screen

After entering the operating software, wait for the instrument to incubate for a period of time and then enter the
standby, perform the next step.
If the ISE module is selected,load ISE reagent on the Reagent/Calibration screen.
8.4.14 Importing and Configuring Chemistry Parameters of Mindray
Reagents
1) Select Utility -> Chemistries -> Config, and select Options to display the Option window.
Figure 8-24 Select Import to display the Import window

2) Select Load Default to display all Mindray reagent chemistries in the left column. Select Add All to add
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 8-16

all chemistries to the right column. Select Import to import the parameters and then select Exit.
Figure 8-25 Import window

3) All Mindray reagent chemistries are displayed in the Available Chemistries column. You can delete
chemistries that will not be used in your laboratory.
Figure 8-26 Chemistry Configuration screen

4) Select OK to complete the chemistry configuration.
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 8-17

8.4.15 Running Water Test

Note: At present, the fully-sealed model (Close System 0 User-defined) is temporarily unable to perform the
running water test. This step cannot be performed and skipped.
1) Select Utility Chemistry Setup, Set a single-reagent chemistry "Water", with parameters
including: endpoint, positive reaction, primary wavelength 340nm, secondary wavelength
405nm, result unit U/L, decimal places of result 0.01, blank time (-9)-(-7), incubation time 0,
reaction time (13)-(22), sample volume 10, reagent volume R1:100.
Figure 8-27 Parameters of running water test

2) Load Wash D and Saline W.
Select Reagent Reagent/Calibration
 On No. 39 position of the reagent carousel, put CD80 Conc Wash.
 On No. 40 position of the reagent carousel, put physiological saline.
Load Wash D and Saline W on the reagent screen, as shown in the figure below.
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 8-18


Figure 8-28 Load Wash D and Saline W
3) Load the Water reagent.
In the sequence shown below, enter the Reagent/Calibration screen, select the reagent
position 1#, click Load, select the chemistry Water in the pop-up screen, and click Load.
Then click Exit, and click Load Complete. At the same time, fill the water reagent pack with
deionized water (not less than 10 ml) and place it in the 1# position of the reagent carousel.
(This manual takes 1# position as an example, and other positions can be selected in
practice)
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 8-19

Figure 8-29 Load the water reagent

4) Select Reagen Cal Setup Calibration Setup
On the window, select the chemistry "Water", specify the K factor math model with K factor
10000, select Save and exit the window
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 8-20

Figure 8-30 Water Calibration Setup

5) Sample preparation and application: In the sequence of the following figures, in the
Application screen, click the Water chemistry, then click Options, enter the number of
repetitions 40 in the pop-up Options dialog box, click OK to exit the current screen, and
click the OK button at the bottom right corner of the Application screen. Confirm that the
sample is placed at sample position 1 (not less than 1ml of deionized water), and then click
the Start Test button.
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 8-21

Figure 8-31 Apply for the running water test

6) Confirm the following item during the test:
 The mechanical movement of each assembly is normal, without abnormal alarms
(including optical, temperature control, mechanical, communication, etc.)
 The probe, mixer, and cuvette wash station are washed normally, without liquid hanging.
 The cuvette wash station will be jacked up after dropped to the bottom of the cuvetter
each time.
 The reaction curves of all the samples do not show periodic fluctuations or sharp convex
jump points, and the absolute value of the test result does not exceed 10.
8.5 Verifying Basic Performance
8.5.1 Checking System Status
1) Record the temperature and humidity of the working environment of the analyzer, the grid
voltage, the zero ground voltage, and the ambient atmospheric pressure in the BS-230
_Installation Acceptance Report.
2) In the operation software, select Utility Status, and record the temperature, hydro and
power status in BS-230 _Installation Acceptance Report.
8.5.2 Testing Movement Positioning Performance
1) Remove the reaction carousel cover, and the reagent carousel cover, and select
UtilityMaintenance Biochemistry MaintenanceHome, observe the movement of
the probe, the mixer and the two carousels. There should be no alarm prompt during the
whole procedure. The probe and the mixer should be centered in the wash well (the probe
positioned in the wash well should be aligned with the wash well outlet).
2) The vertical movement of the probe syringe is normal, without abnormal sound;
3) If any of the units is positioned abnormally, select UtilityMaintenanceAlignment, and
select the corresponding unit module to align the position parameters. The alignment result
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 8-22

is recorded in the BS-230_Installation Acceptance Report.

8.5.3 Testing Optical Performance
1) Select UtilityMaintenanceBiochemistry Maintenance Lamp background test.
The lamp background is within 48000-55000. If not, please check whether the installation
of the light source lamp is in place.
8.5.4 Testing Bar Code Performance
Select UtilityMaintenanceAlignmentSample/Reagent Bar CodeBar Code
Scanning Stability Test. Put a valid barcode (the installation reagent is carried with a
barcode, which can be placed in the sample/reagent carousel for scanning). The analyzer
can accurately read the barcode. Please refer to 7.7.5 Bar Code Stability Test.
8.5.5 Testing Clinical Performance
1) Select UtilityChemistry SetupConfigurationOptions, and import the default
chemistries.
2) Put the installed reagent, select Reagent Load to load the reagent at the
corresponding position. After the reagent loading is completed, be sure to click End
Load, otherwise other operations cannot be performed;
Select End Load after reagent

loading is completed.
Figure 8-32 Reload the reagent
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 8-23

3) Select Calibration Setup to add the calibration solution and set the calibration rules,
select the reagent item to perform Calibration Request, and click Run to perform the
calibration test. After the test is finished, Succeeded is displayed in Calibration Status.
If Failed is displayed, please check the reagent placement or calibrator preparation and
re-perform Calibration Request.
4) After the calibration test is completed, prepare 2 mL of fresh serum for the chemistry
request test, and the number of repetitions is 10. If the ISE module is selected, the
repeatability tests of K, Na, and Cl are also required. The test results are recorded in
BS-230_Installation Acceptance Report.
5) After the whole installation and alignment procedures are completed, train the
operators.
8.6 LIS Connection
If the client should be connected to the LIS, please refer to 12 LIS Connection Setting and Troubleshooting.
The LIS Protocol Manual (PDF version) is available in this way:
 Downloaded under the LIS directory on the TDP
8.7 Backing Up Data
After the analyzer is installed, you are recommended to back up the following data:
1) Back up the tested database file BA80.bak to the computer E drive. Refer to 6.7.1 Data backup.
2) Back up the aligned analyzer parameters to the computer E drive. Refer to 6.7.3 Unit parameter
Backup.
3) Keep the paper factory parameter list safely and take a photo of it to the computer E drive.
4) If the LIS is connected, save the screenshot of the LIS setup screen in the software to the computer
E drive. Refer to LIS Setting backup.
8.8 Handling Exceptions in Installation
 Logistics problems include missing accessory, package damage, and instrument damage. Generally,
this type of problems should be borne by the logistics company.
 Instrument allocation problems include mismatch of order with deliverables and nonconforming
accessory (for example, connection cable or shield cover) package. Generally, this type of problems
is solved by applying for new materials.
 Loose cable, great offset, and rack deformation problems. Generally, this type of problems is solved
by experienced engineers.
 If the instrument reproduces any error that is difficult to rectify or unacceptable to the customers, see
available strategies to handle the problem.
8.9 List of accessories and functions
Due to different instrument configurations, the list of accessories will vary. Please refer to the actual paper list.
Part Number Description Qty Remarks

0000-10-10916 Cleaning Tool 2 /
0040-10-32307 Washer for Probe 1 /
043-000644-00 20ml Reagent bottle (Brown) 20 /
043-002208-00 40ml Reagent bottle (Brown) 20 /
043-006855-00 20 ml reagent bottle 10 /
BA30-20-15117 Reagent bottle labeling 50 /
BA31-20-41536 Reagent bottle cap (white) 25 /
BA31-20-41640 Reagent bottle cap (red) 25 /
The standard code system supported by the
instrument is used for the sample/reagent
047-014851-00 standard bar code 1
barcode scanner scanning function test.
See Figure 8-33 Standard Bar Code.
046-008696-00 Parameter List 1 Factory default parameter configuration list
Crosshead Screwdriver Tools, remove the cover, replace the light
3001-10-07207 1
Φ4.7*100 source, etc.
DA8K-10-14454 European power cord 1 /
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 8-24

BA34-20-63652 serial communication cable 1 /

043-006816-00 Reaction cuvette(BA25) 2 Reaction cups, 5 cups eacht
043-000491-00 15L Plastic Tank 2 DI water tank and waste tank
115-037614-00 water bung module 1 The cap assembly of DI water tank
043-000422-00 filter 2 Inlet filter for DI water filtration
tube.Φ9.525XΦ15.875nature waste tube
082-000384-00 2
PVC 55~ 60°
Plug the sample hole on the reagent plate
cover to reduce condensation water, Need to
049-000398-00 Plastic Plug 3
inform the customer to take out before the
test.See Figure 8-34 Plastic Plug.
A90-000009--- 3×100mm cable tie 20 bundling of various wires and tubes
Deionized water/ diluted wash solution inlet
082-002374-00 Tube3.2*6.4mm TPU 2
tube, high-concentration waste tube
046-008979-00 BS-230 Operator's Manual (EN) 1 /
046-008981-00 BS-230 Operation Card (EN) 1 /
BS-230 Maintenance Card /
046-008983-00 1
（EN)
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 8-25

Figure 8-33 Standard Bar Code
Figure 8-34 Plastic Plug

9 Preventive maintenance
9.1 Overview
9.1.1 Preventive maintenance
Preventive maintenance is a preventive measure taken by service personnel of Mindray or authorized by
Mindray with the aim of eliminating hidden troubles to ensure system reliability and achieve best performance
during operation. The Preventive maintenance cycle for the chemistry analyzer is one year and for ISE module,
half a year. The maintenance includes changing, cleaning or checking the parts as shown in the table below.
Table 9-1 Maintenance items to be performed by service personnel
Category Procedure When to do
Replacement Item Replacing Lamp 2000 hours,or more than 6
months
Replace Water Inlet Filter More than 1 year
Replace Diluted Wash Solution More than 1 year
Filter
Replace Syringe over 100,000 times
Replace Calibrator Tube(ISE More than 1 year
configured)
Replace Pump Tube(ISE More than half year
configured)
Replace the ISE electrode(ISE More than 6 months or
configured) over 10,000 tests
Replace Probe Washer More than 1 year
Clean Item Clean Dust Screens When needed
Clean the dust of the heatsink When needed
fan
Clean Wash Well When needed
Clean ISE Injection Port (ISE When needed
Configured)
Clean DI Water Tank When needed
Clean Sample/Reagent When needed
Compartment
Clean Analyzer Panels When needed
Clean Probe Exterior When needed
Clean Mixers When needed
Check Item Pump Calibration (ISE When needed
Configured)
Air Bubble Detector When needed
Calibration(ISE configured)
Lamp Background Test When needed
9.1.2 Biochemistry maintenance commands
Table 9-2 Biochemistry maintenance commands
Biochemistry Usage Execution time

maintenance
command
Home Reset the probe, mixer and wash station, and Check probe/mixer/wash well,Clean
clean the probe and mixer. probe interior,Replace probe,Replace
mixer,Clean wash wells,Special wash
probe
Clean Reset the probe and mixer mechanically to return Check probe/mixer/wash well
probes/mixers/wash them to the wash position.
wells
Clean probes Remove air bubbles possibly existing in the After maintenance of probe and wash

Biochemistry Usage Execution time

maintenance
command
interior tubes, and clean the probe and wash well. wells
Special wash Use concentrated wash solution to clean the Special wash probe
probes probe in order to eliminate cross contamination.
Clean Remove air bubbles possibly existing in the After maintenance of probe and wash
probes/mixers tubes, and clean the probe and wash well. wells
exterior
Replace lamp Replace the lamp. Replace lamp
Lamp Background Check the light intensity of the lamp. Lamp error or if needed
test
Lamp Background Inquire current background AD value and dark If needed
and Dark Current current AD value.
Query
Figure 9-1 Biochemistry maintenance commands
9.1.3 ISE maintenance commands

Table 9-3 ISE maintenance commands
ISE maintenance command Usage Execution time

Two-point calibration Calibrate the ISE module with calibrators When needed
A and B.
Clean electrode tubes Clean the electrode tubes with ISE wash Clean electrode tubes
solution to remove the materials on the
electrode surface.
Pump calibration Calibrate the peristaltic pump to ensure Pump calibration
accurate test result.

ISE maintenance command Usage Execution time

Maintenance Discharge the calibrator from the When needed Or automatically
electrode inside before electrode executed during "Clean sample
replacement. injection port" and "Replace
electrode"
Air bubble detector calibration Calibrate the air bubble detector to Air bubble detector calibration
ensure good sensitivity.
Purge A Dispense 100 μL calibrator A to the When needed Or automatically
inside of the electrodes through the executed during " Clean sample
sample injection port. injection port", "Replace electrode"
and "Unload reagent pack"
Purge B Dispense 100 μL calibrator B to the When needed Or automatically
inside of the electrodes through the executed during " Clean sample
sample injection port. injection port", "Replace electrode"
and "Unload reagent pack"
Replace electrode Replace the ISE electrodes. Replace electrode
Replace tubes of pump and Replace the aging tubes of the peristaltic Used by service engineers to
calibrator pump and calibrator. replace the tubes of pump and
calibrator
Unload reagent pack Remove the reagent pack and empty the Remove reagent pack
tubes.
Program check View the software version of the ISE When needed
module.
Air bubble detector calibration View the result of air bubble detector After performance of "Air bubble
result calibration. detector calibration"
Pump calibration result View the result of pump calibration. After performance of "Pump
calibration"
Write dallas chip Write information on the Dallas chip. When needed
Read dallas chip Read the information on the Dallas chip. When needed
Store Electrodes Remove the electrodes and store them When needed
Clean Sample Injection Port Clean the sample injection port When needed

Figure 9-2 ISE maintenance commands
9.2 Maintenance Tools

Table 9-4 Maintenance Tools
Name Applicable Maintenance
Philips-head screwdriver φ3.3×100 Removing the system enclosure
and the cooling fans
Philips-head screwdriver φ4.7×100 Installing and removing the
probes and lamp
Slot-head screwdriver φ4.7×100 Removing probe and pipe hoop
Round-head cleaning tool, 0.25+/- Unclogging the probes
0.01mm*125mm round tip
Hair brush Cleaning filter core and dust
screens
Gauze clean probe/mixer exterior and
sample/reagent compartment
Cotton swabs Clean Wash Well
Suction cleaner Cleaning fans and dust screens
Tweezers Removing/Installing probes and
syringe washers
Pipette clean ISE sample injection port

Ethanol Cleaning probes, mixers

CD 80 Clean Wash Well
9.3 Maintenance Procedure

9.3.1 Procedure
Among the Preventive maintenance items, some of them are performed with the main power switched off, while
the other are performed through the maintenance window on the operating software, where maintenance logs
are recorded. To improve the efficiency and shorten the field maintenance time, you are recommended to follow
the procedure below:
Table 9-5 Execution order of maintenance items
No Procedure Maintenance Tools Operations
1 Clean Analyzer Panels Ethanol and gauze Wipe
2 Clean Dust Screens Hair brush, suction cleaner Remove dust
3 Clean the dust of the Hair brush, suction cleaner Remove dust
heatsink fan
4 Replace Water Inlet Filter Filter 043-000422-00 Replace
5 Clean DI Water Tank / Washing
6 Replace Syringe Syringe801-BA23-00025-00 Replace
7 Replace Probe Washer Washer 0040-10-32307 Replace
8 Replace Pump Tube(ISE Pump Tube801-BA34-00105-00 Replace
configured)
9 Replace Calibrator Calibrator Tube Replace
Tube(ISE configured) 801-BA34-00106-00
10 Clean Probe Exterior Ethanol and gauze Wipe
11 Clean Mixers Ethanol and gauze Wipe
12 Clean Wash Well CD80 and cotton swabs Wipe
13 Clean Sample/Reagent Ethanol, gauze, cotton swab Disassemble and wipe
Compartment
14 Clean ISE Injection Port Ethanol and cotton swab Wipe
(ISE Configured)
15 Pump Calibration (ISE / Execute
Configured)
16 Air Bubble Detector / Execute
Calibration(ISE configured)
17 Lamp Background Test Execute
9.3.2 Steps
Clean Analyzer Panels
1) Open the upper protective shield of the analyzer,see Figure 3-1 Shells assembly .
2) Use clean gauze moistened with ethanol to clean the analyzer panels and carousel covers.
3) Use wash solution to clean the monitor screen and keyboard.
4) Restore the upper protective shield.
5) After maintenance, open the logs and record related information.

Figure 9-3 maintenance list and logs
Clean Dust Screens

1) Switch off the analyzer power.
2) Pull the handle of the dust screen to remove it.See Figure 3-3 Frame assembly.
3) Tidy and clean the dust screens,refer to 3.2.3 Replacing Front and Rear Dust Screens.
4) Dry the dust screens in air.
5) Restore the dust screens in place.
Clean the dust of the heatsink fan

1) Refer to 3.1.8 Remove the dust from the fans for cleaning dust of the fans.

Replace Water Inlet Filter(2)

1) Check the maintenance log and when the inlet filter maintenance interval is more than 1
year, change it.
2) Refer to Removing/Reinstalling Filter for the removing and installing steps.
Clean DI Water Tank

1) Remove the tank connector, clean the tank with deionized water, and connect the water
outlet of the tank.
Replace Syringe
1) Check the using count of the syringe on the status screen. When the syringe has been used
for 100,000times, change it.
2) Prepare a new syringe plunger assembly and washer, put the plunger head in the deionized
water beaker to remove air from the syringe, and then moisten the washer in the deionized
water.
4) Loosen the screw on the shield of the syringe.
5) Loosen counterclockwise the retaining screw at the bottom of the syringe and then remove
it.
6) Loosen counterclockwise the four retaining screws on top of the syringe, and then remove
the screws and the fixing blocks
7) Hold the T piece with one hand and the syringe connector with the other hand. Loosen the
syringe counterclockwise. And then remove the washer.
8) Soak the new syringe connector in the deionized water beak, pull gently the plunger head
to aspirate half syringe of deionized water, and then push the plunger head to remove the
air.
9) If no washer is found in the T piece, put the new washer in the T piece. Hold the T piece
with one hand and the syringe connector with the other hand, and then screw the T piece
clockwise.
10) Install the syringe on the bracket.
11) Install the fixing blocks and 4 retaining screws while having the retaining screws not
tightened.
12) Pinch the plunger guide cap to adjust the syringe height. Make the syringe head over the
upper fixing block for 7.5 scales.
13) Tighten the four retaining screws on the fixing blocks.
14) Align the plunger head to the retaining screw at the bottom of the syringe, and then tighten
clockwise the retaining screw.
15) After finishing replacement, switch on the analyzer power.
16) Perform the Home maintenance procedure. Check the new syringe for leak and bubbles.
If leak occurs, check the syringe and the connector.
17) Tighten the syringe shield.
18) The procedure is completed. Write the maintenance log and input the maintenance
information and clear the using count of the syringe.
Cleaning probe interior

When to do
Perform this procedure when you find that the probe is clogged and cannot aspirate or dispense
sample and reagent, or when the probe is detected with abnormal liquid flow during the "Checking
probe/mixer/wash well" maintenance.
Materials required
Unclogging device (or probe), small slot-head screwdriver, small Philips-head screwdriver, beaker,
tweezers, deionized water, and thread syringe
How to do

1) To remove the probe,refer to 3.5.4 Replacing probe assembly，Anti-collision spring and powder screws.
2) To clean the probe
a) Connect the unclogging device to the probe.
b) Fill the syringe with deionized water and then connect it to the unclogging device.
c) Put the probe inside the beaker while keeping the probe tip not contacting the
beaker.
d) Push the syringe to rinse the interior of the probe. Repeat this step for 10 times.
e) If the syringe plunger leaks and the probe cannot be unclogged due to serious
blockage, replace the probe.
f) Check if continuous water flow comes out of the probe in the same direction with
the probe. If it does, it indicates the cleaning procedure is finished successfully.
g) If water flow is still abnormal after unclogging, replace the probe with a new one.
h) Remove the unclogging device.
3) To install the probe,refer to3.5.4 Replacing probe assembly，Anti-collision spring and powder screws.
4) To check the probe,refer to3.5.4 Replacing probe assembly，Anti-collision spring and powder screws.
Replace Probe Washer

1) Check the maintenance log. When the probe washer has been used for 1 year and change
it.
2) Remove the probe and its washer.
3) Install the washer and install back the probe.
4) Run the operating software, and select Utility-Maintenance-Maintenance- Biochemistry
Maintenance and then select Probe interior clean and prime.
Replace Pump Tube (ISE configured)

1) Check the maintenance log. When Pump Tube has been used for half year, change it.
2) Refer to 3.8.4 Replacing Pump Tube for replacing Pump Tube.
Replace Calibrator Tube (ISE configured)

1) View the maintenance log. When the Calibrator Tube has been used for more than 1 year,
change it.
2) Refer to3.8.5 Replacing Calibrator Tube for Replace Calibrator Tube.
Replace ISE electrode(ISE configured)

1) View the maintenance log. When the Ref electrode has been used for more than 6 moths,
and K,Na,Cl electordes are used for 6 months or 10,000 tests,change it.
2) Refer to 3.8.6 Replacing ISE electrode for repalcing ISE electrode.
Clean Probe Exterior

2) Lift gently the probe to the utmost height and move it to the position convenient for
maintenance.
3) Use gauze soaked with ethanol to gently wipe the probe exterior. Clean the probe tip until it
becomes clear without stain. Use gauze moistened with deionized water to clear the ethanol
on the probe. Do not pull the probe vertically to prevent probe damage.
4) After the procedure, restore the upper protective shield of the analyzer. Power on the
analyzing unit and select Home.

Clean Mixers
2) Lift gently the mixer to the utmost height and move it to the position convenient for
maintenance.
3) Use gauze soaked with ethanol to gently wipe the mixer exterior. Clean it until it becomes
clear without stain. Use gauze moistened with deionized water to clear the ethanol on the
mixer. Do not pull the mixer vertically to prevent probe damage.
4) After the procedure, restore the upper protective shield of the analyzer. Power on the
analyzing unit and select Home.
Clean Wash Well

2) Move the probe and mixer away from the wash well for the convenience of maintenance.
3) Use clean cotton swabs moistened with CD80 to clean the wash wells.
4) After the procedure, switch on the analyzer power.
5) Execute Home command or Check Probes/Mixers/Wash Wells maintenance command.
Check if the wash wells have a normal water flow.
Clean Sample/Reagent Compartment

1) The analyzing unit should be powered off, or in failure mode or in standby or incubation
status.
2) Remove the carousel cover and carousel, and then store them properly.
3) Use clean gauze soaked with deionized water or ethanol to clean the interior of the
compartment. If necessary, you can use gauze moistened with neutral wash solution.
4) Use clean gauze soaked with deionized water or ethanol to clean the carousel body and
bar code scanning window, and then use cotton swabs dipped with ethanol to clean the
sample or reagent positions.
5) Install the carousel and the carousel cover.
Clean ISE Injection Port (ISE Configured)

1) Make sure that the system status is Incubation or Standby.
2) Enter ISE maintenance screen and select Clean ISE injection port.
3) Open the upper protective shield of the analyzer.
4) Open the cover of the ISE module on the analyzer’s front panel.
5) Use clean cotton swab soaked with ethanol to wipe the sample injection port (interior of the
sample injection cup of the ISE module ) until it is clean; then use a clean cotton swab
soaked with DI water to wipe the interior and periphery of the sample injection port.
6) Enter the ISE Maintenance window and execute purge A and purge B each for three times.
7) Restore the cover of the ISE module on the analyzer’s front panel. Restore the upper
protective shield of the analyzer.
Pump Calibration (ISE Configured)

1) Make sure that the system status is Incubation or Standby.
2) Enter ISE maintenance screen and click Pump Calibration.
3) Fill a sample cup with at least 500μL DI water, and place it in No.40 position of the sample
carousel.
4) Continue the procedure until it is completed.
5) After the procedure is completed, the calibration results are displayed. If calibration is
successful, the procedure is completed. If not, ISE enters error status.

Air Bubble Detector Calibration (ISE configured)

1) Ensure ISE is standby.
2) Enter ISE maintenance screen, and select Air Bubble Detector Calibration. The procedure
is performed automatically.
3) After the procedure is completed, the calibration results are displayed. If calibration is
successful, the procedure is completed. If not, ISE enters error status.
Lamp Background Test

1) Select Utility-Maintenance-Maintenance- Biochemistry Maintenance and then select
"Lamp Background Test".
2) Failed test result indicates weak light intensity and the lamp needs to be replaced.
Check Probes/Mixers Exterior Wash Flow

1) Open the upper cover of the analyzer and home the system.
2) Select Utility -> Maintenance -> Maintenance, then select Biochemistry Maintenance.
3) Select Probes/Mixers Exterior, and then select Continue.
4) Liquid flows out of the probe and mixer wash well automatically. Observe the liquid flow of the wash
wells. The liquid in the mixer wash well should flow out of the its center and form a convex with a
height of 1-2mm.
Figure 9-4 Check Probes/Mixers Exterior Wash Flow

5) Repeat the above steps for at least three times to check if the probe/mixer flow is normal. If not, check
if the exterior wash tubing is abnormal (Check first if the restrictor ring at the exterior wash valve outlet
is clogged). Check the flow again.
6) Select Done.
7) Close the maintenance window.
9.4 Post-maintenance Check
Check after maintenance according to the contents of the A.5 BS-230 Series Recovery Checklist.
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 9-10

10 Troubleshooting
This chapter describes how to locate failure and determine relevant corrective actions.
10.1 Overview
10.1.1 Classification of logs
The fault log records all types of faults that occur with various parts of the instrument. All faults are classified by
part as shown in the following table.
Table 10-1 faul classification
No. Item. No. Item.

1 Operating system 11 Reaction carousel unit
2 Instrument connection 12 Sample/reagent carousel
unit
3 Database 13 Wash station
4 Result calculation 14 Temperature unit
5 Sample bar code 15 Probe Interior Wash Unit
6 Reagent bar code 16 ISE unit
7 Host communication 17 Light source
8 Instrument instruction 18 Other error of operation
unit
9 Sample probe unit 19 Home Process
10 Mixer unit
Error logs
Each error has a unit code used for identification and locating probable causes and solutions. An error code
consists of 6 letters and numbers, such as "C01001", in which "C" indicates that the error occurs on the operation
unit, "01" is the error description of instrument connection, and "001" is the serial number of the error. Therefore,
"C01001" is described as "the first error of instrument connection on the operation unit".
The following tables provide a summary of error codes for the operation unit and analyzing unit.
Table 10-2 Error code of the operation unit
Error Code Description

C Indicates that the error occurs on the operation unit.
00～99 Indicates the specific component on which the error occurs.
00-Operating system
01- System communication
02-Database
03-Result calculation
04-Sample bar code
05-Reagent bar code
06-LIS host communication
07-Other
000～999 Serial number of the error.
Table 10-3 Error code of the analyzing unit
Error Code Description

A Indicates that the error occurs on the analyzing unit.
00～99 Indicates the specific component on which the error occurs.
00-Command execution
01/02-Probe unit
05-Mixer
06-Reaction carousel unit
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 10-1

07-Sample /reagent carousel unit

11-Wash unit
12-Temperature unit
21-Probe interior wash unit
22-Home process or ISE unit
000～999 Serial number of the error
10.1.2 Viewing and handling logs
Description of Error Log screen

Select Alarm in the function buttons area of the main screen. The Error Log screen is displayed by default and
shows all errors occurring on the current day.
Figure 10-1 Error Log screen

Every error log contains the event ID, date/time, error description (by processing method), event class (by
subsystem) and symptom.
Choose the following buttons as needed:
 Search F1: to search for error logs by date, event ID, symptom, or event class.
 Refresh F2: to refresh the error logs based on the current search conditions.
 Delete F3: to remove specified error logs on the screen.
 Print F7: to print all error logs currently displayed on the screen.
Recalling logs
Error logs can be recalled by all users in any system status. Error logs can be recalled by date, event ID,
symptom and event class.
Perform the following steps to recall desired event logs:
1) Select Alarm > Error Log .
2) Select Search F1.
3) Enter one or more of the following conditions:
 Date
 Event ID (available for error logs only)
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 10-2

 Symptom (available for error logs only)

 Event class (available for error logs only)
4) Select OK. The event logs satisfying the conditions are displayed on the screen.
5) Choose the following buttons as needed:
 Refresh F2: to refresh the logs based on the current search conditions.
 Delete F3: to remove specified logs on the screen.
 Print F7: to print all logs currently displayed on the screen.
10.1.3 Error Troubleshooting
When an error occurs, it will be indicated in many ways. The following pages describe how to troubleshoot
errors and help you determine solutions to such errors.
Generally, troubleshooting is divided into the following steps:
 An error occurs and is indicated in various ways.
 Check the error logs and component status.
 Identify the error and determine relevant solutions.
 Implement the solutions.
 Check and evaluate the implementation of the solutions.
Error indications
Errors may occur on hardware, software and the entire system. When an error occurs, it will be indicated in
many ways to help identify it and determine the possible causes and solutions. Errors can be indicated by
alarm tone, alarm message, color, alarm message box, result flag and error log, through which you will obtain
detailed information about errors and find the relevant solutions.
Alarm tone
When an error occurs, the buzzer gives alarm tone reminding you to notice the error and take corrective actions.
Alarm tone can be adjusted manually or silenced.
Perform the following steps to adjust the alarm tone:
1) Select Utility > System Setup.
2) Adjust the alarm tone in the Alarm Volume field.
3) Test the alarm tone until it is satisfied.
4) To silence the alarm tone, drag the slider to the leftmost position of the scale.
5) Select Save F8 to save the adjustment.
Alarm message
When an error occurs, the system gives an alarm and displays the alarm message in the second line of the
prompt message area.
Color highlight
An error will be indicated by highlighting relevant buttons and screen texts with different colors. Yellow indicates
a warning, and red indicates a serious warning or error.
 Reagent button
 Utility button
 Alarm button
Select a button to access relevant function page, check for abnormities and take corrective actions. When the
problem is solved, the alarm indication disappears.
Alarm message box
An error can also be shown in an alarm message box, which contains the date/time, event ID, time(s) and help
icon.
Errors that are indicated through an alarm message box are divided into the following types:
 Common error: including those that are indicated by warning the user, and by invalidating tests,
reagents and samples. When such error occurs, the alarm message box shows with the title bar
highlighted in yellow.
 Serious error: including those except for the common error. When such error occurs, the alarm
message box shows with the title bar highlighted in red, and you are only allowed to reboot or exit the
system.
When an alarm message box appears, select the Alarm button to view the new error logs, analyze the possible
causes and determine relevant corrective actions.
Flag
Flag is also called data alarm. When calibration error or failure, or sample result error occurs due to the sample,
reagent or system failure, a flag will appear near the corresponding calibration result or sample results.
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 10-3

Error log
All alarms are recorded in the error logs. By recalling the error logs you are enabled to master the current status
of the system and troubleshoot errors.
Identifying errors
To identify errors, understand the error indication thoroughly, check the error logs and system status, and then
determine relevant solutions.
The table below shows the error types that may occur on the system. Find relevant corrective actions according
to the description.
Table 10-4 Error types
Error Type Description

Instrument failure and Instrument failure and error may be detected on all
error subsystems and processed in different ways. Such errors
are shown in the Error messages and corrective actions
table, and can be identified through the event ID.
Data alarm Data alarm is a flag indicating biochemistry or ISE chemistry
result error. The flags are included in the Result flags table,
and can be identified through the flag symbol.
10.2 Common Troubleshooting

10.2.1 Database initializing failed
Symptom: Analyzer alarm database initializing failed
Fault Mechanism: this alarm is generated if the database cannot be initialized when the analyzer is turned on.
Fault Scenario: this alarm is generated when the software is turned on.
Figure 10-2 Database initializing failed alarm

Procedure:
1) Confirm that the current account of the system is the administrator account by referring to
6.2.8 Confirmation of Administrator Permission and UAC.
2) Select the software startup program, right-click Properties→Compatibility, and confirm that
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 10-4

Open in Compatibility View is not ticked.

3) Back up the database file Database. Please refer to 6.7.1 Data backup.
4) Enter the Database folder in the software installation directory.The default path:
5) D:\Mindray\BS230\OperationSoft\DataBase. Only keep the Backup folder. After the rest of
the files are deleted, start the software. If the operating software can be entered normally,
the current database file is wrong, if not, proceed to the next step.
6) Uninstall the SQL Database. Please refer to 6.6.2 SQL Database Uninstalling .
7) Reinstall the software. The software will automatically install the database during the
installation procedure. Refer to 6.3 Installation of Operating Software.
8) Reinstall the operating system. For domestic customers, please use the backup GHOST file
in the E drive for recovery.
9) Repeat step 6.
10.2.2 Database backup failed
Symptom: Analyzer alarm database backup failed
Fault Mechanism: It is generated if the database cannot be backed up when the analyzer is turned on.
Fault Scenario: this alarm is generated when the software is turned on.
Figure 10-3 Database backup failed alarm

Procedure:
1) Exit to the desktop with the engineer username and password
2) Go to the software installation directory, enter the Databasebase folder, enter the Backup folder and
find the BA80.bak file. The default path is D:\Mindray\BS230\OperationSoft\DataBase\Backup.
3) Delete the BA80.bak file. See Figure 6-36 Delete the Database.
4) Restart the software.
10.2.3 Database Version Is Higher Than the Current Software Version
Symptom: Database version is higher than the software version when the analyzer software is turned on.
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 10-5

Figure 10-4 Database version is higher than the software version

Fault Mechanism: this alarm is caused by a mismatch between the SQL database software version and the
database file version of the operating software.
Fault Scenario: this fault may occur when the software is repeatedly installed or upgraded.
Procedure:
1) In the software installation directory, find the Databaseconfig file, open it with Notepad, and find the
last character.<Property name="DBVer">210</Property> </SessionFactory></DBConfigure>
Note: Due to different software versions, the 210 number here may be 215 or 213, etc.
2) Modify the "210" number, which is higher than the current version value. If you add 100 to this, modify
it to 310. If there are still problems, please continue to add this number.
3) Restart the software.
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 10-6

Figure 10-5 Database version is higher than the software version
10.2.4 Unmatched Operating Software VersionA22039

Error Code: A22039
Fault Information: unmatched operating software version.
Fault Scenario: this is generated when the software is turned on.
Fault Mechanism: this alarm is caused by a mismatch between the operating software version and the control
software version.
Procedure:
1) Upgrade the software. Refer to 6.4.2 Upgrading of Operating Software.
2) Upgrade the control system. Refer to 6.4.3 Upgrading Control System.
3) Confirm the version after upgrading. Refer to 6.4.4 Confirmation after Upgrading.
10.2.5 Troubleshooting after replacing the new cuvettes
Fault Information: After replacing the new cuvette, the status display is incorrect, no cuvette or dirty.
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 10-7

Figure 10-6 Manually Replace Cuvettes window

Procedure:
1) Confirm whether the operation is carried out according to the procedure of Manually Replace
Cuvettes, and refer to 3.7.8 Replacing Reaction Cuvette for re-operation.
2) [Lamp background test] is not performed after replacing the lamp, and the reaction state will be
judged incorrectly when replacing the cuvette. Select "Maintenance" → "Biochemistry
Maintenance" → "Lamp Background Test" to check the lamp background.
3) Check whether the reaction cuvettes are the Mindray cuvettes, if not, please replace it. (Mindray
reaction cuvettes will be marked.As shown below:
Mindray Logo
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 10-8

Figure 10-7 Mindray Cuvettes For BS-230

4) Check whether the cuvette is damaged or dirty. If so, replace it with a new one.
5) If the lamp has exceeded its life (6 months or 2000 hours), or it is damaged or unstable, please replace
it,refer to 3.7.3 Replacing Lamp.
6) Enter the Utility->Maintenance->Parameter Search and Configuration screen of the operating
software, select Reaction Carousel Unit, and view the photoelectric gain value of each wavelength,
which is normally 40 to 255. The larger the value, the smaller the measured AD value and the higher
the absorbance.There are two ways to adjust the value. Method a) is recommended.
a) Refer to 7.3.2 Photoelectric Gain Adjustment for auto adjustment of photoelectric gain. The value
will change automatically after adjustment.
b) Re-configure the gain value by referring to 6.7.4 Parameter Configuration.
7) If it still cannot be solved,replace the optical assembly,refer to 3.7.4 Disassembling/Assembling Optical
Assembly.
10.2.6 Bar Code Scanning Faults

The barcode scanning problems are generally divided into two types:
1) Software alarm, with specific alarm information.
For example: A09011, the reagent barcode device is not working properly;
C04001, the sample barcode is repeated. Sample ID/bar code: %s Repeated position 1: %s Repeated
position 2: %s.
For such alarms, please refer to Table 10-6 Error messages and corrective actions for the cause
description and procedure to process them.
2) There is no alarm in the software, but the reagent or sample barcode placed in the sample/reagent
carousel is not recognized.
The procedure below is for the second case.
Procedure:
Scanning reagent bar code failed.
1) Confirm the client environment and usage habits:
If the client environment is under high humidity condition, with too much condensed water, it will affect the
scanning of the reagent barcode. The fault is that some reagent barcodes cannot be scanned occasionally.
Customers are advised to install air conditioners to ensure air humidity.
The client usually puts the reagent carousel in the refrigerator and then shuts down the analyzer. This operation
may cause the reagent barcode to be unscanned. There are two ways to improve it:
Method 1: the customer is recommended not to take the reagent carousel out. Leave it in the analyzer, keep
the power of the analyzer on at night, and plug the reagent carousel cover.
Method 2: Remove the reagent carousel at night and put it in the refrigerator. The analyzer can be powered
off. The next morning, power on the analyzer first to start the Reagent Refrigeration Unit, and after the Reagent
Refrigeration Unit is stable (about 5°under normal temperature conditions), take the reagent carousel out from
the refrigerator, and place it in the reagent compartment as quickly as possible to reduce the contact time with
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 10-9

the outside air.

2) Check if there is too much condensed water in the sample/reagent carousel, if the barcode window is
dirty or if there is condensed water, please clean it.
3) View the reagent scanning situations, which are divided into the following types:
a) All reagents cannot be scanned:
Check whether the barcode scanner has red light. If not, check whether the J5 connection line
form the reagent barcode scanner to the Main board is normal, re-plug and check if the connection
line is damaged or is tied too tightly by the cable tie. To replace the barcode scanner, please refer
to 3.4.10 Replacing Bar Code Reader. If the replacement of the Main board is invalid, replace the
barcode scanner (this is rare).
Note: If all reagents cannot be scanned, the Item parameter may not be imported, or the Item
parameter are wrong.
b) The reagent cannot be scanned.
Try to manually load the reagent position. Operation method: enter the software, Reagent
Reagent Calibration, select the position where the reagent is placed, click Reagent Load,
input the barcode on the reagent pack at the barcode field in the pop-up screen. Note: Please
keep in mind that the barcord is case sensitive.
If the reagent can be loaded successfully, the barcode may have water mist or scratches or poor
adhesion.
If the reagent cannot be loaded successfully, it may be due to a item parameter problem. Re-
import the Item parameter.
c) The barcode occasionally cannot be scanned; the position is not fixed.
Enter the software, align the barcode scanning position by referring to 7.7 Bar Code Unit
(Optional).
If it still cannot be solved after alignment, please replace the barcode scanner.
10.2.7 Light Intensity Is Too Weak C07003
Error Code: C07003
Fault Information: light intensity is too weak
Fault Mechanism: Light background AD value of a random wavelength < 12000, the "Light intensity is too
weak" alarm is triggered.
Procedure:
1) Check whether there are foreign objects in the reaction carousel (such as fragments of the cuvettes),
and clean up if there is any.
2) If the lamp is used for more than 2000 hours or 6 months, replace it. Refer to3.7.3 Replacing Lamp.
3) If it still cannot be solved, you need to consider the problem of optical. First confirm that the signal
collecting position is correct, refer to 7.3.1 Signal Collecting Position Adjustment, and then adjust the
photoelectric gain by referring to 7.3.2 Photoelectric Gain Adjustment. If the background of a certain
wavelength is less than 12000, consider replacing the corresponding wavelength filter; if the
background of all wavelength light sources is lower than 12000, consider the preamplifier board. For
the specific replacement method, please refer to 3.7.5 Replacing Filter and 3.7.6 Replacing
Preamplifier Board.
4) Replace the optical assembly,refer to 3.7.4 Disassembling/Assembling Optical Assembly.
10.2.8 Lamp Is Not Turned On C07005
Error Code: C07005
Fault Information: lamp is not turned on
Fault Mechanism: after the lamp is tuned on, the detected light intensity is less than the lower alarm limit.
Fault Scenario: the error is reported when the analyzer is running, or is turned on.
Procedure:
1) Open the upper panel of the lamp and check if the lamp is turned on. If it is not, confirm that the post
nut is tightened. Then rerun the operating software. Refer to 3.7.3 Replacing Lamp.
2) Replace the lamp. Refer to 3.7.3 Replacing Lamp.
3) Re-plug the J4 connector of the power board and check the wire of the J4 connector to the lamp for
damage.Refer to 4.5.3 Power supply board.
4) Enter the Utility screen —> Maintenance—>Alignment —>Photometric Unit. Click Turn On Lamp,
turn the multimeter to the DC gear, and measure the J4 connector on the power board. If it is not in
the range of 11.4 -12.6 V, replace the board,refer to Installation Methods and Precautions.
6) If it still cannot be solved, consider the optical signal transmission problem, check the optical signal
wiring, replace the AD collection board, refer to 3.7.9 Replacing AD collection board. If it is still not
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 10-10

resolved, you need to consider the main board and replace it, refer to Installation Methods and
Precautions.
10.2.9 Light Intensity Is Too Strong C07006
Error Code: C07006
Fault Information: light intensity is too strong
Fault Mechanism: Light background AD value of a random wavelength > 63000, the "Light intensity is too
strong" alarm is triggered.
Fault Scenario: The error is reported when the analyzer is running or is turned on
Procedure:
1) For lamp problems, if the lamp is used for more than 2000 hours or 6 months or a non-original lamp
is used, replace it. Refer to 3.7.3 Replacing Lamp.
2) Enter the Utility->Maintenance->Parameter Search and Configuration screen of the operating
software, select Reaction Carousel Unit, and view the photoelectric gain value of each wavelength,
which is normally 40 to 255. The larger the value, the smaller the measured AD value and the higher
the absorbance.
There are two ways to adjust the value. Method a) is recommended.
a) Refer to 7.3.2 Photoelectric Gain Adjustment for auto adjustment of photoelectric gain. The value
will change automatically after adjustment.
3) Enter the Utility screen —> Maintenance—>Alignment —>Photometric Unit. Click Turn On Lamp,
turn the multimeter to the DC gear, and measure the J4 connector on the power board. If it is not in
the range of 11.4 -12.6 V, replace the board,refer to Installation Methods and Precautions.
4) If it still cannot be solved,replace the optical assembly, refer to 3.7.4 Disassembling/Assembling
Optical Assembly.
5) If it still cannot be solved, consider the optical signal transmission problem, check the optical signal
wiring, replace the AD collection board, refer to 3.7.9 Replacing AD collection board. If it is still not
resolved, you need to consider the main board and replace it,refer to Installation Methods and
Precautions.
10.2.10 Analyzer cannot be connected
There are several types of faults when the analyzer cannot be connected:
 Software alarm: Fault code: C01001 Fault Information: the analyzer cannot be connected
 An error occurred while you enter the software. The prompt: Inquiring instrument configuration failed.
The following information is displayed on the screen:
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 10-11

Figure 10-8 Inquiring instrument configuration failed

 An error occurred while you enter the software. The following information is displayed on the screen:
Note:It is generally not found in the COM port information.
Figure 10-9 Operating software starting up failed

Note: When upgrading V25.00.06 software, configuration may not be performed using auxiliary tools, which
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 10-12

may cause the instrument to query the configuration failure. Please refer to the upgrade instructions in 6.9
upgraded to V25.00.06 instructions.
Procedure:
1) Check that the main switch of the analyzer and the switch of the analyzing unit are turned on. Normally,
the power switch indicator should be always on. If the switch is not on, please check and reconnect
the power cord of the analyzer. If it is confirmed that there is no problem with the power supply, replace
the switch.Refer to 4.5.4 Replacing Power switch.
2) Check that the analyzer is connected to the computer, re-plug the serial cable, and check whether the
serial cable is normal.
Serial cable inspection mode: The serial cable is the RS232 direct connection, connect to 2, 3, 4, 5,
and 7 directly. Use the multimeter to adjust to the buzzer gear and measure whether the 2, 3, 4, 5,
and 7 at both ends of the serial cable are connected. If not, replace the serial cable.
3) View the serial port status of the computer, exit to the desktop of the computer, right click on the
computer, select the device manager, and view the port. Confirm that there is a COM port on the
computer, and the status is not ! or ?. If it is abnormal, please reinstall the serial port driver or replace
the serial port card.
4) Check the configuration file information and view if the COM port is set the same as the actual COM
port. If it is different, please change it. Please refer to 6.3.3 Confirm the configuration file.
5) Download the latest version of the software and upgrade it. Refer to 6.4 Software Upgrading.
6) If the above cannot be solved, please check the wiring of the serial port of the analyzer to the main
board, and apply for the main board to replace it. Refer to of the main board Installation Methods and
Precautions.
10.2.11 Sample Probe Fails to Detect the Level of the Wash Well A01028
Error Code: A01028
Fault Information: the probe fails to detect the level of the wash well
Fault Mechanism: When the probe is cleaned in the wash well, the upper computer does not receive the
level detection signal or the level detection signal does not last for a long time.
Procedure:
Note:Confirm the current software version. If the version is lower than V25.00.04
(See Figure 6-25 Operating Software Version for software version), please upgrade the
software to the latest version first,refer to 6.4 Software Upgrading.
1)First confirm that whether there is water in the wash well, and whether the water quantity meets
the requirements when the analyzer generates the alarm. Please follow the Check Probes/Mixers
Exterior Wash Flow method for inspection.
2)If the wash well is dry, check the hydropneumatic system. First check the water in the mixer
wash well.
a) If there is water in the mixer wash well, focus on the exterior cleaning tube of the probe,
check whether the tubes and connectors of D19 are blocked.
b) If the mixer wash well is also waterless, check the shared tube and check it in the following
order:
 If the tank does not have enough DI water, add the DI water.
 If the inlet filter is blocked or damaged, try to replace it. Please refer to
Removing/Reinstalling Filter.
 Check the CV1 check valve for damage, CV1 is unidirectional, and the direction of
water flow is DI water tank → pump.
 Check P02 pump, You can try to replace with P01 to determine whether the pump works
abnormally. If so, please replace it.
 If the P02 supply voltage is abnormal, check whether the pump wiring and the connector
to the power drive board are loose,refer to 7.8.2 Checking Floater and Valve Status to
check P02 supply voltage,and refer to 4.6 Wiring Diagram of Analyzer to check the
wiring and the connector.
 If P02 is abnormally powered, there is no problem with the corresponding wiring and
connectors. The power drive board may be faulty,refer to Installation Methods and
Precautions to repace it.
3)If there is little water in the wash well, focus on the exterior cleaning tube of the probe, especially
whether the restrictive capillary is blocked,refer to Removing and Reinstalling Restrictive Tube.
4)If there is water in the wash well and the flow rate is normal, check if the probe is bent. Check
the verticality of the probe, visually measure it, or use a vertical reference for comparison. If the probe
is not straight, please replace the probe. Refer to A.2 BS-230 Moving Parts Position Confirmation Guide
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 10-13

(No Alignment Tooling)Judging and Calibrating Verticality of Probe.

5)If the wash well is not well drained, causing the DI water retained, check whether the waste
tube of the wash well is blocked. If so, dredge the tube and check it according to the fluidic diagram.
6)Check if the horizontal position of the probe to the wash well are correct. Refer to 7.5.2 Probe
to Horizontal Positions on Wash Well for alignment.
7)Check if the analyzer is falsely alarmed due to interference:
a) Confirm that the analyzer has a grounding wire and the zero ground voltage is <5V. The
measuring method is: set the multimeter to AC 250V voltage, and connect the black test lead to
the ground wire jack, and the red test lead to the live wire/zero wire jack, respectively. When the
grounding is good, the voltage between the ground wire and the zero wire is less than 5V, and
the voltage between the ground wire and the live wire is similar to the voltage between the live
wire and the zero wire.
b) Check whether the connection cable of the LLD board is damaged, or the cable is bound
too tightly by the cable tie, or the board connector is loose. The specific operation method is:
power off the whole analyzer, open the protective cover, remove 2 hardened dusting screws
(M3X6), remove the arm cover of the probe, refer to Figure 3-27 Removing LLD board,
disconnect the J1. J2 connectors of the LLD board, and re-connect them. If the connection wire
of the J2 connector to the J11 connector of the Main Board is damaged, wind it with an electrical
tape. If the cable tie is too tight, loosen the cable tie and re-plug the J11 connector.
8)If the LLD board 051-002479-00 is faulty replace it by referring to3.5.6 Replacing .
9)If the Main Board is faulty,replace it refer to Installation Methods and Precautions.
SV01 T105
D05 T104 D06
T106
T102 T103
SY01 MIX
NS
D19
D18
T204
D04
D17
T203
D16
T202
P01 D15
P02
D14
D03
CV1
D13
Panel
D02 T101
T201
D12
,
10.2.12 Sample Probe Fails to Detect the Level on the Reaction Carousel
when Dispensing A01033
Error Code: A01033
Fault Information: the sample probe fails to detect the liquid level on the reaction carousel when dispensing
Fault Mechanism: When the probe is dispensing in the reaction carousel, firstly, detect the R1 volume added
before, and determine the number of steps of the vertical movement of the probe adding the sample according
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 10-14

to the R1 volume (volume tracking technology). This alarm is triggered if no level is detected within the specified
number of steps.
Troubleshoot as follows:
When analyzing the problem, follow this sequence: level signal generation (probe) → signal analysis (level
detection board) → transmission (connection line) → signal processing (Main Board).
Procedure:
Note:Confirm the current software version. If the version is lower than V25.00.04
(See Figure 6-25 Operating Software Version for software version), please upgrade the
software to the latest version first,refer to 6.4 Software Upgrading.
1)First check the alarm log of the analyzer and check if the analyer still has an alarm that the
probe does not detect the liquid level in the sample carousel or during cleaning. If there is a similar
alarm, judge that the level detection function is faulty. At this time, check if the probe, the level detection
board, and the power supply and wire of the LLD board are normal.
2)If there is only this alarm, according to the alarm mechanism, first check whether the reagent
in the reagent pack is sufficient, if not, add the reagent in time.
Note: There should be no air bubbles in the reagent pack; if it is an open reagent, do not pour too
much reagent.
3)Observe the probe. If the reagent probe lowers into the reagent pack during the whole
procedure of aspirating the reagent, focus on whether the probe is blocked, and whether the reagent
volume added to the cuvette is insufficient due to the leakage of the sample syringe and the pipeline.
 If the probe is blocked, please dredge the probe by referring to Cleaning probe interior.
 If the syringe leaks, please replace it by referring to Replace Syringe.
 Check the Teflon tubing between the probe and the syringe. There should be no wear and
tear, if any, please replace it directly.
4)If the probe does not lower to aspirate the reagent but return directly during the test, judge that
the function of the level detection board may be damaged or interfered. At this time, check the power
supply and wire of the level detection board. Replace the level detection board.
5)Check the vertical reagent dispense position from the probe to the reaction carousel, and align
it according to 7.5.6 Probe to Vertical Limit Position on Reaction Carousel.
10.2.13 The Probe is spinning or leaking
Fault Mechanism: the probe is spinning or leaking
Procedure:
1) Check if the probe is dirty or bent. If it is, wipe it clean. If it is bent, replace it.
2) Check if the specimens are processed abnormally, such as poor centrifugation leading to excessive fibrin.
3) After confirming that there is no problem in the operation, check whether the probe is clogged. If so, Please
clean the inside of probe, refer to Cleaning probe interior. If the probe not cleaned, replace it.
4) Check the fluidic diagram and check whether the probe is targeted for the leakage of the fluidic, see the
figure below
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 10-15

SV01 T105
D05 T104 D06
T106
T102 T103
SY01 MIX
NS
D19
D18
T204
D04
D17
T203
D16
T202
P01 D15
P02
a) Check whether washer for probe D14 and connector are in place, refer to the precautions in
8.4.3 Installing
D03
Accessories..
b) Check if SY01 is leaking, and replace
CV1 if there is any.
5) Check if SV01 is not shut down improperly, and replace if there is. If the SV01 power supply is abnormal,
check the corresponding wiring, refer to 7.8.2 Checking Floater and Valve Status.
6) The jitter of the probe drive assembly caused the liquid to shake. Check whether the fixing screw of the
probe drive assembly is loose, and check whether
D13 the fixing screw of the rocker arm is loose. If there is no
looseness, replace the probe drive assembly.
10.2.14 Dark current is too high C07007 面板
Error Code: C07007 D02 T101
T201
Fault Information: Dark current is too highD12
Fault Mechanism: The dark current value of any wavelength exceeds the alarm limit. Under normal conditions,
the dark current value should be less than 200
Fault Analysis:
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 10-16

1.zero ground voltage needs less than 5VWhether

Dark current is Is it power the power supply is shared with other high-power
Y equipment, such as centrifuges, refrigerators, etc. If
too high interference
so, separate power
N
In the vicinity of the
telecommunication base
Is it base station signal
Y station, interference is likely to
interference
occur. Such as signal towers,
etc.
N
Whether the optical gain is Adjust the photoelectric gain to

Y
adjusted too low the normal range
Is the AD collection board

Y Replace AD collection board
abnormal
Replace the main board
Figure 10-10 Troubleshooting flowchart for Dark current is too high

Procedure:
1) Confirm that the analyzer has a grounding wire and the zero ground voltage is <5V. The measuring method
is: set the multimeter to AC 250V voltage, and connect the black test lead to the ground wire jack, and the
red test lead to the live wire/zero wire jack, respectively. When the grounding is good, the voltage between
the ground wire and the zero wire is less than 5V, and the voltage between the ground wire and the live
wire is similar to the voltage between the live wire and the zero wire.
2) Confirm whether the power supply of the instrument is powered separately and avoid sharing with high-
power equipment such as refrigerators, centrifuges, etc.
3) The instrument installation environment needs to be confirmed and cannot be placed near the base station.
4) Enter the Utility->Maintenance->Parameter Search and Configuration screen of the operating software,
select Reaction Carousel Unit, and view the photoelectric gain value of each wavelength, which is
normally 40 to 255. The larger the value, the smaller the measured AD value and the higher the absorbance.
There are two ways to adjust the value. Method a) is recommended.
a) Refer to 7.3.2 Photoelectric Gain Adjustment for auto adjustment of photoelectric gain. The value will
change automatically after adjustment.
5) Check the wiring of the AD collection board, and connect to the main control board to re-plug. Refer to 4.6
Wiring Diagram of Analyzer.
6) Check the optical signal wiring, replace the AD collection board, refer to 3.7.9 Replacing AD collection
board.
8) If it is still not resolved, you need to consider the main board and replace it,refer to Installation Methods
and Precautions.
10.2.15 Clinical Result Problems
Troubleshoot as follows:
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 10-17

Result inaccurate
Result of individual Results of multiple

chemistry inaccurate chemistries inaccurate
Good Different Same

Poor repeatability repeatability wavelengths wavelength
Confirm Fluctuated
Reage Check the start Check the Normal
that the reaction curve
nt position of the use time of reaction
parameters
invalid photoelectric the curve
are set Check the start
acquisition and reagent, correctly, Check the position of
replace the and and probe, photoelectric
optical replace the perform syringe, acquisition,
assembly if reagent for cross- cuvette, and cuvette, lamp,
necessary recalibratio contaminat optics and mechanical
n. ion check. position
Figure 10-11 Troubleshooting clinical result problem

Client FAQ:
1) Common errors in parameters
 The parameter is set incorrectly, or the increment and decrement are set to the parameter.
 The 2nd generation reagents are used, but the parameters input are the 1st generation ones.
2) Calibration setup error
 The concentration value of the calibrator is set incorrectly, or a wrong calibrator is taken.
 The calibration rule is set incorrectly, and the wrong calibration rule is selected.
 The number of calibration repetitions is set incorrectly or may be set to only once, which usually
should be 2 to 4 times by default.
 The calibrator displayed by the software expired and was not modified in time, and could not be
calibrated.
 In the calibration rule, the calibrator is incorrectly selected, and there may be multiple calibrators
for one chemistry.
3) QC setup error
 The control target value and SD value are set incorrectly, or the wrong control is taken.
 The QC rule is set incorrectly, and the correct control is not selected.
 The control displayed by the software expired and was not modified in time, and the QC could
not be applied.
4) Redissolution error
 Dry powder calibrator and QC solution should be redissolved before use. An error occurs when
redissolution with water, for example, only 3 ml of water is required, but 5 ml is added.
 The redissolved water is used incorrectly, for example, use the distilled water placed for a long
time, or directly use the mineral water for redissolution. For redissolution, the distilled water for
injection is recommended.
 Pipettes are recommended for redissolution when syringe or an uncalibrated sample gun is used.
 After redissolution, the storage is incorrect. After normal redissolution, the solution should be split
charged and stored frozen, and the freezing and thawing cannot be repeated. The storage is
recommended not to exceed 1 month.
5) Reagent problem
 Reagent is expired
 Reagent is not placed in the refrigerator
 Air bubbles in the reagent pack.
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 10-18

 Rgt load error

 Reagent tilt
6) Calibrator and control problem
 Matching calibrator and control are not used
 Calibrator and control used is not assigned
7) Analyzer problem
 Micro-blocking of the probe may result in an assignment or a low result
 The sample syringe leaks, which may result in poor repeatability
 The Teflon tubing from the probe to the sample syringe is folded or damaged, which may lead to
poor repeatability of the results.
 If the lamp life exceeds 2000 hours or 6 months, the stability of the results may be poor, and the
reaction curve may fluctuate. In particular, the enzymatic chemistry will frequently send an alarm
of linearity limit out of range.
 If the photoelectric acquisition position is wrong, all the results will be unstable.
 If the cuvette is contaminated, the result will be unstable.
 If the mixer is dirty, the result will be unstable.
 Position shift will affect loading and mixing, resulting in unstable results.
8) Water quality problem
 Poor water quality will affect the results of chemistries such as ions.
 The TBA chemistry is affected by the pH value of water
 The water quality will affect the cleaning effect. There will be cleaning residue, affecting the results
9) Sample problem
 Sample centrifugation problem. The sample containing fibrinogen may block the probe.
 Sample trait problems, hemolysis, jaundice, chyle blood, etc.
 Blood collection tube problems. Separation of glue, etc. may be easy to result in probe blockage.
 Some patients have taken certain drugs and caused abnormal detection in some chemistries.
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 10-19

10.3 Data alarms

Data alarm is a result flag indicating that an error or abnormity occurs to a result. By identifying results flags can evaluate if the results are reliable and acceptable. Data
alarm is not necessarily an error but will definitely influence the result and should be considered carefully.
The system provides monitoring of biochemistry results and ISE chemistry results. When calibration error or failure, or sample result error occurs due to the sample,
reagent or system failure, a flag will appear near the corresponding calibration result or sample results. The following pages summary the result flags of the system.
Table 10-5 Data alarms and corrective actions
Flag Alarm Type Description Probable Causes Corrective Actions

< Result related Exceeds linearity range The result exceeds the low limit of the linearity Take no actions, or rerun the test for confirmation.
low range.
< ISE result related Exceeds measurement Sample or control result exceeds the low limit of the Take no actions, or rerun the test for confirmation.
range low measurement range.
> Result related Exceeds linearity range The result exceeds the high limit of the linearity Rerun the test with sample diluted or decreased.
high range.
> ISE result related Exceeds measurement Sample or control result exceeds the high limit of the Rerun the test with sample diluted or decreased.
range high measurement range.
▲ Result related Sample volume is Sample volume is Increased one No actions are required.
Increased one
▼ Result related Sample volume is Sample volume is decreased one No actions are required.
decreased one
^ Result related Exceeds reference range The result exceeds the high limit of the reference No actions are required.
high range.
^! Result related Exceeds critical range The result exceeds the high limit of the critical No actions are required.
high range.
v Result related Exceeds reference range The result exceeds the low limit of the reference No actions are required.
low range.
v! Result related Exceeds critical range The result exceeds the low limit of the critical range. No actions are required.
low
10-x Result related 10-x Results of five runs (10 results), or 10 continuous Check if the reagent is qualified, control sample is
results of a control are on the same side. normal, and the instrument is working correctly.
1-2s Result related 1-2s The current QC result is between ±2 and ±3 No actions are required.
standard deviations from the assigned mean
concentration.
1-3s Result related 1-3s The current QC result is greater than ±3 standard Check if the reagent is qualified, control sample is
deviations from the assigned mean concentration. normal, and the instrument is working correctly.
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 10-20


2-2s Result related 2-2s Results of two controls in the same run or two Check if the reagent is qualified, control sample is
continuous results of a control are on the same side normal, and the instrument is working correctly.
and greater than ±2 standard deviations from the
assigned mean concentration.
4-1s Result related 4-1s Results of two runs (4 results), or 4 continuous Check if the reagent is qualified, control sample is
results of a control are on the same side and greater normal, and the instrument is working correctly.
than ±1 standard deviation from the assigned mean
concentration.
2.7s Result related 2.7s Multiple QC data and threshold values or cumulative Check if the reagent is qualified and control is normal. If
sum exceed ±2.7SD. the error remains, contact our customer service
department or your local distributor.
ABS Result related Absorbance out of range The absorbance of primary or secondary Check the sample for foreign matters or interferents;
wavelength used for calculating results is greater check if the reagent is qualified and placed in the
than 3.4A. correct position; check the cuvette is clean; check if the
photometric system is working normally.
BLK Calibration related Blank response out of The reagent goes wrong; insufficient reagent is Check if the cuvette is not overflowed, the reagent is
range dispensed; the cuvette contains air bubbles; the light sufficient without air bubbles, the light does not drift and
drifts; or the cuvette is overflowed. the chemistry parameters are reasonable. If yes,
replace the reagent and then rerun the test.
BOE Result related Substrate depletion The sample concentration is too high, and substrate Check the reaction curve and the substrate depletion
depletion occurs during fixed-time measurements. limit. Rerun the test with diluted sample.
CalcE Result related The results of constituent The test results of constituent chemistries of the No actions are required.
chemistries of a calculation are out of linearity range.
calculation out of range
CALE Result related Edited calibration factor The calibration factors are edited. No actions are required.
CALF Result related Calibration failed.(for The calibration fails. Recalibrate.
biochemistries)
CALF Result related No fluid in tubing 1. Waste pump tube is aging, blocked, or broken； 1. Replace the reagent pack with a new one
2. Sample injection port and fluidic path are blocked 2. Perform purge B to remove bubbles
or leaking. 3. /4. Replace the pump tube
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 10-21


3. Air bubble detector failed. 5. Clean the sample injection port and reinstall
electrodes.
6. Replace the bubble detector.
1. Place sufficient ISE wash solution.

2. Replace the pump tube
3. Clean the sample injection port and reinstall
electrodes.
CALF Calibration related No fluid in tubing 1. Waste pump tube is aging, blocked, or broken； 1. Replace the reagent pack with a new one
2. Sample injection port and fluidic path are blocked 2. Perform purge B to remove bubbles
or leaking. 3. /4. Replace the pump tube
3. Air bubble detector failed. 5. Clean the sample injection port and reinstall
electrodes.
1. Place sufficient ISE wash solution.

2. Replace the pump tube
electrodes.
CALJ Calibration related Rejected calibration The calibration factors are rejected. No actions are required.
factor
CALM Result related Air in segment 1. Waste pump tube is aging, blocked, or broken； 1. Replace the pump tube
2. Sample injection port and fluidic path are blocked 2. Clean the sample injection port and reinstall
or leaking. electrodes.
3. Air bubble detector failed. 3. Replace the bubble detector.
CALM Calibration related Air in segment 1. Waste pump tube is aging, blocked, or broken； 1. Replace the pump tube
2. Sample injection port and fluidic path are blocked 2. Clean the sample injection port and reinstall
or leaking. electrodes.
3. Air bubble detector failed. 3. Replace the bubble detector.
CALR Result related Recalculated calibration The calibration factors are recalculated. No actions are required.
factor
COV Calibration related Calibration curve not For nonlinear calibration, a satisfying base cannot Check that the reagent and calibrator are normal, and
convergent be calculated and no calibration curve is drawn. then recalibrate. If the error remains, contact our
customer service department.
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 10-22


CSD Calibration related Calibration curve The calculated standard deviation of the calibration Check if the acceptance limit is reasonable and the
standard deviation out of curve exceeds the specified limit. reagent and calibrator are normal, and then recalibrate.
range
DEL Calibration related Deleted QC result The QC result has been deleted. No actions are required.
DET Calibration related Calibration determination The calculated determination coefficient of the Check if the acceptance limit is reasonable and the
coefficient out of range calibration curve exceeds the specified limit. reagent and calibrator are normal, and then recalibrate.
DEP Calibration related Saving calibration result 1. ISE communication cable failure. 1. Replace the ISE communication cable.
error 2. Communication interface or pins failure 2. Replace the interface or pins.
3. Main board of the ISE module goes wrong. 3. Replace the Main board of the ISE module.
4. Software error. 4. Upgrade the operating software or reinstall it.
DTGL Result related Insufficient probe wash The probe wash solution is insufficient during Fill more probe wash solution.
solution measurement.
DUP Calibration related Calibration repeatability The difference between the maximum and minimum Check if the acceptance limit is reasonable,
error response of the calibrator exceeds the specified troubleshoot the error, and then recalibrate.
limit.
EDT Result related Edited result The result has been edited. No actions are required.
EDT Calibration related Edited calibration factor The calibration factors have been edited. No actions are required.
ENC Result related No calculation interval The sample concentration is too high, and substrate Check the reaction curve and the substrate depletion
depletion occurs within the lag time of rate check limit. Rerun the test with diluted sample.
measurements.
EXP Result related Enzyme linearity range The high-concentration sample leads to substrate Rerun the test with diluted sample.
extension depletion during the reaction time, and the result is
calculated by using measuring points within the lag
time.
EXT Result related Extended calibration The result is obtained by extending the calibration Take no actions, or recalibrate.
factor time.
FAC Calibration related Calibration slope The slope difference is applicable to linear Check if the acceptance limit is reasonable and the
difference out of range calibration only and refers to the K factor (slope) reagent and calibrator are normal, and then recalibrate.
difference between two adjacent calibrations. It
exceeds the specified limit.
ICA Result related The response is normal, The chemistry has not been calibrated. Rerun it after calibration.
but results cannot be
calculated.
L! Result related Water blank fluctuation is 1. The cuvette is overflowing. 1. Check if the cuvette is overflowing.
out of range. 2. The lamp has been replaced incorrectly. 2. Check if the Replace Lamp command is executed
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 10-23


3. Cuvette check is not performed after maintenance. during lamp replacement.
4. The cable connectors are not tightened. 3. Check if the cable connectors and retaining screw of
5. The retaining screw is not tightened. the lamp have been tightened.
6. Cleaning liquid inside the cuvette is little. 4. Check if the cleaning liquid inside the cuvette is no
7. The lamp is aged. less than half of the cuvette.
8. The photometer goes wrong. 5. Check if the reaction curve fluctuates irregularly. If
yes, replace the lamp.
6. If the error remains, contact our customer service
department.
LIN Result related Non-linear The measuring points for result calculation are Check the reaction curve and the substrate depletion
nonlinear, because the sample concentration is too limit. Rerun the test with diluted sample. If the alarm
high, or the substrate depletion limit is not specified occurs for more than one chemistry, and the reaction
or unreasonable. The lamp is aged. curve fluctuates irregularly, replace the lamp.
LOW Result related Response less than that The sample concentration is lower than the For ascending calibration curve, rerun the test with
of the minimum- sensitivity indicated on the reagent pack, making standard or increased sample volume; for descending
concentration calibrator response less than that of the lowest-concentration calibration curve, rerun the test with diluted sample.
calibrator.
MBK Calibration related Mixed blank absorbance The reagent goes wrong; the cuvette is not clear; Check if the cuvette is clear and not overflowed, the
out of range the reaction cuvette is overflowed; or insufficient reagent is sufficient without air bubbles, and the
reagent is dispensed. chemistry parameters are reasonable. If yes, replace
the reagent and then rerun the test.
MON Calibration related Calibration curve not The calibration data and calibration curve are not Check if the calibrator is defined and placed correctly,
monotonic monotonic. and then recalibrate.
NLN Result related No linear interval The high-concentration sample leads to less than 3 Rerun the test with diluted sample.
valid measuring points within the reaction time of
rate check measurements.
NOIS Result related Electrode voltage noise 1. Electrode failure. 1. Replace the electrode.
2. Environment interference. 2. Relocate the instrument.
3. ISE Main board failure. 3. Replace the Main board of the ISE module.
4. Salt buLLDup around electrodes or tubes due to 4. Clean the tubes and electrodes.
fluidic leaks.
NOIS Calibration related Electrode voltage noise 1. Electrode failure. 1. Replace the electrode.
2. Environment interference. 2. Relocate the instrument.
4. Salt buLLDup around electrodes or tubes due to 4. Clean the tubes and electrodes.
fluidic leaks.
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 10-24


OVE Result related Overridden calibration The result is obtained by overriding a failed Take no actions, or recalibrate.
factor calibration.
PUGA Result related Air in calibrator A 1. Calibrator A is exhausted. 1. Replace the reagent pack with a new one
2. Bubbles exist in calibrator tube A 2. Perform purge B to remove bubbles
3. Pump tube A is aging, blocked, or broken. 3. /4. Replace the pump tube
4. Waste pump tube is aging, blocked, or broken； 5. Clean the sample injection port and reinstall
5. Sample injection port and fluidic path are blocked electrodes.
or leaking. 6. Replace the bubble detector.
6. Air bubble detector failed.
PUGA Calibration related Air in calibrator A 1. Calibrator A is exhausted. 1. Replace the reagent pack with a new one
2. Bubbles exist in calibrator tube A 2. Perform purge B to remove bubbles
PUGB Result related Air in calibrator B 1. Calibrator B is exhausted. 1. Replace the reagent pack with a new one
2. Bubbles exist in calibrator tube B 2. Perform purge B to remove bubbles
PUGB Calibration related Air in calibrator B 1. Calibrator B is exhausted. 1. Replace the reagent pack with a new one
2. Bubbles exist in calibrator tube B 2. Perform purge B to remove bubbles
PRO Result related Prozone check error Antibody excess occurs due to too high sample Check the reaction curve and the prozone check
concentration. parameters. Rerun the test with diluted sample.
R Result related Rerun result The result is obtained by rerunning the test. No actions are required.
R4S Result related R4S One result of a run is greater than +2 standard Check if the reagent is qualified, control sample is
deviations from the assigned mean and the other normal, and the instrument is working correctly.
greater than -2SDs.
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 10-25


RBK Result related R1 blank absorbance out The reagent goes wrong; the cuvette is not clear; Check if the cuvette is clear and not overflowed, the
of range the reaction cuvette is overflowed; or insufficient reagent is sufficient without air bubbles, and the
reagent is dispensed. chemistry parameters are reasonable. If yes, replace
the reagent and then rerun the test.
RCE Result related Response calculation Absorbance data for calculation is incomplete, or the Rerun the test. If the error remains, contact our
error dividend is 0. customer service department.
REC Result related Recalculated result The sample result is recalculated manually with the /
latest calibration factors.
RESP Result related ISE response check code 1. ISE communication cable failure. 1. Replace the ISE communication cable
Command format or 3. Main board of the ISE module goes wrong. 3. Replace the Main board of the ISE module.
execution error 4. Software error. 4. Upgrade the operating software or reinstall it.
RESP Calibration related ISE response check code 1. ISE communication cable failure. 1. Replace the ISE communication cable.
Command format or 3. Main board of the ISE module goes wrong. 3. Replace the Main board of the ISE module.
execution error 4. Software error. 4. Upgrade the operating software or reinstall it
RGTE Result related Expired reagent The result is based on an expired reagent. Replace the reagent.
RGTL Result related Insufficient reagent The result is based on insufficient reagent. Replace the reagent.
RGTL Calibration related Insufficient reagent The calibration result is based on insufficient Replace the reagent.
reagent.
RRN Result related Response greater than The sample concentration exceeds the high limit of Rerun the test with diluted sample.
that of the maximum- the calibrator concentration.
concentration calibrator
SEN Calibration related Calibration sensitivity The difference of final response of the maximum Check if the acceptance limit is reasonable and the
error and minimum concentration calibrators exceeds the reagent and calibrator are normal, and then recalibrate.
specified limit.
SJAM Result related probe is clogged Probe clogging is detected during sampling or the Sample treatment.
probe is clogged during sampling.
SLDR Calibration related Electrode slope drift 1. Electrode or reagent pack fails. 1. Replace the problematic electrode and reagent pack.
2. Electrode is unsteady. 2. New electrode will become steady after 15 minutes
3. New reagent pack is unsteady. since installed.
4. Reference electrode has been used for over 66 3. Run a couple of calibrations after installing new
months. reagent pack.
5. ISE Main board failure. 4. Replace the reference electrode.
6. Ambient temperature fluctuates drastically 5. Replace the ISE Main board.
6. Control the ambient temperature to make the
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 10-26

fluctuation within +/-4℃.

SLEX Calibration related Slope out of range 1. Electrode is not installed correctly. 1. Reinstall the electrode
2. Calibrator expired. 2. Replace the calibrator.
3. Electrode degenerated 3. Replace the problematic electrode and rerun.
4. Bubbles in reference electrode 4. Remove the electrode and clap on it to eliminate
5. Reference electrode has been used for a long time bubbles. Reinstall the electrode and run calibration.
6. Electrodes interfered. 5. Replace reference electrode and rerun.
7. Module or tubing temperature above 32℃. 6. Troubleshoot the electrodes by replacing them in
different groups.
7. Monitor temperature, if too high, relocate equipment.
SLP Result related Corrected result The result is adjusted with calculation factors. No actions are required.
SLP Result related The results are produced Calibration factors instead of the default ones are No actions are required.
when the calibration configured for the second time calibration.
factors instead of the
default ones are
configured for the
second time calibration.
SMPA Result related Air in sample 1. Sample is insufficient or contains many bubbles 1. Increase the sample volume. At least 90μl sample
after dispensing. should be prepared.
2. No or insufficient sample has been dispensed into 2. Electrode is not installed correctly. Reinstall it.
the sample injection port. 3. Check the waste tube, and if necessary, replace it.
3. The electrodes are not properly installed, causing
leakage.
4. The waste pump tube is aging or broken.
SMPE Result related Expired sample The sample is expired. Replace the sample.
SMPL Result related Insufficient sample The sample is insufficient during analysis. Refill the sample.
SMPL Calibration related Insufficient sample The sample is insufficient during analysis. Refill the sample.
VDRF Result related Electrode voltage drift 1. Electrode or reagent pack fails. 1. Replace the problematic electrode and reagent pack.
2. Electrode is unsteady. 2. New electrode will become steady after 15 minutes
6. Ambient temperature fluctuates drastically. 5. Replace the ISE Main board.
6. Control the ambient temperature to make the
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 10-27

fluctuation within +/-4℃

VOUT Result related Electrode Voltage 1. Electrode or reagent pack fails. 1. Replace the problematic electrode and reagent pack.
Overflow 2. Electrode is unsteady. 2. New electrode will become steady after 15 minutes
5. Replace the ISE Main board.
VOUT Calibration related Electrode Voltage 1. Electrode or reagent pack fails. 1. Replace the problematic electrode and reagent pack.
Overflow 2. Electrode is unsteady. 2. New electrode will become steady after 15 minutes
T1 Result related Reaction disk 1. The ambient temperature is out of range. 1. Check if the error is accidental.
temperature error 2. The temperature sensor goes wrong. (component 2. If not, contact our customer service department.
error and cable error)
3. The temperature protection switch goes wrong.
(component error and cable error)
4. The heater goes wrong. (component error and
cable error)
5. PCB error
6. Parameters are lost.
7. Electromagnetic interference exists.
TD Result related Photoelectric 1. Software error 1. Rerun the operating software.
measurement period is 2. Reboot the operation unit.
out of rangePhotoelectric 3. If the error remains, contact our customer service
measurement period is department or your local distributor.
out of range
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 10-28

10.4 Error messages and corrective actions

Table 10-6 Error messages and corrective actions
Event ID Component Event Error Message and Flag Probable Causes Corrective Actions
class Event Log
A00006 Middle layer Error Equipment / E2PROM read/write error. 1. Switch off the analyzing unit power and switch
unit configuration cannot it on again. Recover the failure by performing the
be read or saved Home maintenance procedure.
Error:
2. Refer to 6.7.4 for processing
A00007 Middle layer Error Instruction execution / Instrument instructions cannot be 1. Switch off the analyzing unit power and switch
unit error executed. it on again. Recover the failure by performing the
Home maintenance procedure.
2. If this message appears for 3 times, contact our
R&D department.
A01006 Sample Error Sample probe vertical / Probe vertical movement error Probe vertical movement error
probe unit movement error 1. Sensor status error. 1. Sensor status error:
Position:
Error: 2.Motor belt or belt pulley is loose. Check if belt or belt wheel is loose, tighten them
3. Failed to find the zero position: if so.
Or 1) The assembly is jammed; 2. Failed to find the zero position:
2) Driving circuit error; 1) Remove obstacle or replace with a new
Sample probe 3) Vertical motor error; assembly.
horizontal movement 2) Replace PCB.
4) Vertical sensor error;
error
Position: 5) Belt pulley is loose; 3) Replace motor.
Error: 4. Collision occurs during operation other 4) Replace sensor.
than aspirating: 5) Tighten properly.
Or 1) Collision sensor or circuit or cable 3. Collision occurs during operation other than
failure; aspirating:
Sample syringe
2) Collision sensor is not blocked when 1) Replace sensor or PCB or cable.
movement error.
assembling the probe; 2) Reassemble.
Position:
Error: 3) Incorrect probe positioning; 3) Rotate positioning sensor to remove dust or
4) Incorrect sample/reagent carousel adjust probe to be vertical; if problem remains,
positioning; adjust positioning parameters.
5. Collision error remains: 4) Adjust reagent carousel positioning
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 10-29

class Event Log
1) Collision sensor or circuit or cable parameters.
failure; 4. Collision error remains:
2) Collision sensor is not blocked when 1) Replace sensor or PCB or cable.
assembling the probe; 2) Reassemble.
3) Collision sensor is not blocked due to 3) Mount the spring of blocking plate again.
deformation of blocking plate’s driving
5. Vertical movement is not allowed in current
spring;
horizontal position:
6. Vertical movement is not allowed in
Home instrument or probe unit.
current horizontal position: Software
error. Reagent probe horizontal movement error
1. Sensor status error:
Probe horizontal movement error Check if belt or belt wheel is loose, tighten them
if so.
1. Sensor status error.
2. Failed to find the zero position:
2.Motor belt or belt pulley is loose.
1) Replace PCB.
2) Replace motor.
1) Driving circuit error;
3) Replace sensor.
2) Motor error;
4) Tighten properly.
3) Home position sensor error;
3. Collision occurs during horizontal movement:
4) Belt pulley is loose;
1) Replace PCB.
4. Collision occurs during horizontal
movement: 2) Replace motor.
1) Driving circuit error; 3) Replace sensor.
2) Motor error; 4) Tighten properly.
3) Home position sensor error; 4. Horizontal movement is not allowed in current
vertical position: Home instrument or reagent
probe unit.
5. Horizontal movement is not allowed in Probe horizontal movement error
current vertical position: Software error
Check if belt or belt wheel is loose, tighten them
Probe syringe movement error if so.
1. Sensor status error. 2. Failed to find the zero position:
2.Motor belt or belt pulley is loose. 1) Remove obstacle or replace with a new
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 10-30

class Event Log
3. Failed to find the zero position: assembly.
1) The assembly is jammed; 2) Replace PCB.
2) Driving circuit error; 3) Replace motor.
3) Motor error; 4) Replace sensor.
4) Sensor error; 5) Tighten properly.
5) Belt pulley is loose. 3. Horizontal Collision occurs during operation:
1) Replace PCB.
2) Replace motor or sensor.
3) Tighten.
4. Horizontal movement is not allowed in current
vertical position: Home instrument or probe unit.
Probe syringe movement error
Check if belt or belt wheel is loose, tighten them
if so.
1) Remove obstacle or replace with a new
assembly.
2) Replace PCB.
3) Replace motor.
4) Replace sensor.
A01007 Sample Warning Sample probe / 1) Collision sensor or circuit or cable 1) Replace sensor or PCB or cable.
probe unit collides with an failure; 2) Reassemble.
obstacle when
2) Collision sensor is not blocked when 3) Rotate the positioning sensor to remove dust or
aspirating
assembling the probe; adjust the probe to be vertical; if problem
Sample position:
Sample ID/bar code: 3) Incorrect probe positioning; remains, adjust the positioning parameters.
Specific position: 4) Incorrect Sample/reagent carousel 4) Adjust sample/reagent carousel positioning
positioning. parameters.
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 10-31

class Event Log
A01024 Sample Warning Insufficient sample / 1. No sample is loaded on the designated 1. Check if there is sufficient sample, and run the
probe unit or position. test again.
Sample probe level
2. Insufficient sample. 2. If there are level detection error, check the
detection failed. probe, level detection board and connecting
3. Probe level detection error.
cable; replace if any abnormality is identified.
A01028 Sample Error Sample probe fails to / 1. No DI water or hydro error; Refer to 10.2.11 .
probe unit detect liquid level 2. Probe level detection error.
during cleaning
A01033 Sample Warning Sample probe fails to / 1. There is no reagent or insufficient Refer to 10.2.11 .
probe unit detect liquid level on reagent in the reaction cuvette.
reaction carousel
2. Probe level detection error.
when dispensing.
3. The vertical reagent dispense position
Cuvette No.:
from the probe to the reaction carousel is
Sample ID/bar code: error.
Chemistry:
or
Sample probe level
detection failed.
Cuvette No.:
Sample ID/bar code:
Chemistry:
A01039 Probe unit Error Instruction execution / Instrument instructions cannot be 1. Switch off analyzing unit power and switch on
error executed. again; Home the system.
customer service department or your local
distributor.
A02007 Probe unit Warning Probe R2 collides / 1) Collision sensor or circuit or cable 1) Replace sensor or PCB or cable.
with an obstacle failure; 2) Reassemble.
when aspirating
2) Collision sensor is not blocked when 3) Rotate positioning sensor to remove dust or
Reagent position:
assembling the probe; adjust probe to be vertical; if problem remains,
Specific position:
3) Incorrect probe positioning; adjust positioning parameters.
4) Incorrect Sample/reagent carousel 4) Adjust sample/reagent carousel positioning
positioning. parameters.
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 10-32

class Event Log
A02023 Probe unit Warning Insufficient reagent / 1.There is no reagent or insufficient 1. Check if there is sufficient sample, and run the
Or reagent on the designated position; test again.
Probe R2 level
2. Probe level detection error. 2. If there are level detection error, check the
detection failed. probe, level detection board and connecting
cable; replace if any abnormality is identified.
A02025 Probe unit Warning Probe dispenses / 1. Sample probe aspirates nothing; 1. Check if the reagent meets the requirement
insufficient reagent Syringe assembly error. and is sufficient in volume, and then try again.
2. Check if there is any abnormity of syringe
assembly.
A02032 Probe unit Warning Reagent is / 1. The reagent probe aspirates nothing. 1. Check if the reagent meets the requirements,
insufficient or 2. The probe syringe assembly goes and is sufficient in volume and free of air bubbles.
contains air bubbles Then try again.
wrong.
Chemistry:
3. There is an error with the vertical 2. Check if the probe syringe assembly works
Position:
extreme position of the sample probe properly.
above the reagent carousel. 3. Check if the vertical extreme position of the
sample probe above the reagent carousel is
correct.
A05006 Mixer unit Error Mixer vertical / Mixer vertical movement error Mixer vertical movement error
movement error 1. Sensor status error 1. Sensor status error: Check if belt or belt wheel
Mixer horizontal is loose, tighten them if so.
movement error Belt or belt pulley is loose.
2. Failed to find the zero position. 2. Failed to find the zero position: 1) Remove
1) Assembly is jammed; obstacle or replace with a new assembly. 2)
Replace PCB; 3) Replace motor. 4) Replace sensor.
3) Vertical motor error;
3. Vertical movement is not allowed in current
4) Vertical sensor error; horizontal position: Home instrument or unit.
3. Vertical movement is not allowed in Mixer horizontal movement error
current horizontal position.
1. Sensor status error: Check if belt or belt wheel
Software error is loose, tighten them if so.
2. Failed to find the zero position: 1) Replace
Mixer horizontal movement error PCB. 2) Replace motor. 3) Replace sensor. 4)
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 10-33

class Event Log
1. Sensor status error Tighten properly.
Belt or belt pulley is loose. 3. Horizontal movement is not allowed in current
2. Failed to find the zero position. vertical position: Home instrument or unit.
2) Motor error;
3) Home position sensor error;
3. Horizontal movement is not allowed in
current vertical position.
Software error
A05007 Mixer unit Error Instruction execution / Instrument instructions cannot be 1. Switch off the analyzer power and switch on it
error executed. again. Recover failure by performing the Home
maintenance procedure.
R&D department.
A06006 Reaction Error Reaction carousel / Reaction carousel movement error 1. Failed to find the home position.
carousel unit movement error 1. Failed to find the zero position. Replace sensor or cable
Error:
Home position sensor error 2. The coded disk missed steps
2. The coded disk missed steps 1) Remove obstacle or replace with a new
1) Assembly is jammed; assembly;
2) Driving circuit error; 2) Replace PCB;
3) Motor error; 3) Replace motor;
4) Sensor error; 4) Replace sensor or cable;
5) Belt pulley is loose; 5) Replace belt pulley and motor assembly;
3. The reagent carousel inner ring missed 3. The reagent carousel inner ring missed steps
steps when moving to the home position. when moving to the home position.
Home position sensor error Replace sensor or cable
A06007 Reaction Error Filter wheel / 1. Software instruction execute error 1. Switch off the analyzer power and switch on it
Carousel movement error 2. The filter wheel motor goes wrong. again. Recover failure by performing the Home
Unit maintenance procedure.
3. The home position sensor of the filter
wheel goes wrong. 2. Check if the cable of the filter wheel motor and
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 10-34

class Event Log
the sensor are normal.
3. Check if the filter wheel motor and the sensor
are faulty.
A06008 Reaction Error Instruction execution / Instrument instructions cannot be 1. Switch off analyzing unit power and switch on
carousel unit error executed. again; Home the system.
distributor.
A07006 Sample/reag Error Sample / Sample/Reagent carousel movement Sample/reagent carousel outer ring movement
ent carousel carousel movement error. error
unit error
1. Failed to find the zero position. 1. Failed to find the zero position Replace sensor
Error:
Home position sensor error or cable.
2. The coded disk missed steps 2. The coder missed steps: 1) Remove obstacle or
1) Assembly is jammed; replace with a new assembly. 2) Replace PCB. 3)
Replace motor. 4) Replace sensor or cable. 5)
Replace belt pulley and motor assembly.
3) Motor error;
3. The reaction carousel missed steps when
4) Sensor error; moving to the home position Replace sensor or
5) Belt pulley is loose; cable
3. The reagent carousel inner ring missed
steps when moving to the home position.
Home position sensor error
A07009 Sample/reag Error Sample bar code / Due to the system error, the sample bar Recover the failure. If the error remains, initialize
ent carousel reader error code reader cannot work normally. If the the sample bar code reader. If initialization cannot
unit error repeats and cannot be removed, be performed, check if bar code reader is
then the bar code reader has not connected properly. If the error remains, then
performed the initialization normally or replace the bar code reader or the control drive
the communication cables are board.
disconnected.
If bar code reader is not available, please
try again.
A07010 Sample/reag Warning Sample bar code / Sample bar code reader does not work Scan the bar code again. If the problem still
ent carousel error normally due to communication error. remains, check the cable of the bar code reader
unit Position: or replace the bar code reader or the control drive
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 10-35

class Event Log
board.
A07011 Sample/reag Error Sample bar code / Sample bar code sending buffer is full due Recover the failure or reboot the analyzing unit.
ent carousel sending buffer is full to communication error.
unit
A09011 Sample/reag Error Reagent bar code / Reagent bar code reader connection error Recover the failure. If the error remains, initialize
ent carouse reader does not work due to system failure. If the error the sample bar code reader. If initialization cannot
unit normally repeats and cannot be removed, then the be performed, check if bar code reader is
bar code reader has not performed the connected properly. If the error remains, then
initialization normally or the replace the bar code reader or the control drive
communication cables are disconnected. board.
If bar code reader is not available, please
try again.
A09012 Sample/reag Warning Reagent bar code / Communication error. Reagent bar code Scan the bar code again. If the problem still
ent carousel error instruction buffer is full. remains, check the cable of the bar code reader
unit Position: or replace the bar code reader or the control drive
board.
A09014 Sample/reag Error Reagent bar code / Reagent bar code reader does not work Recover the failure or reboot the analyzing unit.
ent carousel sending buffer is full normally due to communication error.
unit Position:
A11013 Wash station Error Water tank is empty / 1. Water tank is empty. 1. Check if the water level of the water tank is at a
2. The low-level floater of the water tank low level and add it;
goes wrong. 2. Check if the low float of the water tank is
normal. Refer to 7.8.2 for the float check. If the
float is faulty, replace it.
3. Check if the wiring of the float sensor to the
main board is broken or the contact is poor.
4. Replace the main board.
A11038 Wash station Error Instruction execution / Instrument instructions cannot be 1. Switch off analyzing unit power and switch on
error executed. again; Home the system.
distributor.
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 10-36

class Event Log
A12010 Temperature Warning Reagent preheating / 1. The ambient temperature is out of 1. Reproduce failure.
unit temperature is out of range. 2. Measure ambient temperature to check if
range.
2. The temperature sensor goes wrong. temperature is out of range.
(component error, cable error) 3. Temperature sensor error: check for any signs
3. The temperature protection switch of short circuit or broken circuit; check if
goes wrong. (component error, cable connections are secure.
error) 4. Temperature protection switch error: check if
4. The heater goes wrong. (component protection switch is shut and connections are
error, cable error) secure.
5. PCB error 5. Heater error: check if resistance under normal
6. Parameters are lost. temperature is correct, and connections are
7. Electromagnetic interference exists. secure.
6. PCB failure.
7. Parameters are lost. Check if the temperature
control parameters are correct.
8. Electromagnetic interference exists.
A22001 ISE unit Error Slope out of range, SLEX 1. Electrode is not installed correctly. 1. Remove and reinstall the electrode.
electrode: 2. Calibrator expired. 2. Replace the calibrator.
3. Electrode degenerated 3. Replace the failed electrode and run tests
4. Bubbles in reference electrode again.
5. Reference electrode has been used for 4. Remove the electrode and clap on it to
a long time. eliminate bubbles. Reinstall the electrode and run
6. Electrodes interfere with each other. calibration.
7. Module or fluidic temperature exceeds 5. Replace the reference electrode and run tests
again.
32℃.
6. Replace electrode by different combinations to
troubleshoot the failed one.
7. Monitor temperature, if too high, relocate
equipment.
8. Contact our customer service department or
your local distributor.
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 10-37

class Event Log
A22002 ISE unit Error Air in sample. SMPA 1. Sample is insufficient, or contains 1. Increase the sample volume. At least 90μl
Position: bubbles after being dispensed. sample should be prepared.
2. Electrode is not installed correctly. Reinstall it.
2. No or insufficient sample has been
3. Check the waste tube, and if necessary,
dispensed into the sample injection port.
replace it.
3. The electrodes are not properly
installed, causing leakage.
4. The waste pump tube is aging or
broken.
A22004 ISE unit Error ISE unit cannot be / 1. Power supply of ISE module goes wrong. 1. Replace the 24V power supply board.
connected. 2. Communication cable between ISE 2. Replace the ISE communication cable.
3. Replace the interface or pins.
module and middle-layer unit goes wrong.
3. Communication interface or pins failure
4. Main board of the ISE module goes
wrong.
A22005 ISE unit Error ISE unit response / 1.Communication cable between ISE 1. Replace the ISE communication cable.
error module and middle-layer unit goes wrong. 2. Replace the interface or pins.
2. Communication interface or pins failure
4. Upgrade the operating software or reinstall it.
3. Main board of the ISE module goes
wrong.
4. Software error
A22006 ISE unit Error Purge A and B failed. / 1. Leaks exist due to improper installation 1. Reinstall the electrode and check for the O
of electrode or O ring's missing. ring.
2. Sample injection port of electrode 2. Use warm water to rinse the sample injection
inside is blocked. port, and unclog the electrode tube. Check the
3. Calibrator in the reagent pack is inside of the reference electrode for salt
exhausted. buLLDup.
4. Purge cycle is not enough. 3. Replace the reagent pack.
5. Peristaltic pump tube is aging, blocked 4. Increase the prime cycle.
or broken. 5. Replace the pump tube.
6. Calibrator cannot be output due to the 6. Use warm water to unclog the wand tube.
blocked wand tube.
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 10-38

class Event Log
A22007 ISE unit Warning ISE reagent is going / Calibrator is exhausted. Replace the reagent pack with a new one.
to be exhausted.
A22008 ISE unit Error Voltage overflow, VOUT 1. Electrode or reagent pack is invalid. 1. Replace the problematic electrode and reagent
electrode: 2. Electrode is unsteady. pack.
2. New electrode will become steady after 15
3. New reagent pack is unstable. minutes since installed.
4. Reference electrode has been used for 3. Run a couple of calibrations after installing new
over 6 months. reagent pack.
A22009 ISE unit Error Electrode slope drift. VDRF/ 1. Electrode or reagent pack is invalid. 1. Replace the failed electrode or reagent pack.
(during calibration) SLDR 2. Electrode is unsteady. 2. New electrode will become steady after 15
Or
3. New reagent pack is unstable. minutes since installed.
Electrode voltage
drift. (during sample 4. Reference electrode has been used for 3. Run a couple of calibrations after installing new
analysis) over 6 months. reagent pack.
Electrode: 5. ISE Main board failure. 4. Replace the reference electrode.
6. The ambient temperature is fluctuating 5. Replace the ISE Main board.
greatly. 6. Control the ambient temperature to make the
fluctuation within +/-4℃.
A22010 ISE unit Error Voltage noise, NOIS 1. Electrode is invalid. 1. Replace the electrode.
electrode: 2. Environment interference. 2. Relocate the instrument.
3. ISE Main board failure. 4. Clean the tubes and electrodes.
4. Salt buLLDup around electrodes or
tubes due to fluidic leaks.
A22011 ISE unit Error Air in calibrator B PUGB 1. Calibrator B is exhausted. 1. Replace the reagent pack with a new one.
2. Bubbles exist in calibrator tube B 2. Perform purge B to remove bubbles.
3. &4. Replace the pump tube.
3. Peristaltic pump B tube is aging, 5. Clean the sample injection port and reinstall
clogged and broken. electrodes.
4. Waste pump tube is aging, blocked, or 6. Replace the air bubble detector.
broken:
5. Sample injection port and fluidic path
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 10-39

class Event Log
are blocked or leaking.
6. Air bubble detector failed
A22012 ISE unit Error Air in calibrator A PUGA 1. Calibrator A is exhausted. 1. Replace the reagent pack with a new one
2. Calibrator A tube contains many air 2. Perform purge A to remove air bubbles.
bubbles. 3. and 4. Replace the peristaltic pump tube.
3. Peristaltic pump A tube is aging, 5. Clean the sample injection port and reinstall
clogged and broken. electrodes.
4. Waste pump tube is aging, blocked, or 6. Replace the bubble detector.
broken:
5. Sample injection port and fluidic path
A22013 ISE unit Error ISE pump calibrating / 1. Peristaltic pump tube is aging. 1. Replace the pump tube.
failed! 2. Aspiration and dispensing of sample 2. Replace the sample probe.
probe goes wrong.
A22014 ISE unit Error Air bubble detector / 1. Air bubble detector board is eroded due Replace the air bubble detector.
failure to the leaks at the joint of sample
injection port and bubble detector.
A22015 ISE unit Error Reading reagent / 1. Reagent pack is not installed. 1. Install reagent pack.
pack chip error 2. Reagent pack wand is failed. 2. Replace the wand.
A22016 ISE unit Error Reagent pack chip / 1. Reagent pack is not installed. 1. Install reagent pack.
writing error. Unload 2. Reagent pack wand is failed. 2. Replace the wand.
the reagent pack and
load it again.
A22017 ISE unit Error Air in ISE wash / 1. ISE wash solution is insufficient. 1, Place sufficient ISE wash solution.
solution 2. Waste pump tube is aging, blocked, or 2. Replace the pump tube
broken: 3. Clean the sample injection port and reinstall
3. Sample injection port and fluidic path electrodes.
are blocked or leaking. 4. Replace the bubble detector.
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 10-40

class Event Log
A22018 ISE unit Error No fluid in tubing CALF 1. ISE wash solution is insufficient. 1, Place sufficient ISE wash solution.
2. Waste pump tube is aging, blocked, or 2. Replace the pump tube.
broken:
electrodes.
3. Sample injection port and fluidic path 4. Replace the air bubble detector.
A22019 ISE unit Error Saving calibration DEP 1. Communication cable is disconnected. 1. Replace the ISE communication cable.
result error 2. The interface or pin goes wrong. 2. Replace the interface or pins.
3. ISE Main board failure. 4. Upgrade the operating software or reinstall it.
4. Wrong Software Version.
A22021 ISE unit Error Command format or RESP 1. Communication cable is disconnected. 1. Replace the ISE communication cable.
execution error 2. The interface or pin goes wrong. 2. Replace the interface or pins.
3. ISE Main board failure. 4. Upgrade the operating software or reinstall it.
4. Wrong Software Version.
A22022 ISE unit Error No fluid in tubing / 1. ISE wash solution is insufficient. 1, Place sufficient ISE wash solution.
2. Waste pump tube is aging, blocked, or 2. Replace the pump tube.
broken:
electrodes.
3. Sample injection port and fluidic path 4. Replace the air bubble detector.
A22023 ISE unit Error No reagent module / 1. Reagent pack is not installed. 1. Install the reagent pack.
has been loaded. 2. Wand error. 2. Install the reagent pack wand.
A22024 ISE unit Error ISE response check RESP 1. Communication cable is disconnected. 1. Replace the communication cable.
code error 2. The interface or pin goes wrong. 2. Replace the interface or pins.
4. Wrong Software Version. 4. Upgrade the operating software or reinstall it.
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 10-41

class Event Log
A22036 / Error Initializing sample / Due to the system error, the sample bar Refer to 10.2.6 .
bar code reader code reader cannot work normally. If the
failed. error repeats and cannot be removed,
then the bar code reader has not
performed the initialization normally or the
communication cables are disconnected.
A22038 / Error Scanning reagent / Scanning reagent bar code failed. Refer to 10.2.6 .
bar code failed.
A22039 / Error Unmatched software / 1. Executing version query instruction Refer to 10.2.4 .
version. failed.
2. Returned control software version and
that stored in the operating software does
not match.
C00007 Operating Error CPU performance / The CPU is too busy. 1. Restart PC and operating software
system low 2. Confirm that the software shortcut-Properties-
Compatibility is unchecked to run this program for
compatibility.
3. Enter the task manager, view the software
occupied by the CPU, and uninstall it.
C00011 Operating Error The last abnormal / The operating software is abnormal or the After rebooting the software, perform the special
system exit may cause analyzer is powered off accidentally. wash procedure.
carryover not
handled. Execute the
Special Wash
maintenance
command before
starting analysis to
ensure accurate
results.
C00012 Operating Warning Sound card failure / No sound card is installed; Sound card Reinstall sound card or sound card driver
system failure; Incorrect sound card driver
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 10-42

class Event Log
C00013 Operating Error The last abnormal / The operating software did not exit Remove and check the idle reaction cuvette
system exit may cause normally for reasons such power failure. segment on the reaction carousel. If the cuvette
absence of update of (Only BS-230) segment has been used, replace it; or, if it is not
the reaction cuvette sure whether the cuvette segment has been used,
status. Check the still replace it.
reaction cuvette
manually and replace
it with a new cuvette
to ensure accurate
results.
C01001 Instrument Error Equipment cannot be / Database software is not installed; Refer to 10.2.10 for processing.
connection connected database is not established; database
system or database file is damaged or
lost; database is opened exclusively
C02001 Database Error Database initialing / Database upgrade failed Refer to 10.2.1 for processing.
failed
C02002 Database Error Database upgrade / Database record is under use; database Refer to 10.2.1 for processing.
failed is locked
C02004 Database Warning Database backup / Cannot read or write necessary Refer to10.2.2 for processing.
failed information from or into database
C02005 Database Warning Reading/Writing / Database software is not installed; Refer to 10.2.1 for processing.
database failed database is not established; database
system or database file is damaged or
lost; database is opened exclusively
C03001 Result Warning Result cannot be RCE Absorbance data for calculation is Investigate the cause of photoelectric data loss;
calculation calculated incomplete, or the dividend is 0. contact our R&D department
Sample ID/bar code:
Position:
Chemistry:
C03002 Result Warning Absorbance out of ABS The absorbance measured at the primary Check the reaction curve. If the absorbance of R1
calculation range and secondary wavelength is greater than is too high, check if reagent has air bubbles or
Sample ID/bar code: 3.3A.
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 10-43

class Event Log
Position: syringe leak.
Chemistry: 2. Check if the reagent is placed in the correct
position.
3. Rerun the test after dilution.
4. Contact our R&D department.
C03003 Result Warning R1 blank absorbance RBK The reagent goes wrong; the cuvette is Check if cuvette is clean; check if reagent is
calculation out of range not clear; or insufficient reagent is sufficient, without air bubbles; check if chemistry
dispensed. parameters are reasonable; if previous problems
do not exist, replace reagent and rerun the test.
C03004 Result Warning Substrate depletion BOE The sample concentration is too high, and Check the reaction curve and the substrate
calculation Sample ID/bar code: substrate depletion occurs during fixed- depletion limit. Rerun the test with diluted sample.
Position: time measurements.
Chemistry:
C03005 Result Warning Result cannot be ENC The sample concentration is too high, and Check the reaction curve and the substrate
calculation calculated substrate depletion occurs within the lag depletion limit. Rerun the test with diluted sample.
Sample ID/bar code: time of rate check measurements.
Position:
Chemistry:
C03006 Result Warning Linearity limit out of LIN The measuring points for result Check the reaction curve and the substrate
calculation range calculation are nonlinear, because the depletion limit. Rerun the test with diluted sample.
Sample ID/bar code: sample concentration is too high, or the
Position: substrate depletion limit is not specified or
Chemistry: unreasonable.
C03007 Result Warning Prozone check error PRO Antigen excess occurs due to too high Check the reaction curve and the prozone check
calculation Sample ID/bar code: sample concentration. parameters. Rerun the test with diluted sample.
Position:
Chemistry:
C03008 Result Warning Sample RRN The sample concentration exceeds the Dilute and Rerun
calculation concentration is high limit of the calibrator concentration.
higher than that of the
highest-level
calibrator
Sample ID/bar code:
Position:
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 10-44

class Event Log
Chemistry:
C03009 Result Warning Mixed blank MBK The reagent goes wrong; the cuvette is Check if the cuvette is clear, the reagent is
calculation absorbance out of not clear; or insufficient reagent is sufficient without air bubbles, and the chemistry
range dispensed. parameters are reasonable. If yes, replace the
Chemistry: reagent and then rerun the test.
C03010 Result Warning Blank response out of BLK The reagent goes wrong; insufficient Check if the cuvette is not overflowed, the
calculation range reagent is dispensed; the cuvette contains reagent is sufficient without air bubbles, the light
Chemistry: air bubbles; the light drifts; or the cuvette does not drift and the chemistry parameters are
is overflowed. reasonable. If yes, replace the reagent and then
rerun the test.
C03011 Result Warning Calibration DUP The difference between the maximum and Check if the acceptance limit is reasonable,
calculation repeatability exceeds minimum response of the calibrator troubleshoot the error, and then recalibrate.
limit. Chem: exceeds the specified limit.
C03012 Result Warning Calibration sensitivity SEN The difference of final response of the Check if the acceptance limit is reasonable and
calculation exceeds limit. Chem: maximum and minimum concentration the reagent and calibrator are normal, and then
calibrators exceeds the specified limit. recalibrate.
C03013 Result Warning Calibration curve SD CSD The calculated standard deviation of the Check if the acceptance limit is reasonable and
calculation exceeds limit, Chem: calibration curve exceeds the specified the reagent and calibrator are normal, and then
limit. recalibrate.
C03014 Result Warning Calibration DET The calculated fit of the calibration curve Check if the acceptance limit is reasonable and
calculation determination exceeds the specified limit. the reagent and calibrator are normal, and then
coefficient exceeds recalibrate.
limit, Chem:
C03015 Result Warning Calibration slope FAC The slope difference is applicable to linear Check if the acceptance limit is reasonable and
calculation difference out of calibration only and refers to the K factor the reagent and calibrator are normal, and then
range. Chem: (slope) difference between two adjacent recalibrate.
calibrations. It exceeds the specified
limit.
C03016 Result Warning Calibration curve is MON The calibration data and calibration curve Check if the calibrator is defined and placed
calculation not monotonic, are not monotonic. correctly, and then recalibrate.
Chem:
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 10-45

class Event Log
C03017 Result Warning Calibration curve is COV For nonlinear calibration, a satisfying base Check that the reagent and calibrator are normal,
calculation not convergent, cannot be calculated and no calibration and then recalibrate. If troubleshooting fails,
Chem: curve is drawn. choose other calibration rules and recalibrate.
C03018 Result Warning Chemistry: 1-2s The QC result is between ±2 and ±3 No actions are required.
calculation Control: 1-2s warning standard deviations from the assigned
mean concentration.
C03019 Result Warning Chemistry: 1-3s The current QC result is greater than ±3 Check if the reagent is qualified, control sample is
calculation Control: 1-3s out of standard deviations from the assigned normal, and the instrument is working correctly.
control mean concentration.
C03020 Result Warning Chemistry: 2-2s Results of two controls or two results of Check if the reagent is qualified, control sample is
calculation Control: 2-2s out of one control within a run are normal, and the instrument is working correctly.
control simultaneously greater than +2 or -2
standard deviations from the assigned
mean.
C03021 Result Warning Chemistry: R-4s One result of a run is greater than +2 Check if the reagent is qualified, control sample is
calculation Control: R-4s out of standard deviations from the assigned normal, and the instrument is working correctly.
control mean and the other greater than -2SDs.
C03022 Result Warning Chemistry: 4-1s Results of two runs (4 results), or 4 Check if the reagent is qualified, control sample is
calculation Control: 4-1s out of continuous results of a control are on the normal, and the instrument is working correctly.
control same side and greater than ±1 standard
deviation from the assigned mean
concentration.
C03023 Result Warning Chemistry: 10-x Results of five runs (10 results), or 10 Check if the reagent is qualified, control sample is
calculation Control: 10-x out of continuous results of a control are on the normal, and the instrument is working correctly.
control same side.
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 10-46

class Event Log
C03024 Result Error Biochemistry test / Software error Rerun the test, or reboot the operating software
calculation period time out. Operating system error and analyzing unit. If the error remains, contact
Cannot continue our customer service department or your local
distributor.
C03026 Result Warning Photoelectric data is / Communication error. If the error persists, contact our R&D department.
calculation lost
C03027 Result Warning Chemistry: 2.7s Multiple QC data and threshold values or Check if the reagent is qualified and control is
calculation Control: 1.0-2.7 out cumulative sum exceed ±2.7SD. normal.Refer to 10.2.15 for processing.
of control
of control
of control
C03030 Result Error Photoelectric TD Software error 1. Rerun the operating software.
calculation measurement period 2. Reboot the operation unit.
is out of range 3. Check if the ground voltage is normal
Sample ID/bar code: 4. Check for interference, poor contact between
Position: the splitter assembly and the Main board, or
Chemistry: damage to the cable.
5. Check the serial port connection, computer
serial port
6. Replace the main board
C03031 Result Error Multiple consecutive / Software error 1. Rerun the operating software.
calculation photoelectric 2. Reboot the operation unit.
measurements are 3. Check if the ground voltage is normal
time out 4. Check for interference, poor contact between
Sample ID/bar code: the splitter assembly and the Main board, or
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 10-47

class Event Log
Position: damage to the cable.
Chemistry: 5. Check the serial port connection, computer
serial port
6. Replace the main board
C04001 Sample bar Warning Duplicate sample bar / Duplicate bar code is used. Replace the duplicate sample bar code label.
code code.
Sample ID/bar code:
Position 1:
Position 2:
C04002 Sample bar Warning Bar code has no / The sample of the bar code has not been Program the sample of the bar code.
code corresponding programmed.
programming.
Sample ID/bar code:
Position:
C04006 Sample bar Warning Sample is expired / The sample is loaded after its shelf life is The sample is expired. Replace the sample and
code Sample ID/bar code: exceeded. program it again. Reject the expired sample. If
Position: the sample shelf life is too short, change it to a
reasonable one.
C04008 Sample bar Warning Sample bar code too / The bar code length is greater than the Redefine the bar code with no more than 27
code long. Position: maximum value of 27 digits. digits.
C04009 Sample bar Warning Sample bar code is / The bar code length is less than the Redefine the bar code with no less than 3 digits.
code less than 3 digits. minimum value of 3 digits.
position:
C04012 Sample bar Warning Sample bar code / Bar code data does not accord with the Reset the bar code format, or reprint and scan the
code analysis error defined format. bar code.
Sample bar code:
Position:
C05001 Reagent bar Warning Duplicate reagent bar / Incorrect reagent or reagent bar code is Reprint the reagent bar code, or replace the
code code being used, or an invalid reagent bar code reagent bottle with an invalid bar code.
Reagent: is being used in a closed-reagent system.
Position 1: Closed-reagent bar code is aligned with
Position 2: closed reagents, and cannot be used
again for new reagent when a reagent is
exhausted.
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 10-48

class Event Log
C05002 Reagent bar Warning Reagent bar code / Incorrect reagent bar code is being used, Print the new reagent bar code with correct
code data error. or reagent bar code is not configured settings and check the bar code against the
Position: reasonably. The reagent bar code settings. In the case of a closed-reagent system,
contains incomplete or incorrect reagent replace the reagent bottle, or contact the reagent
information, such as expiration date, supplier.
reagent volume, etc.
C05003 Reagent bar Warning Reagent bar code / Incorrect reagent bar code is being used, Check the reagent bar code settings, or reprint the
code analysis error or reagent bar code settings are incorrect. reagent bar code against the settings. In the
Position: Non-closed reagent bar code is being case of a closed-reagent system, contact the
used in a closed-reagent system. The reagent supplier.
system fails to extract reagent information
from the bar code.
C05006 Reagent bar Error Wash solution / Reagent rather than wash solution is Reposition the reagent, or remove it from the
code position on reagent placed in the fixed wash solution position sample diluent position.
carousel is occupied on reagent carousel.
by another reagent
Position:
C05008 Reagent bar Error Physiological saline / Reagent rather than physiological saline Reposition the reagent, or remove it from the
code position on reagent is placed in the fixed physiological saline sample diluent position.
carousel is occupied position on reagent carousel.
by another reagent
Position:
C05010 Reagent bar Error The pretreatment / The pretreatment reagent position is Place the pretreatment reagent in correct position.
code reagent position is occupied by other reagent.
occupied by other
reagent. Position:
C05011 Reagent bar Error The ISE wash / The ISE wash solution position is Place the pretreatment reagent in correct position.
code solution position is occupied by another reagent.
occupied by another
reagent.
C06001 Host Error LIS initialization error / Host file is damaged or does not exist. Reboot operating software; initialize LIS module
communicati
on
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 10-49

class Event Log
C06002 Host Error LIS communication / Host parameters error Check system configuration parameters; re-
communicati parameter error connect LIS
on
C06003 Host Error LIS communication / Communication failure If the error occurs accidentally, send or receive
communicati error the instruction again. If the error occurs for several
on times, contact LIS vendor. If problem remain,
contact our R&D department.
C06004 Host Error LIS host cannot be / Abnormal network connection, or the LIS Check if LIS host and LIS station is started
communicati connected host is not started. normally.
on
C06005 Host Warning Sending sample / Communication failure If the error occurs accidentally, send or receive
communicati results failed. the instruction again. If the error occurs for several
on Sample ID/bar code: times, contact LIS vendor. If problem remain,
Position: contact our R&D department.
C06006 Host Warning Sending sample / Communication failure If the error occurs accidentally, send or receive
communicati information failed. the instruction again. If the error occurs for several
on Sample ID/bar code: times, contact LIS vendor. If problem remain,
C06007 Host Warning Inquiring sample / LIS host failure. If the error occurs accidentally, neglect it. Neglect
communicati information failed. the error. If the error occurs for several times,
on Sample ID/bar code: contact LIS vendor. If the problem remains,
C06008 Host Warning Downloading sample / Incorrect channel settings; or insufficient Check and re-set the chemistry correspondence
communicati failed. or redundant chemistries on the LIS host. between the operating software and the LIS host.
on Sample ID/bar code:
Position:
C07003 Light source Error Light intensity is too / 1. The lamp is not installed correctly. Refer to 10.2.7 for processing.
weak 2. The lamp is aging.
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 10-50

class Event Log
C07005 Light source Error Lamp is not turned / 1. The lamp is damaged. Refer to 10.2.8 for processing.
on 2. The lamp cable is not connected
properly.
3. The power board of the lamp is not
connected properly.
4. The power supply of the analyzing unit
is disconnected.
5. The AD collection board goes wrong.
C07006 Light source Error Light intensity is too / 1. The lamp is aging. Refer to 10.2.9 for processing.
strong 2. The circuit gain is too high and beyond
the measurement range.
C07007 Light source Error Dark current is too / 1. The circuit gain is too high and beyond Refer to 10.2.14 for processing.
high the measurement range.
Channel:
2. The power board of the lamp is not
AD:
connected properly.
3. The AD collection board goes wrong.
C07012 Other error of Warning Storage device error. / No floppy disk or U disk is inserted. No file Check if U disk or floppy disk is inserted or full;
operation Cannot import data is found in the floppy disk or U disk, or file Check if storage device is damaged
unit error, or file is damaged. The floppy disk
or U disk is locked or damaged.
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 10-51

class Event Log
C07013 Other error of Warning Storage device error. / No floppy disk or U disk is inserted. Check if U disk or floppy disk is inserted or full;
operation Cannot export data Insufficient disk space. The floppy disk or Check if storage device is damaged
unit U disk is locked or damaged.
C07014 Other error of Warning Reagent exhausted / All reagents in this kind of bottles do not Refill or replace the reagent.
operation Chemistry: reach minimum limit; All reagents of this
unit Position: kind cannot be detected
C07016 Other error of Warning Insufficient wash / Insufficient wash solution on the Refill the wash solution on the sample/reagent
operation solution sample/reagent carousel. carousel.
unit Position:
C07017 Other error of Warning Wash solution is / Wash solution is exhausted on the Refill the wash solution on the sample/reagent
operation exhausted sample/reagent carousel. carousel.
unit Position:
C07022 Other error of Warning Less than X tests are / All reagents in this kind of bottles do not Refill or replace the reagent.
operation left in biochemistry reach minimum limit; All reagents of this
unit reagent. Chemistry: kind cannot be detected
C07023 Other error of Warning Chemistry: %s, 30 / The calibration factors are about to be Recalibrate the chemistry.
operation minutes left for next expired.
unit calibration.
C07027 Other error of Warning Calibrator %s has / The calibrator is expired. Replace the calibrator.
operation been expired
unit
C07028 Other error of Warning Chemistry: %s, lot / Expired Replace the reagent.
operation No.: %s,
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 10-52

class Event Log
unit position: %s, has
been expired
C07029 Other error of Warning Chemistry: %s, lot / The uncapping time of the reagent pack is Replace the reagent.
operation No.: %s, too long.
unit position: %s, has
exceeded the on-
board stability time
C07034 Other error of Warning Insufficient / Insufficient physiological saline on Refill the physiological saline on the
operation physiological saline sample/reagent carousel sample/reagent carousel.
unit Position:
C07035 Other error of Warning Physiological saline / Physiological saline is exhausted on Refill the physiological saline on the
operation is exhausted sample/reagent carousel. sample/reagent carousel.
unit Position:
C07036 Other Warning Chemistry: %s. / The calibration factors have been expired. Recalibrate the chemistry.
Calibration factors
are expired
C07037 Other Warning Reagent bottle / Serial number of the reagent is changed. Reagent serial number of the chemistry is
number of %s changed. Please recalibrate
chemistry is
changed. Please
recalibrate
C07038 Other Warning Reagent lot number / Lot number of the reagent is changed. Reagent lot number of the chemistry is changed.
of %s chemistry is Please recalibrate
changed. Please
recalibrate
C07039 Other Warning Calibration factors / The calibration factors are expired. The calibration factors are expired.
of %s chemistry are
expired. Recalibrate
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 10-53

class Event Log
C07040 Other Warning Reagent exhausted / Reagent exhausted Refill or replace the reagent.
Chemistry: Reagent probe does not detect liquid level
C07041 Other Error ISE reagent is less / Inventory of the ISE reagent is lower than Check the inventory, and refill ISE reagent if
than %s the alarm limit. necessary.
C07042 Other Warning %s, lot number: %s, / One or more special reagents have Replace the reagent.
position: %s, has expired.
been expired
C07045 Other Warning ISE wash solution is / ISE Wash solution is exhausted. Add the ISE wash solution.
exhausted.
C07046 Other Warning ISE wash solution is / ISE wash solution is insufficient. Add the ISE wash solution.
insufficient.
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 10-54

11 Parts List
Table 11-1 Parts list
Location &
Order Number 801 Number Part Number Part Description Part Name in PI&PO Applicable Range
Reference
051-002413-00 N/A 051-002413-00 BS-230 Drive Board BA24 Power Driver Board N/A Above main board
115-039563-00 N/A 115-039563-00 Main Board (Open system) Main board(opend system) N/A N/A
115-039564-00 N/A 115-039564-00 Main Board (Close system 3 User-defined) Main board(Close System 3 User-defined) N/A N/A
801-BA10-00020- BA20-30-
N/A Reagent Refrigeration Board Reagent Refrigeration Board N/A N/A
00 75227
801-BA10-00004- BA10-30-
N/A A/D Convertion Board A/D Convertion Board N/A N/A
00 77759
051-002532-00 N/A 051-002532-00 Power Board BA24 Power Board PCBA N/A In Power Box
051-002479-00 N/A 051-002479-00 LLD Board Integration Liquid Detecting Board PCBA N/A N/A
BA10-30-
BA10-30-77760 N/A Pre-amplifier Board Preamplification Board N/A N/A
77760
801-BA80-00076-
N/A 115-005512-00 Motor for Syringe subassembly N/A N/A
00
115-038798-00 N/A 115-038798-00 Motor for Reaction Disk reaction plate motor assembly N/A N/A
115-036317-00 N/A 115-036317-00 Motor for Sample/Reagent Disk Reagent/sample Disk Motor Assembly N/A N/A
801-BA20-00122- 801-BA20-00122-
115-005246-00 Step Motor (42mm C) with Belt Wheel Step Motor (42mm C) with Belt Wheel Motor for sample probe horizontal movement N/A
00 00
115-038797-00 N/A 115-038797-00 Vertical Motor vertical motor assembly(BA24) Motor for sample probe or mixer vertical movement N/A
801-BA10-00023- 801-BA10-00023- BA30-10-
DC Motor for mixer DC Motor(6V) DC Motor for mixer N/A
00 00 15052
801-BA20-00057- 801-BA20-00057-
024-000149-00 Step Motor(42mm C) Step Motor(42mm C) N/A N/A
00 00
115-038630-00 N/A 115-038630-00 motor module of syringe motor module of syringe N/A
115-038595-00 N/A 115-038595-00 Drive Assembly of syringe drive of syringe N/A N/A
801-BA23-00025- 801-BA23-00025-
082-000430-00 S/R Syringe Reagent Syringe.500ul(ZDV)(FRU) N/A N/A
00 00
115-038796-00 N/A 115-038796-00 Horizontal Motor horizontal motor assembly(BA24) Motor for sample probe or mixer rotation N/A
0040-10-32301 N/A 0040-10-32301 Tube PTFE 0.040"IDX0.066"OD,250FT Tube PTFE 0.040"IDX0.066"OD,250FT D06 N/A
801-BA10-00131- 801-BA10-00131- BA10-21-
Reaction Disk Bottom Heater Reactor lower Heator connector N/A
00 00 78143
009-006306-00 N/A 009-006306-00 Reaction Disk Temperature Sensor Temprature Sensor Wire of Reaction Disk N/A N/A
801-BA10-00091- 801-BA10-00091- BA10-21-
Reaction Disk Top Heater Reaction Top Heater N/A N/A
00 00 78142
801-BA10-00104- 801-BA10-00104- BA10-21-
Reaction Disk Thermal Protector Thermal Protector (70°C) N/A N/A
00 00 78147
801-BA10-00037- 801-BA10-00037- BA40-21- Peltier Peltier Cooler N/A N/A
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 11-1

00 00 61655
801-BA30-00088- 801-BA30-00088-
024-000110-00 Reagent Refrigeration Temperature Sensor Reagent Temp Sensor N/A N/A
00 00
115-037552-00 N/A 115-037552-00 Reagent Preheater Assembly reagent preheat asm N/A N/A
023-000738-00 N/A 023-000738-00 Barcode Scanner MS-3 Laser scanner N/A N/A
115-038793-00 N/A 115-038793-00 Barcode Upgrade Package Barcode module kit N/A N/A
801-BA10-00029- 801-BA10-00029- BA31-30-
Home sensor of syringe Initial Position Sensor of Syringe N/A N/A
00 00 41501
BA10-20-
BA10-20-78212 N/A Cable from main board to serial cable port Computer communication patch cord N/A N/A
78212
801-BA40-00254- 801-BA40-00254-
M07-00061S--- Main Power Switch Main Power Switch N/A N/A
00 00
009-002204-00 N/A 009-002204-00 Home Sensor wire of Optical Switch(s) Home sensor for reaction disk or sampleN/Areagent disk N/A
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 11-2

12 LIS Connection Setting and

Troubleshooting
12.1 Overview of LIS
The LIS system is abbreviated from Laboratory Information System (Laboratory) and an important part of the
hospital information management. The LIS system has the main features including but not limited to specimen
check and acceptance, report processing, report review and specimen transfer. The stability of the LIS system
will significantly affect the normal operation of the laboratory department and even the diagnosis of clinicians.
The LIS system is also an important part for 15189 review process of the laboratory department. Medical
organizations pay more and more attention to medical information technology, including establishment of the
LIS system. The LIS system is also closely related to other systems in a hospital, including HIS system and
electronic medical records system. When an operator reviews a report in the LIS system, the self-service report
printer, out-patient medical workstation, in-patient medical workstation, including WeChat official account and
Alipay can receive the test result from the LIS system in real time. The LIS system has more and more data
interactions with other HIS subsystems.
For a equipment manufacturer, the equipment is normally connected to the LIS system which will print the lab
report. This is one of the most important sign indicating whether the equipment is enabled. To allow an engineer
to effectively coordinate the debugging operation of the LIS interface, the following sections focus on basic
knowledges and common problems concerning LIS connection.
12.2 LIS Networking
The communication between a computer (hereinafter referred to as workstation) and the LIS system is based
on TCP/IP protocol and data is transmitted via serial port or Ethernet port (cable transmission). The stability of
the network is very critical to the communication of the LIS system. The workstation configured for the
equipment shall have 2 or more network cards, and the workstation resides in the same network as that of the
equipment and LIS computer.
Figure 12-1 LIS connection diagram
12.2.1 Querying State of RS232 Serial Port Card and Network Card
Identifying the installation state of RS232 serial port and network card driver is an important part for detecting
the network state. If the driver is not installed, or any exception occurs to the installed driver, even if the
hardware including serial cable or network cable works normally, the network communication may be faulty.
Select [Computer] - [Property] - [Device Manager] - [Port] to check the installation of serial port card driver to
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 12-1

IVD Global Technical Support Dept.
check the state of the serial port.
Select [Computer] - [Property] - [Device Manager] - [Network Adapter] to check the installation of network card
driver to check the state of the network card. Open Network and Sharing Center -> Control Panel\Network &
Internet\Network Connection to check network connection.
12.2.2 Checking Network Status
One of the network cards configured to the workstation is used to communicate with the LIS computer. Use a
network cable to connect the workstation to the LIS computer and use the "ping" command to check the
connectivity of the network.
ping is also a communication protocol as a part of TCP/IP protocol. The "ping" command can be used to check
the connectivity of the network and helpful in analyzing and identifying network failure. It is applied in the
following format: ping (a space) IP address.
Use the following steps to set the IP address of one of network works in the workstation computer to the same
network segment as that of the LIS system:
1) Click the "Network Connections" icon on the computer, open "Network and Sharing Center" and then
click "Local Connection".
2) Click "Details" to check IP address, subnet mask, default gateway and DNS server.
3) Open Network and Sharing Center -> check Active Network -> click and select Network Connections
- Connection - Properties (select Internet protocol version 4).
Set IP address and other information on this interface. The network between workstation computer and LIS
system is set according to the network architecture of a hospital.
Figure 12-2 Input IP address

IP setting of workstation computer in a hospital
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 12-2

Figure 12-3 IP setting of workstation computer in a hospital

The IP address of the workstation computer shall be in the same network segment as that of LIS computer.
4) On the workstation, use the Win + R combination key and input CMD into the Run input box to enter
the command console:
Figure 12-4 Run screen

5) Input ping + IP of the LIS computer. If you are actually returned with bytes, the network is connected.
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 12-3

Figure 12-5 Network connected

Request timeout, data lost.
Figure 12-6 Network disconnected

6) Perform step 5 on the LIS computer to check if the network is connected
12.3 LIS Parameter Setup
12.3.1 Introduction to Protocols
Mindray devices strictly follow HL7 protocol and ASTM protocol. LIS manufacturers, at their discretion, decide
to use what protocol to implement LIS interface connection, i.e. via Ethernet port or serial port.
There are detailed descriptions about field and domain for message headers and separator domains defined
in HL7 protocol and ASTM protocol. LIS interface engineers shall strictly follow the examples given in the
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 12-4

communication protocol to develop LIS interfaces. This User Manual further explains the communication
protocol so that LIS engineers can be directed more effectively to develop interfaces.
The ASTM protocol is not specific to serial port. It is also applicable to Ethernet port. ASTM and HL7 protocols
define the message transfer format while serial port and Ethernet port are means for transferring data.
Note:
Serial port or Ethernet port is only a means for transferring data. The cross serial port cable used in data
transfer shall meet RS232C specifications.
12.3.2 Parameter Setup on a Workstation Computer
[Apply] - [System Setup] - [LIS Setup]
If Auto Connect to LIS is checked, the machine will be automatically connected to the LIS interface. A port is
set by the LIS system. The port on the workstation shall be set the same as that of the LIS system. Do not set
the port number to 80/8080.
After Retry after Disconnect is checked, the machine will automatically connect to the LIS system if LIS
disconnection is detected.
Figure 12-7 Transport setup

BS-230 allows interaction with the LIS system via serial port or Ethernet port. ASTM and HL7 standards are
only protocols and not related to transport medium. Both HL7 protocol and ASTM protocol allow transfer of
test data via serial port or Ethernet port.
12.3.3 Basic Concept of Unidirectional/Bidirectional LIS
Communication
Unidirectional LIS communication:
The machine only sends the test result to the LIS system and receives no any instruction from the LIS system.
The machine, after test, will automatically send related data to the LIS system which will then analyze the
received test result.
Bidirectional LIS communication:
The machine not only sends the test data to the LIS system but also receives an instruction from the LIS
system.
After recognizing the barcode containing sample information, the machine will send the "Inquiring sample
information" instruction to the LIS system which will then retrieve the matching information about test items
therefrom according to received sample information. If the information about test items are retrieved, the LIS
system shall return messages in a fixed format to the machine within the specified period of time.
The uniqueness of a sample is identified by a bar code. Once a barcode for a sample is generated, it is unique
and cannot be changed.
Note: Regardless of bidirectional LIS communication or unidirectional LIS communication, the LIS shall always
make response to the information sent from the machine.
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 12-5

The unidirectional and bidirectional LIS communications have the basically same settings on LIS Setup ->
Transport Setup, with the only difference in
Bidirectional LIS setup:
1) From [Apply] - [System Setup] - [LIS Setup], select Bidirectional for the communication mode.
2) From [Apply] - [System Setup] - [Barcode Setup], select [Auto Number Scanned Samples].
Figure 12-8 Sample Bar Code
12.3.4 Channel ID Setup

Purpose of channel ID (item code): A channel ID plays an important role in LIS communication. In unidirectional
LIS communication, if there is a test item without setting a channel ID (item code), the result will not be sent to
the LIS system. Missing of test results is often resulted from failure to set a channel ID.
When a sample shall be diluted before testing, a channel ID is divided into a general channel ID and a dilution
channel ID which have the same setting method. However, a general channel ID shall not be the same as a
dilution channel ID, and do not carry out the original content test and dilution test for the same specimen at the
same time. The LIS system can process the general testing and dilution testing separately, but only one
channel ID is active when the machine is communicating with the LIS system.
The role of a channel ID is more important in bidirectional LIS communication. Without setting a channel ID,
or when the channel ID (item code) of the machine does not match that of the LIS system, when the machine
identifies the sample barcode and then sends the "Inquiring sample information" instruction to the LIS system,
the LIS system will not match correct information about sample items from the background according to the
barcode. To correctly transfer information about sample items, use the channel ID set in the LIS system. If the
LIS system sends a channel ID not set in the machine or a wrong channel ID, the machine will receive the
information with an alarm and reject to process it.
Steps to set a channel ID:
1) Disconnect the LIS system before maintaining a channel ID
2) Double click the blank area after an item and input the pre-defined channel ID (it is determined by
the LIS engineer).
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 12-6

No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 12-7

Figure 12-9 Channel ID setup

Note: In general, only the LIS system administrator has permission to set a channel ID in the LIS system. Any
other persons are not authorized to edit a channel ID.
The channel ID maintained on the workstation computer shall be the same as that on the LIS system.
For example, the channel ID setup interface of the LIS system.
12.4 Operation Guidance of Test Tool
Please download the LIS test tool from the TDP platform
TDP/Bio-chemistry/LIS/LIS tool
Role of test tool: The tool is mainly intended for testing the LIS communication function of the machine (the
capability of sending the test result after specimen testing)
The LIS communication function is one of the most basic functions of the software. Methods to process raw
data may be different, depending on LIS manufacturers. When a test result is missed or part of results goes
wrong during transfer, you can use a data reception tool to check the cause. If it is checked that data sent from
the machine is completely consistent with that displayed in the workstation log, you can simply locate the LIS
interface to address the problem with raw data. Therefore, you can simply use the test tool to find out the
reason for an LIS problem. This tool mainly helps an engineer to check raw data sent from the machine.
The machine and LIS system cannot be used as the client or server side at the same time. Instead, there can
be the case where one is the client and the other is the server side. Note that port numbers are consistent. If
the 2 conditions above are met, the basic communication conditions are established. As a client, the machine
has the function to automatically connect to the LIS system.
12.4.1 Operation Procedure of Test Tool
1) Double click the "Mindray.exe" app
Note: The bi-direction test checkbox is checked by default. The server side mode is used by default.
Copy the Mindray.exe test tool to the workstation computer. Open Mindray.exe and exit the LIS system. Set
the port number and IP address in LIS setup on the workstation computer the same as that on the test tool,
and use the test tool as the client.
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 12-8

Figure 12-10 LIS tool
2) Setting port number and IP address

Setting port number and IP address is the most important link for implementing simulation of bidirectional LIS
communication.
Note: Click the "Log" button to generate a log which can be accessed from the path :LisDebug\Lislog.txt.
Click the "Clear" button to clear raw data.

Setting port number: The port numebr shall be identical to that set in the test tool.
IP is set to point to LIS IP. If the LIS system is installed on the computer connected to the machine, IP can be
set to Local IP (127.0.0.1). If the LIS system is not installed on the computer connected to the machine, IP is
set to Distance IP.
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 12-9

3) Simulating bidirectional LIS communication

When simulating bidirectional LIS communication, this tool can visualize the communication between the test
tool and the machine and generate a communication log which can be used to describe how to implement
bidirectional LIS communication to be used for simulation by an engineer. This can be an important guidance
for LIS engineers to develop bidirectional LIS interfaces.
The communication protocol and principle used by this test tool is identical to LIS system. However, it has only
part of LIS features and cannot completely be used as an alternative for LIS.
This test tool completely gives the data flow of bidirectional LIS communication and reduces the difficulty in
understanding bidirectional LIS communication and interface development on the engineer side.

The configuration file is mainly intended for maintaining item information and patient information sent to the
machine during bidirectional LIS communication testing.
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 12-10

Figure 12-14 LIS channel ID

Note: By default, the Mindray.exe tool assigns default values to basic patient information during programming.
A channel ID shall be manually entered in MRsettings.ini.
LIS Engineer's Need-to-Know
 Start character: char(11) Ox0B
 Carriage return character: char(13) Ox0B
 Stop character: char(13)+char(28) Ox0D+Ox1C
 ASCII (American Standard Code for Information Interchange) is a computer encoding system based
on Latin alphabet and mainly used for displaying Modern English and other Western-European
languages. It is now the most common single-byte coding system https://baike.baidu.com/item/编码
/80092. In interactions of LIS communication information, part of codes in the ASCII chart are used
as control characters. Therefore, LIS engineers shall identify the start character and stop character
when developing LIS interfaces. If all conditions are met, data is valid, with the start character being
single-byte char(11) Ox0B and stop character being multi-byte char(13)+char(28) Ox0D+Ox1C.
08,00:46:09:140,LinkLayer
Log: =><SB>MSH|^~\&|||||20180708004609||QRY^Q02|2487|P|2.3.1||||||ASCII|||<CR>
QRD|20180708004609|R|D|1169|||RD|120000116538|OTH|||T|<CR>
QRF||||||RCT|COR|ALL||<CR>
<EB><CR>
,
Messages in LIS communication use fixed format. Each sample message contains control characters which
are invisible to the naked eye but they have to exist. The machine will convert the start character to <SB> and
stop character to <EB><CR> in order to completely express received messages.
Regardless of receiving the sample application information or response message from the LIS system, the
machine will always detect both the start and stop characters in the message frame. An LIS engineer shall not
treat the start character and stop character as a character in the LIS interface, nor add or delete control
characters.
12.5 Common Problems and Corrective Measures
12.5.1 LIS cannot be connected
First, check whether the port number set on the workstation computer matches that of the LIS interface. Do
not use port number 80/8080. Next, check whether the IP address of the workstation matches that of the LIS
host and check that the workstation is properly connected to the LIS host.
The machine is used as the client and the LIS is used as the server side by default. The machine can be
automatically connected to the LIS.
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 12-11

12.5.2 LIS communication interrupted suddenly
 LIS sudden interruption: The "Transmission (TX)" button of the LIS is grayed out. The button is black
in normal state.
 The HOST status bar flashes always. It is blue in normal state. (In the condition that the LIS interface
is active)
 The machine software displays that the LIS is connected, but the "TX" button is grayed out (in the
condition that the LIS interface is active)
 The machine software displays that the LIS is not connected, and the "TX" button is grayed out (in
the condition that the LIS interface is active)
 The Connect icon is on and then grayed out (In the condition that the LIS interface is active)
For Mindray machines, the administrator permission is required for LIS communication to normally transmit
test results and implement information interaction. Change administrator permissions as below:
Figure 12-15 Run regedit
Figure 12-16 Registry

The EnableUA value is normally 0: from the Registry, change the EnableUA value to 0
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Microsoft\Windows\CurrentVersion\Policies\System
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 12-12

Figure 12-17 LIS state
12.5.3 Issues with firewall

Firewall settings will also affect the LIS communication. Check the firewall settings in both the machine and
LIS system sides.
Firewall policy: For the sake of security, some labs will customize some policies to allow only the port number
specified by the LIS system for communication. This is wrong. Although the port number used for LIS
communication is fixed, data communication inside the machine is randomly assigned with a port number.
Therefore, a port number shall not be fixed or limited to a certain range.
Windows system is a copy: Some computer systems are not an authorized edition, especially for non-
authorized edition with the desktop displayed as black ground that will affect the LIS communication. In this
case, please install an authorized edition and then deploy the LIS environment again.
12.5.4 Invalid LIS response
During LIS communication, especially when transmitting test results, the workstation can continue
communication only when a correct response message is received from the LIS system; otherwise, the
communication is blocked.
Error C06005 Sending sample results failed
Main cause: After sending the sample results, the machine does not receive the valid ACK message from the
LIS system.
The machine will identify this as sending failure.
Error C06007 Inquiring sample information failed
Main cause: The machine issues the "Inquiring sample information" instruction to the LIS system. That is, the
machine scans the barcode and then sends the barcode information to the LIS system. However the LIS
system fails to return the information about what is test item on the barcode in the specified period of time or
correct format, and an alarm is generated. For an example of this, see below.
22,10:28:59:523,LinkLayer
Log: =><SB>MSH|^~\&|||||20190222102859||QRY^Q02|10|P|2.3.1||||||ASCII|||<CR>
QRD|20190222102859|R|D|9|||RD|1902224828|OTH|||T|<CR>
<EB><CR>
22,10:28:59:668,LinkLayer
Log: <=<SB>MSH|^~\&|||||20190222102859||QCK^Q02|10|P|2.3.1||||||ASCII||<CR>
MSA|AA|10|Message accepted|||0|<CR>
ERR|0|<CR>
QAK|SR|OK|<CR>
<EB><CR>
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 12-13

22,10:28:59:669,MSH segment field count < 19 error[Count = 18].,
22,10:28:59:669, Parse segment[1] of message error[Ret = -2147090430]. ,
22,10:28:59:669,LinkLayer Log: CLinkLayer::DealFrame create FetchRcvFrm(),
Figure 12-18 LIS code

If there is a problem with message ACK, then an error will occur when item information is transmitted to the
machine later.
Figure 12-19 LIS item information
12.5.5 ISE response time out

27,11:33:07:185,LinkLayer
Log: =><SB>MSH|^~\&|||||20180727113307||ORU^R01|3583|P|2.3.1||||0||ASCII|||
27,11:33:37:194,AppLayer Log: Application Layer Timeout !!!,
:
:
:
27,11:33:37:198, sending sample results failed. Sample ID/bar code: 3032, position: N0016-2,
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 12-14

Figure 12-20 LIS sample result
When the "Sending sample results failed" error occurs, check whether a response message is developed for
the LIS interface.
The response time can be set to 10 s, 20 s or 30 s in LIS setup.
When the workstation sends sample results, the LIS system shall make response. If the response is given for
more than 10 s, the machine will alert response timeout. An alarm will be also generated when the response
format is wrong. An LIS engineer shall pay special attention to start character, stop character and message ID
when processing response messages. Message ID is a variable. Not all message IDs sent each time are 1.
<SB>MSH|^~\&|LIS-Server|NanShan
Hospital|Mindray|BS-400|20090216201111||ACK^R01|64|P|2.3.1||||0||ASCII|||<CR>
<EB><CR>,
Problems with bidirectional LIS communication due to problems with channel ID
12.5.6 LIS communication result slowly transmitted
The machine has a mechanism to check response. That is, the machine will continue communication only
when it receives a valid response from the LIS system after a sample result is sent out. Otherwise, it will wait
for a valid response. Sending the test result from the machine to the LIS system may take a very short time. If
an engineer finds that transmitting a test result takes several minutes or longer, there is a high probability that
the LIS system has no response or gives wrong response.
In this case, an LIS engineer is recommended to check the response format of the LIS interface.
Note:
Message ID in a response message is a variable but not a constant. Message ID uses that given in the sample
result.
Response message:
<SB>MSH|^~\&|LIS-Server|NanShan
Hospital|Mindray|BS-400|20090216201111||ACK^R01|64|P|2.3.1||||0||ASCII|||<CR>
<EB><CR>,
12.5.7 Part of item results missed during LIS communication
If part of item results are missed when transmission to the LIS system, check the channel ID, especially
checking whether this is a calculation item.
12.6 Bidirectional LIS communication interaction log
11,09:57:56:467,LinkLayer Log:=>
<SB>MSH|^~\&|||||20180811095756||QRY^Q02|1|P|2.3.1||||||ASCII|||<CR>
QRD|20180811095756|R|D|1|||RD|002100418080230050|OTH|||T|<CR>
<EB><CR>
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 12-15

11,09:57:56:558,LinkLayerLog: <=<SB>MSH|^~\&|||||20180811095756||QCK^Q02|1|P|2.3.1||||||ASCII|||<CR>
ERR|0|<CR>
QAK|SR|OK|<CR>
<EB><CR>
MSH|^~\&|||||20180811095756||DSR^Q03|1|P|2.3.1||||||ASCII|||<CR>
ERR|0|<CR>
QAK|SR|OK|<CR>
QRD|20180811095756|R|D|2|||RD||OTH|||T|<CR>
DSP|1|||||<CR>
DSP|2|||||<CR>
DSP|3|||||<CR>
DSP|4|||||<CR>
DSP|5|||||<CR>
DSP|6|||||<CR>
DSP|7|||||<CR>
DSP|8|||||<CR>
DSP|9|||||<CR>
DSP|10|||||<CR>
DSP|11|||||<CR>
DSP|12|||||<CR>
DSP|13|||||<CR>
DSP|14|||||<CR>
DSP|15|||||<CR>
DSP|16|||||<CR>
DSP|17|||||<CR>
DSP|18|||||<CR>
DSP|19|||||<CR>
DSP|20|||||<CR>
DSP|21|002100418080230050||||<CR>
DSP|22|||||<CR>
DSP|23||20180811095756|||<CR>
DSP|24||N|||<CR>
DSP|25|||||<CR>
DSP|26||serum|||<CR>
DSP|27|||||<CR>
DSP|28|||||<CR>
DSP|29||2^^^|||<CR>
DSP|30||13^^^|||<CR>
DSP|31||6^^^|||<CR>
DSP|32||7^^^|||<CR>
DSP|33||8^^^|||<CR>
DSP|34||9^^^|||<CR>
DSP|35||10^^^|||<CR>
DSP|36||11^^^|||<CR>
DSP|37||12^^^|||<CR>
DSP|38||1^^^|||<CR>
DSC||<CR>
<EB><CR>
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 12-16

11,09:57:56:732,LinkLayer
Log: =><SB>MSH|^~\&|||||20180811095756||ACK^Q03|1|P|2.3.1||||||ASCII|||<CR>
ERR|0|<CR>
<EB><CR>
Role of Analysis Tool
A data analysis tool allows copy and paste of raw data of the machine for analysis.
08,23:03:18:947,LinkLayer
Log: =><SB>MSH|^~\&|||||20180708230318||ORU^R01|2800|P|2.3.1||||0||ASCII|||<CR>
PID|1472|||||||O|||||||||||||||||||||||<CR>
OBR|1472||9015|^|N|20180708224731|20180708224703|20180708224703||1^1||||20180708224703|serum|||
|||||||5|||||||||||||||||||||||<CR>
OBX|1|NM|4|calcium|2.252133|mmol/L|-|N|||F||2.252133|20180708225609|||0|<CR>
OBX|2|NM|5|magnesium|0.569389|mmol/L|-|N|||F||0.569389|20180708225829|||0|<CR>
OBX|3|NM|6|inorganic phosphorus|1.578690|mmol/L|-|N|||F||1.578690|20180708230304|||0|<CR>
OBX|4|NM|10|total bilirubin (vanadate oxidation method)|8.779144|μmol/L|-
|N|||F||8.779144|20180708230315|||0|<CR>
OBX|5|NM|11|direct bilirubin (vanadate oxidation method)|3.441980|μmol/L|-
|N|||F||3.441980|20180708230318|||0|<CR>
OBX|6|NM|16|adenosine deaminase|7.739112|U/L|-|N|||F||7.739112|20180708230311|||0|<CR>
OBX|7|NM|17|prealbumin|230.296762|mg/L|-|N|||F||230.296762|20180708230300|||0|<CR>
OBX|8|NM|18|total bile acid|1.787443|μmol/L|-|N|||F||1.787443|20180708230130|||0|<CR>
OBX|9|NM|19|alanine aminotransferase|19.820950|U/L|-|N|||F||19.820950|20180708230134|||0|<CR>
OBX|10|NM|20|aspartate amino transferase |39.088345|U/L|-|N|||F||39.088345|20180708230137|||0|<CR>
OBX|11|NM|21|alkaline phosphatase|130.115058|U/L|-|N|||F||130.115058|20180708230130|||0|<CR>
OBX|12|NM|22|γ-glutamyltransferase|67.893341|U/L|-|N|||F||67.893341|20180708230134|||0|<CR>
OBX|13|NM|23|lipoprotein (a)|71.263917|mg/L|-|N|||F||71.263917|20180708230217|||0|<CR>
OBX|14|NM|24|total protein|48.843538|g/L|-|N|||F||48.843538|20180708230224|||0|<CR>
OBX|15|NM|25|cholinesterase|4114.479156|U/L|-|N|||F||4114.479156|20180708225949|||0|<CR>
OBX|16|NM|26|albumin|29.379028|g/L|-|N|||F||29.379028|20180708225721|||0|<CR>
OBX|17|NM|27|lipase|10.279494|U/L|-|N|||F||10.279494|20180708230130|||0|<CR>
OBX|18|NM|28|α-amylase|63.568402|U/L|-|N|||F||63.568402|20180708230039|||0|<CR>
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 12-17

OBX|19|NM|29|apolipoprotein A1|1.740667|g/L|-|N|||F||1.740667|20180708230217|||0|<CR>
OBX|20|NM|30|apolipoprotein B|1.241503|g/L|-|N|||F||1.241503|20180708230231|||0|<CR>
OBX|21|NM|31|triglyceride|5.302102|mmol/L|-|N|||F||5.302102|20180708230235|||0|<CR>
OBX|22|NM|33|low density lipoprotein cholesterin|2.838998|mmol/L|-
|N|||F||2.838998|20180708230231|||0|<CR>
OBX|23|NM|34|high density lipoprotein cholesterin|1.156541|mmol/L|-
|N|||F||1.156541|20180708230235|||0|<CR>
OBX|24|NM|35|total cholesterol|5.675223|mmol/L|-|N|||F||5.675223|20180708225732|||0|<CR>
OBX|25|NM|36|creatinine (sarcosine oxidase method)|61.837352|μmol/L|-
|N|||F||61.837352|20180708230239|||0|<CR>
OBX|26|NM|38|uric acid|436.774956|μmol/L|-|N|||F||436.774956|20180708230242|||0|<CR>
OBX|27|NM|40|cystatin C|1.232627|mg/L|-|N|||F||1.232627|20180708230246|||0|<CR>
OBX|28|NM|41|urea|3.750785|mmol/L|-|N|||F||3.750785|20180708230116|||0|<CR>
BX|29|NM|43|creatine kinase MB isoenzyme|32.245208|U/L|-|N|||F||32.245208|20180708230242|||0|<CR>
OBX|30|NM|44|creatine kinase|62.994467|U/L|-|N|||F||62.994467|20180708230249|||0|<CR>
OBX|31|NM|45|lactic dehydrogenase |324.101538|U/L|-|N|||F||324.101538|20180708230217|||0|<CR>
OBX|32|NM|46|α-hydroxybutyrate dehydrogenase|243.997631|U/L|-
|N|||F||243.997631|20180708230213|||0|<CR>
OBX|33|NM|58|C reactive protein|36.545503|mg/L|-|N|||F||36.545503|20180708230257|||0|<CR>
OBX|34|NM|61|β2-microglobulin|2.708314|mg/L|-|N|||F||2.708314|20180708230300|||0|<CR>
OBX|35|NM|62|α-L-fucosidase |53.824504|U/L|-|N|||F||53.824504|20180708230123|||0|<CR>
OBX|36|NM|63|Fe|10.033768|μmol/L|-|N|||F||10.033768|20180708230257|||0|<CR>
OBX|37|NM|65|homocysteine (enzymatic cycling methods)|13.780098|μmol/L|-
|N|||F||13.780098|20180708230304|||0|<CR>
OBX|38|NM|1|Na|136.355000|mmol/L|-|N|||F||136.355000|20180708225006|||0|<CR>
OBX|39|NM|2|K|4.220000|mmol/L|-|N|||F||4.220000|20180708225006|||0|<CR>
OBX|40|NM|3|Cl|101.729000|mmol/L|-|N|||F||101.729000|20180708225006|||0|<CR>
OBX|41|NM|135|Glo|19.400000|g/L|-|N|||F||19.400000|||||<CR>
OBX|42|NM|136|A/G|1.515464||-|N|||F||1.515464|||||<CR>
OBX|43|NM|137|AST/ALT|1.972250||-|N|||F||1.972250|||||<CR>
OBX|44|NM|138|IBIL-V|5.340000|μmol/L|-|N|||F||5.340000|||||<CR>
<EB><CR>
This tool can display how the LIS interface process raw data from the machine and how the raw data from the
machine is analyzed and extracted, and generates a log in a specified format
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 12-18

Sample ID 9015
Channel ID -------------4--------|| item name --------calcium:--------:result 2.252133
Channel ID -------------5--------|| item name --------magnesium:--------:result 0.569389
Channel ID -------------6--------|| item name --------inorganic phosphorus:--------:result 1.578690
Channel ID-------------10--------||item name--------total bilirubin (vanadate oxidation method):--------:result
8.779144
Channel ID-------------11--------||item name--------direct bilirubin (vanadate oxidation method):--------:result
3.441980
Channel ID -------------16--------|| item name --------adenosine deaminase:--------:result 7.739112
Channel ID -------------17--------|| item name --------prealbumin:--------:result 230.296762
Channel ID -------------18--------|| item name --------total bile acid:--------:result 1.787443
Channel ID -------------19--------|| item name --------alanine aminotransferase:--------:result 19.820950
Channel ID -------------20--------|| item name --------aspartate amino transferase:--------:result 39.088345
Channel ID -------------21--------|| item name --------alkaline phosphatase:--------:result 130.115058
Channel ID -------------22--------|| item name --------γ-glutamyltransferase:--------:result 67.893341
Channel ID -------------23--------|| item name --------lipoprotein (a):--------:result 71.263917
Channel ID -------------24--------|| item name --------total protein:--------:result 48.843538
Channel ID -------------25--------|| item name --------cholinesterase:--------:result 4114.479156
Channel ID -------------26--------|| item name --------albumin:--------:result 29.379028
Channel ID -------------27--------|| item name --------lipase:--------:result 10.279494
Channel ID -------------28--------|| item name --------α-amylase:--------:result 63.568402
Channel ID -------------29--------|| item name --------apolipoprotein A1:--------:result 1.740667
Channel ID -------------30--------|| item name --------apolipoprotein B:--------:result 1.241503
Channel ID -------------31--------|| item name --------triglyceride:--------:result 5.302102
Channel ID -------------33--------|| item name --------low density lipoprotein cholesterin:--------:result 2.838998
Channel ID -------------34--------|| item name --------high density lipoprotein cholesterin:--------:result 1.156541
Channel ID -------------35--------|| item name --------total cholesterol:--------:result 5.675223
Channel ID -------------36--------|| item name --------creatinine (sarcosine oxidase method):--------:result
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 12-19

61.837352
Channel ID -------------38--------|| item name --------uric acid:--------:result 436.774956
Channel ID -------------40--------|| item name --------cystatin C:--------:result 1.232627
Channel ID -------------41--------|| item name --------urea:--------:result 3.750785
Channel ID -------------43--------|| item name --------creatine kinase MB isoenzyme:--------:result 32.245208
Channel ID -------------44--------|| item name --------creatine kinase:--------:result 62.994467
Channel ID -------------45--------|| item name --------lactic dehydrogenase:--------:result 324.101538
Channel ID -------------46--------|| item name --------α-hydroxybutyrate dehydrogenase:--------:result 243.997631
Channel ID -------------58--------|| item name --------C-reactive protein:--------:result 36.545503
Channel ID -------------61--------|| item name --------β2-microglobulin:--------:result 2.708314
Channel ID -------------62--------|| item name --------α-L-fucosidase:--------:result 53.824504
Channel ID -------------63--------|| item name --------Fe:--------:result 10.033768
Channel ID------------65--------||item name--------homocysteine (enzymatic cycling methods):--------:result
13.780098
Channel ID -------------1--------|| item name --------Na:--------:result 136.355000
Channel ID -------------2--------|| item name --------K:--------:result 4.220000
Channel ID -------------3--------|| item name --------Cl:--------:result 101.729000
Channel ID -------------135--------|| item name --------Glo:--------:result 19.400000
Channel ID -------------136--------|| item name --------A/G:--------:result 1.515464
Channel ID -------------137--------|| item name --------AST/ALT:--------:result 1.972250
Channel ID -------------138--------|| item name --------IBIL-V:--------:result 5.340000
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 12-20

13 Instrument Relocation and Emptying

13.1 Overview
When the analyzer is deactivated or should be moved to another working environment, process as follows.
13.1.1 Short-Term Suspension

If the analyzer is deactivated for a short term (within 3 days), the following operations are required on the
analyzer:
1) Enter the software, select Empty Fluidic Tubes. Refer to13.2 .
2) Remove all reagents and cleansers from the analyzer.
3) Exit the operating software, shut down the computer, and close the analyzing unit.
4) If the analyzer should be removed for storage, disconnect the main unit of the biochemical
analyzer from the computer, printer, display, and data cable, and follow the reverse steps of
8.4.4 Connect the pipeline to disconnect the tubing from the back end of the analyzing unit.
13.1.2 Long-Term Suspension

If the analyzer is deactivated for a long term (more than 3 days or several years), the following operations are
required on the analyzer:
4) Pack the analyzer according to section 13.4 Packing.
13.1.3 Analyzer Relocation

In the daily business of the laboratory, you may encounter the following situations that require the analyzer to
be relocated:
Out-Hospital Relocation
The laboratory will be relocated with the hospital or the analyzer will be transferred to another
branch for use.
The analyzer was donated to a lower-level hospital.
In-Hospital Relocation
The laboratory is refurbished and the analyzer must first be moved to a temporary department.
The laboratory is moved to a new room or a new buLLDing.
Relocation target: The movement of the analyzer may affect its normal use and have a certain impact on its
performance. The goal of the relocation is to ensure that its performance meets the business requirements
through subsequent alignment and verification as it moves.
Relocation steps:
4) Pack the analyzer according to section 13.4 Packing.
5) Transport to the target location
6) Install the analyzer according to 8 Installation..
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 13-1

13.2 Emptying Fluidic Tubes

Click Utility →Maintenance→Alignment →Empty Fluidic Tubes to enter the screen.
Figure 13-1 Utility →Maintenance→Alignment →Empty Fluidic Tubes screen
13.2.1 Empty ISE Tube (optional)

Empty Index
1) After the ISE tube is emptied, no water flows out from the tube connecting the ISE reagent pack.
2) All electrodes have been removed and the peristaltic pump tubing has been removed.
Empty method and steps:
1) Prepare the pipette, as shown below, and enter the Empty ISE Tube screen.
2) Use the pipette to aspirate 200 μl calibrator A from the sample loading port.
3) Place enough ISE wash solution at the required location on the sample\reagent carousel. Execute
the cleaning command and wait for the cleaning completed before proceeding to the next step;
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 13-2

Figure 13-2 Empty ISE Tube screen
4) Remove all electrodes except the reference electrode. Dispense the aspirated calibrator A into
electrodes K+, Cl- and Na+, and use adhesive tape to seal both ends of the electrodes.
5) Install 4 spacers, use an emptying device to connect the A/B ports on the wand to deionized water,
and then execute Purge A/B periodically for 40 times.
6) Disconnect deionized water from A/B ports and continue with the purging.
Remarks: The number of purging operations can be set according to the emptying condition until the residual
deionized water in the A and B tubes is completely drained, and no liquid flows out from the waste outlet.
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 13-3

Figure 13-3 Empty ISE Tube -Set purging times
7) Remove all electrodes and the emptying device, place the wand in the reagent pack, remove the
peristaltic pump tube, install the shielding box door, and tighten the screws on the shielding box.
Figure 13-4 Remove the pump tube from the peristaltic pump
13.2.2 Empty exterior Tube

Empty Index
1) No water is sprayed out from the outlet of the exterior wash well of the mixer.
2) Check the waste outlet and there should be no colored waste liquid flowing out.
1) Select Utility—>Maintenance—>Alignment—>Hydro Unit—> Valve/Floater/Pump Alignment
2) Click "Mech Reset" to move the probe and mix rod above the wash well.
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 13-4

Figure 13-5 Hydro Unit
Figure 13-6 Valve/Floater/Pump Alignment
3) Make sure that the waste tube of the machine is connected.

4) Check whether there is any colored waste liquid in the waste tube. If so, after confirming that the DI
water tank has water, select "P02 Exterior Wash" and click "Turn On". Make sure the pump is turned
on and let the wall wash water flush the wall waste tube until no colored liquid flows out of the waste
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 13-5

liquid outlet. Then click " Turn Off " to turn off P02.
5) Empty the DI water tank, wash it and put it back in place.
6) Select "P02 Exterior Wash", click "Turn on ", confirm that the pump is on, observe the probe and the
water outlet of the wash well. When there is no more water, click " Turn Off "To turn off P02.
13.2.3 Empty Interior Tube

Empty Index
No water drops are sprayed out from the tip of the probe.
1) Disconnect the water inlet tube.
2) Select Utility-Maintenance-Maintenance- Biochemistry Maintenance, then click
Clean probes Interior.
Figure 13-7 Empty Wash Tubes screen
3) Set the number 20 times and click "Continue".

4) Observe the water at the tip of the probe. When no water droplets are ejected from the probe tip, click
“Exit” to exit this interface. If there is still water ejected after 20 executions, restart the operation.
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 13-6

Figure 13-8 Empty Wash Tubes screen
13.2.4 Emptying Waste Tubes

Empty Index
1) No water flows out from waste connector of the fluidics outlet assembly.
2) Wipe the water in the reagent\sample carousel.
1) Wipe the water on the fluidics inlet and outlet assemblies with a clean cloth and seal the inlet of
the DI water and waste with high temperature adhesive tape.
2) Remove the sample/reagent carousel, wipe the liquid in the chamber and in the carousel with a
clean cloth, and then reinstall it.
13.2.5 Use Count of Emptying Pump and Syringe

This interface can clear the pump usage times, please operate according to the actual situation.
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 13-7

13.2.6 Confirmation after emptying

1) Refer to the table below to confirm that the emptying has been completed.
Table 13-1 Confirmation list after emptying fluidic tubes
No. Chemistry Inspection Standard/Requirement
No water flows out from the tube connecting the ISE

Empty ISE Tube reagent pack.
1
(optional) All electrodes have been removed and the peristaltic
pump tubing has been removed.
No water is sprayed out from the outlet of the exterior
wash wells of the probe and the mixer.
2 Empty exterior Tube
There should be no colored waste liquid flowing out the
waste outlet.
3 Empty Interior Tube No water drops are sprayed out from the tip of the probe.
No water flows out from the waste connector of the fluidics
4 Emptying Waste Tubes outlet assembly.
Wipe the water drops in the sample reagent chamber.
13.3 Clearing Data

Note: This step is only performed when needed. By default, this step is skipped. This will erase all data on the
computer and cannot be recovered. Please be cautious!
If you need to delete historical data, please operate as follows:
1)Exit the BS-230 system software, return to the WINDOWS operation screen, open the control
panel from the Start menu, and uninstall the BS-230 system software.
2)Delete all system-independent files under the operating software installation path.
3)Delete all desktop shortcuts and files related to the BS-230 system, then perform Empty
Recycle Bin.
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 13-8

13.4 Packing
If the analyzer should be packed, please confirm whether the contents in the table below are
completed and whether the relevant materials have been prepared.
No. Check Item
1 The sample/reagent carousel has been emptied and cleaned
2 The reagents, cleansers, etc. in the analyzer have been taken out
3 The fluidic tubes have been emptied. Refer to 13.2 .
4 The materials list is as below:
 Tape. TESA4298 tape ivory white, 18 mmX50 (material ID: 095-000039-00)
 Stretch film width 450 mmX thickness 0.02 mm (material ID: A90-000095---)
 Roll foam. 53 M*1 M*8 mm (Material ID: 0000-10-10765)
 Bubble film Width 1 m Double flat Bubble Diameter 10 mm (material ID: A90-000077---)
 Heat shrinkable sleeve. Φ2.0 mm 105 Celsius degrees 600 V transparent (material ID: A20-
000018---), 1 for protecting the probe
 Cable tie (common tools, self-provided)
 Transparent sealed bag (self-provided)
 Sealing transparent tape (self-provided)
 Computer box (package left when installed)
 Accessory box (package left when installed)
 Main box and fixing screws (retained items when installed)
After confirming that the above items are correct, follow the installation guide in reverse. The specific steps are
as follows:
13.4.1 Removing the Tubes

Remove all tubes and tanks in reverse order of section8.4.4 Connect the pipeline, clean all tubes and tanks and
put them into the accessory box.
13.4.2 Removing the Accessories

1) According to the reverse order of 8.4.3 , respectively remove the probe and the mixer. Wrap the probe
tip with a heat shrinkable sleeve, place it into a sealed bag, and place it into the accessory box.
Note: Be careful not to lose the washer of the probe.
2) Remove the computer and the display, the serial cable and the power cable of the main unit.
13.4.3 Securing the Assemblies by Tape and Foam

Place the foam under the probe arm, the mixer arm, and then fix them with tape. Fix each loading hole,
sample/reagent carousel cover, and reaction carousel cover with tape.
13.4.4 Securing and Packing the Main Unit
1) Separate the main unit from the cabinet and wrap them with stretch film separately, first from the lower
side to the upper side, and then wrap the protective cover diagonally (the whole machine is wrapped
around tightly with 3-4 layers), and expose the carrying handle.
2) Pack the main unit and the cabinet according to the reverse order of section 8.4.1 Unpacking.
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 13-9

Among them, the four fixed brackets are shown as shown, and should not be misplaced. “F” is the front
of the instrument.
Figure 13-9 Pack the main unit
13.4.5 Packing the Accessories

Check that the accessories are complete (probe, mixer, tubing, tanks, instructions, operating cards, etc.) and
then wrap them in clear tape.
13.4.6 Packing the Main Unit and Display of the PC
1) Attach warning labels to the hand holes on both sides of the box of the computer main unit, and seal the
hand holes.
2) After attaching the serial number label on the box, bind the box with four straps as shown.
3) Bind the display box with two straps.
Figure 13-10 Pack the Main Unit and Display of the PC
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 13-10

14 Optional Modules
14.1 Overview
The optional modules include the ISE module, clog detection module and barcode scanning module.
When the client wants to add the above functions, you should perform the upgrade installation and alignment
work as follows to ensure that the modules function properly.
14.2 ISE Module

14.2.1 Overview of ISE Module
Please refer to 3.8 ISE Unit (Optional).
The ISE module upgrade requires ISE upgrade package (BS-230) 115-038791-00 and ISE accessory box (with
packaging) 115-003320-00.
14.2.2 Installing the ISE Module

1) Power off the whole machine, and remove the sample/reagent face plate, left side plate and back plate
of the analyzer. Refer to Figure 3-1 Shells assembly .
2) Remove the ISE module packaging and the accessories in the list.
3) Install the electrolyte module on the shielding box with four US screws #6-32X5/16 UNC-2A.
Shielding box
Four screws for fixing
Figure 14-1 Install the electrolyte module on the shielding box
4) Insert the connector of the waste tube into the ISE module, which should be tightly fit. Pay
attention to the installation direction, and the red seal should not fall off.
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 14-1

Check the
connector of the
ISE waste tube.
Figure 14-2 ISE waste tube connection
5)Install the adapter cable of the ISE module onto the ISE module, and install the ISE module on the
mainframe bottom plate with four M4X8 pan head combination screws. The screws are not tightened
at the moment, and then tighten them after confirming the position of the ISE module. Be careful not
to press on the wire.
Figure 14-3 Adapter cable of the ISE module
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 14-2

Figure 14-4 Secure the ISE module to the mainframe
6) Remove the six M3X6 screws from the three peristaltic pumps, add one M3 spring washer to each
screen, and then re-tighten the screws. Use twelve M2.5X6 Phillips pan head screws with flat
washers and spring washers to fix the three peristaltic pumps onto the lower bracket hole of the
syringe. Note that the wiring directions are upwards as shown in the figure.
Figure 14-5 Secure the peristaltic pumps of the ISE module
7) Use four M3X6 pan head screws with washers to mount the ISE power board onto the board
bracket:The position of the ISE power board is shown as below:
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 14-3

Figure 14-6 The postion of ISE Power board
8) Connect the power cord of the ISE module to the corresponding ISE power board.
ISE power board ISE module power cord
Figure 14-7 Connect the cable of the ISE power board
9) Connect the cables between the ISE module and the three peristaltic pumps.
Note: Bundle the cables at the peristaltic pumps during the assembly procedure, and prevent the cables from
coming into contact with the shafts of the three peristaltic pumps.
10) Connect the ISE tubes as shown in the following figure. Use the small cable ties on the ISE module
interface to attach the A and B tubes to the shielding box. Install a retaining ring SB-1316 in the
outlet hole of the shielding box of the ISE waste tube.
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 14-4

Figure 14-8 Connection diagram of ISE tubes
Figure 14-9 Physical map of ISE peristaltic pumps
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 14-5

Wire harness
retainer (small)
Figure 14-10 Cable tie of ISE module
11) After the installation is complete, follow the above steps to check again.
12) Open the operating software with the engineer user name and password and click UtilitySystem
SetupFactory Setup.
Figure 14-11 Utility-System Setup-Factory Setup
13) Click Optional Modules.
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 14-6

Figure 14-12 Factory Setup-Optional Modules
14) Tick the Enable/Disable ISE checkbox, and click OK.
Figure 14-13 Optional Modules-Enable/Disable ISE
15) Align the ISE module
14.2.3 Alignment of the ISE module

1) Select Utility—>Maintenance—>Alignment—>ISE Unit.See Figure 7-50 ISE unit Alignment.
2) Install the reference, Cl-, K+, Na+ and the spacer into the ISE module from the bottom to the top.
Caution:
 Please be careful not to lose the O-ring seals;
 It is recommended to install the electrodes from the bottom to the top. You need to press down the
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 14-7

base when you install the last electrode, to make sure the electrode is fixed well.
 Double check if the electrodes are fixed well.
Figure 14-14 Installation of ISE module electrodes
3) Connect the reagent pack to the reagent pack wand: as shown in the figure below, install the reagent
pack wand in place until you hear a "click" sound. Therefore, the "ISE communication error" appears.
Figure 14-15 Install the reagent pack wand
4) Align the probe postion. (Refer to7.5.8 Probe to Horizontal Postion on ISE Part (Optional) and 7.5.9
Probe to Vertical Postion on ISE Part (Optional))
5) Module Intialization,refer to 7.10.1 Module Intialization.
6) Put away the panels including the ISE shielding shell.
7)
Note: After the ISE module is installed, do not cut off the mains power (the power switch for
the analyzing unit can be cut off). If the mains power must be cut off and the downtime is more than 2
hours, empty the ISE and remove the electrodes. For details, refer to 13.2.1 Empty ISE Tube (optional).
To remove electrodes, the ISE module shall be cleaned and emptied as well.
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 14-8

14.2.4 Precautions for ISE

 Don’t turn off the main switch if the machine has ISE module. Because the machine primes every half an
hour automatically. Long time no priming can lead to damage of electrode
 After the upgrade of ISE module. We suggest standing and auto-prime for 24 hours before calibration and
normal test.
 After the ISE cleaning, please wait at least 15 minutes before calibration because the electrode is unstable
right after the cleaning.
 When execute calibration, we suggest calibrating 3-4 times, waiting the calibration data to be stable before
control or sample test.
 After electrodes are installed, the reagent pack shall be installed as well and at the same time, the mains
power for the analyzer shall be turned on to ensure that the ISE is continuously powered on.
 Carry out the calibration before ISE testing and the calibration result is normal. Otherwise, the accuracy of
the test result cannot be ensured.
 Clean it with MEDICA-specific wash solution at the end of daily operation (for details, refer to user manual);
 If testing for samples is carried out continuously for more than 8 hours or more than 50 consecutive samples
are tested, clean it and carry out calibration again.
 To remove electrodes, execute maintenance instructions and remove electrodes, along with the reagent
pack. Then, execute the ISE emptying procedure. For details, refer to 13.2.1 Empty ISE Tube (optional).
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 14-9

14.3 Bar Code Scanning Module

14.3.1 Overview of Bar Code Scanning Module
Auto entry of reagent/sample information: automatically enter the reagent/sample information using barcode
scanning module
For sample barcode indicators, please refer to Table 2-3 Sample bar code.
For reagent barcode indicators, please refer to Table 2-4 Reagent bar code.
To upgrade the barcode scanning module, a barcode module upgrade package is required (BA36) 115-047663-
00
14.3.2 Installing the Barcode Scanner

1) Power off the whole machine, and remove the front face plate of the analyzer, sample/reagent face
plate, left side plate and back plate. Refer to Figure 3-1 Shells assembly.
2) Remove the four M3X12 screws on the barcode scanning window cover on the sample/reagent
carousel and remove the cover.
Figure 14-16 Remove the scanning window cover
3) Install the reagent carousel anti-fog heating unit onto the reagent chamber with four M3X8 Phillips pan
head screws.
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 14-10

Figure 14-17 Install the reagent carousel anti-fog heating unit
4) Attach the dust cover with the sponge adjustment pad to the fixing plate with four M3X6 Phillips pan
head screws.
Figure 14-18 Install the dust cover
5) Use two M3X8 hex socket head caps with spring washers and large flat pads to secure the scanner
bracket to the barcode mounting plate. Use two M3X10 hex socket screws with spring washers and
large flat pads to mount the barcode scanner onto the scanner bracket. In this step, do not tighten the
two sets of screws. Align the position of the scanner first and then tighten the screws. Use two M3X8
hexagon socket screws with spring washers and large flat pads to secure the barcode mounting plate
to the underside of the frame beam and tighten the screws.
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 14-11

Barcode mounting plate
Scanner bracket
Barcode scanner
Figure 14-19 Secure and install the barcode scanner
6) Connect the cables between the anti-fog heater and the protection switch and between the Main board
and the barcode module to the corresponding connectors as shown in the figure.
The bar code scanner is connected to the main control board, and the wire is routed to the right
along the side of the bottom plate
Figure 14-20 Barcode wiring
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 14-12

Use a cable tie to

tie the bar code
scanner wire to the
rack, and the long
wire loops are
bundled behind the
bar code meter
Figure 14-21 Connection precautions
7) For barcode alignment, please refer to 7.7 Bar Code Unit (Optional).
8) After alignment, open the operating software with the engineer user name and password and click
UtilitySystem SetupFactory Setup. See Figure 14-11 Utility-System Setup-Factory Setup
9) Click Optional Modules. See Figure 14-12 Factory Setup-Optional Modules.
10) Tick the Enable/Disable Sample Carousel Bar Code and Enable/Disable Reagent Bar Code
checkboxes, and click Save.
Note: Please tick the checkboxes according to the actual conditions of the client. For example, if the
client only scans with the reagent barcode, but does not use the sample barcode scanning, you can
tick only Enable/Disable Reagent Bar Code.
Figure 14-22 Optional Modules-Enable/Disable Bar Code
11) Complete the installation of the barcode scanning module.
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 14-13

Appendices
A.1 BS-230 Installation Acceptance Report
BS-230_Installatio
n Acceptance Report_V1.0_EN.doc
A.2 BS-230 Moving Parts Position Confirmation Guide (No

Alignment Tooling)
BS-230_Moving
Parts Position Confirmation Guide (No Alignment Tooling)_V1.0_EN.doc
A.3 Tool list
Tool list.xlsx
A.4 BS-230_Error Information Feedback Form_V1.0_EN
BS-230&240_Erro
r Information Feedback Form_V1.0_EN.doc
A.5 BS-230 Series Recovery Checklist
BS-230_Series
Recovery Checklist_V1.0_EN.docx
A.6 Maintenance log sheet
BS-230_Maintena
nce log sheet_V1.0_EN.xlsx
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 14-14

A.7 Fluidic Diagram

Tube label
Deionized water
Low-concentration waste
SV01 T105
D05 T104 D06
T102 T103
T106 Reagent carousel
SY01 MIX
NS
D19
W23
D18
T204
D04 W12
T303
D17
T203
D16 W11
W22
T202
P01 D15
W21
P02 T302
D14
D03
CV1
D13 W02
Panel
D02 T101 T301
T201 W01
D12
FL01
D01 D11
FL02
FS01 V02
V01
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 14-15

Analyzing Unit
Sensor
Standard modules
Waste
DI water
tank
tank
Fluidic Port Panel
Low-conc.
DI water DI water waste outlet
inlet1 inlet2
Low-level floater
Deionized water
FL01
The tube length tolerance of the tube is not specified: when the tube length ≤ 100mm, the tolerance is ±5mm;
when the tube length > 100mm, the tolerance is ±10mm.
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 14-16

Tube Rubber hose Type Part No. Actual Number Tube Label Remark
label length of type
Labels
D03 Rubber hose 0.30.2*6.4mm TPU 082-002374-00 400 1 PVC tubing Assembling fluidic
polyether 8mm outlet assembly
D04 Rubber hose 0.30.2*6.4mm TPU 082-002374-00 200 1 PVC tubing
polyether 8mm
D05 Plastic M6G-020049--- 450 / /
tube.PTFEID1.5mmXOD2.5mmX
100M
D06 Rubber 0040-10-32301 2300 / / Assembling
hose .PTFE,0.040"IDX0.066"OD reagent
preheating
assembly
polyether 8mm
D16 Rubber hose .1.6*3.2mm TPU 082-002375-00 500 1 PVC tubing
polyether 1.5mm
polyether 8mm
D18 Rubber hose 0.30.2*6.4mm TPU 082-002374-00 300 1 PVC tubing Assembling
polyether 8mm instrument body
assembly
D19 Rubber hose 0.30.2*6.4mm TPU 082-002374-00 250 1 PVC tubing Assembling
polyether 8mm instrument body
assembly
W02 Hose. Φ9.525XΦ15.875 natural 082-000384-00 140 / / Assembling fluidic
color PVC 55~60º outlet assembly
W11 Hose. Φ9.525XΦ15.875 natural 082-000384-00 300 / / Assembling
color PVC 55~60º instrument body
assembly
assembly
assembly
assembly
No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 14-17

BS-230 - New Service Manual - V2.0 - EN

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

BS-230 - New Service Manual - V2.0 - EN

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

BS-230 Chemistry Analyzer

Electric shock hazards

Moving Parts Hazards

Photometer lamp hazards

Sample, calibrator and control hazards

Reagent and wash solution hazards

No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 III

System disposal hazards

Fire and explosion hazards

Removal of analyzer from use for repair or disposal

Cleaning and Decontamination

Electromagnetic noise precautions

Chemistry parameter configuration precautions

ISE module precautions

Reagent, calibrator and control precautions

ISE calibration precautions

ISE wash solution biohazards

Data archiving precautions

External equipment precautions

Maintenance and Servicing Precautions

No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 VII

Labels and silkscreen

Authorized Representative in the European

The following definition of the WEEE label applies

No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 VIII

Caution: hot surface

“ON” for a part of equipment

“OFF” for a part of equipment

Protective conductor terminal

Fuse(for models powered by 220V-230V~ or

Instrument Labels and Silkscreen

Interfaces for fluid connection

ISE tube installation location

Moving parts warning

Photometer lamp warning

Probe collision warning

Liquid level floater

Cuvette replacement window

Risk of injury when replacing the lamp

No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 XII

Chapter 11 1. Added chapter V1.0

No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 XIII

No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 XIV

3.3.2 Locations and FRU details ................................................................................................... 3-6

4.2 Harzards .................................................................................................................... 4-1

No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 XVI

6.6.1 Remove the software ......................................................................................................... 6-22

No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 XVII

8.3 Installation Requirements ........................................................................................... 8-2

No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 XVIII

10.2.13 The Probe is spinning or leaking ................................................................................... 10-15

No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 XIX

A.3 Tool list ...................................................................................................................................... 14-14

Figure 1-1 Chemistry analyzer

Figure 1-2 System structure

No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 1-1

Figure 1-3 Layout of the analyzer’s operation panel

(1) Probe (2) Sample/reagent carousel

1.3 Functions of Analyzing Unit

No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 1-2

Reaction Carousel 40 positions are available for plastic cuvettes.

No.HSH-19023-BS-230 Version:2.0 1-3

2 System Performance and Workflow